all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 |
|
GSM part | Users Manual | 18.66 KiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
LAM part | Users Manual | 2.74 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
updated Manual | Users Manual | 1.30 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
users manual | Users Manual | 1.31 MiB | ||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | native | ||||||
1 2 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | native | ||||||
1 2 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info |
1 2 | GSM part | Users Manual | 18.66 KiB |
XPLORE TECHNOLOGIES - RIM CONFIGURATION AND USE Xplore Technologies Rim 1902g and 1802g Modem Configuration Requirements Please note these instructions are for the integrated RIM Modems only. This Unit has been configured for the RIM module, DO NOT change any other settings than listed below, otherwise modem might not operate. RIM OEM Radio Modem for GSM/GPRS Wireless Networks Required information Before you start, you should have the following information available:
access point name (APN) for your network IP address for your primary domain name server (DNS) Connecting with Windows 2000/XP To connect the radio modem to your computer, you must perform the following tasks:
Modify the modem init string with APN Name Modify the dial-up connection TCP/IP DNS information To Modify APN in modem properties 1. On the Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel. The Control Panel window appears. 2. Double-click the Phone and Modem Options icon. The Phone and Modem Options window 3. appears. 4. Click the Modems tab. 5. On the Modems tab, select the modem 28800 standard and click Properties. The Properties window appears. 6. Click the Advanced tab. 7. In the Extra initialization commands field, Change the last to the APN name given by Provider:
at+cgdcont=1,"IP","apn_name" where apn_name is the access point name (APN) for your network 8. Click OK. The Phone and Modem Options window appears. 9. Click OK. To Modify DSN information in dialup connection 1. Select the Dialup connect (Named GPRS) properties, hightlight, right-click, properties. 2. Click the Networking tab. 3. Click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click Properties. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window appears. 4. Enable the Use the following DNS server addresses option. In the Preferred DNS server field, type the IP address of your primary DNS server. 5. Click OK. The Properties window appears. 6. Click OK. 7. Click OK. To Use the RIM 1902G GPRS Modem Eventhough communication to the modem is possible the GPRS portion is off. This is the default every time the unit is booted. To turn on the radio, double click icon on desktop RIMON. Double click on the Dialup GPRS connection. If APN is typed correctly then the module will connect. To turn off the radio, double click icon on desktop RIMOFF. 1 XPLORE TECHNOLOGIES CORP. XPLORE UserManual RIM v.02_13_03_b
1 2 | LAM part | Users Manual | 2.74 MiB |
Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows Corporate Headquarters Cisco Systems, Inc. 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose, CA 95134-1706 USA http://www.cisco.com Tel: 408 526-4000 800 553-NETS (6387) Fax: 408 526-4100 Customer Order Number:
Text Part Number: OL-1394-06 THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS. THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY. The following information is for FCC compliance of Class A devices: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case users will be required to correct the interference at their own expense. The following information is for FCC compliance of Class B devices: The equipment described in this manual generates and may radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed in accordance with Ciscos installation instructions, it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in part 15 of the FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. Modifying the equipment without Ciscos written authorization may result in the equipment no longer complying with FCC requirements for Class A or Class B digital devices. In that event, your right to use the equipment may be limited by FCC regulations, and you may be required to correct any interference to radio or television communications at your own expense. You can determine whether your equipment is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the Cisco equipment or one of its peripheral devices. If the equipment causes interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures:
Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops.
Move the equipment to one side or the other of the television or radio.
Move the equipment farther away from the television or radio.
Plug the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the equ ipment and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.) Modifications to this product not authorized by Cisco Systems, Inc. could void the FCC approval and negate your authority to operate the product. The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCBs public domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright 1981, Regents of the University of California. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITH ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE. IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. CCIP, CCSP, the Cisco Arrow logo, the Cisco Powered Network mark, Cisco Unity, Follow Me Browsing, FormShare, and StackWise are trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc.;
Changing the Way We Work, Live, Play, and Learn, and iQuick Study are service marks of Cisco Systems, Inc.; and Aironet, ASIST, BPX, Catalyst, CCDA, CCDP, CCIE, CCNA, CCNP, Cisco, the Cisco Certified Internetwork Expert logo, Cisco IOS, the Cisco IOS logo, Cisco Press, Cisco Systems, Cisco Systems Capital, the Cisco Systems logo, Empowering the Internet Generation, Enterprise/Solver, EtherChannel, EtherSwitch, Fast Step, GigaStack, Internet Quotient, IOS, IP/TV, iQ Expertise, the iQ logo, iQ Net Readiness Scorecard, LightStream, MGX, MICA, the Networkers logo, Networking Academy, Network Registrar, Packet, PIX, Post-Routing, Pre-Routing, RateMUX, Registrar, ScriptShare, SlideCast, SMARTnet, StrataView Plus, Stratm, SwitchProbe, TeleRouter, The Fastest Way to Increase Your Internet Quotient, TransPath, and VCO are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and certain other countries. All other trademarks mentioned in this document or Web site are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (0304R) Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows Copyright 2001-2003 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Preface xii xi Audience Purpose xii Organization Conventions Related Publications xv Obtaining Documentation xiii xii C O N T E N T S xv Cisco.com xv Documentation CD-ROM xv Ordering Documentation xvi Documentation Feedback xvi Obtaining Technical Assistance xvi Cisco.com xvi Technical Assistance Center xvii Cisco TAC Website Cisco TAC Escalation Center xvii xviii Obtaining Additional Publications and Information xviii Product Overview 1-1 Introduction to the Client Adapters 1-2 Terminology 1-3 Hardware Components 1-3 1-3 Radio Radio Antenna LEDs 1-4 1-4 Software Components 1-5 1-5 Radio Firmware Driver Client Utilities 1-5 1-6 Overview of ACU Buttons on the ACU Screens 1-6 1-8 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows iii Contents Network Configurations Using Client Adapters 1-8 Ad Hoc Wireless LAN 1-9 Wireless Infrastructure with Workstations Accessing a Wired LAN 1-10 Preparing for Installation 2-2 Safety information 2-1 FCC Safety Compliance Statement Safety Guidelines Warnings 2-2 2-3 2-2 2-3 Unpacking the Client Adapter 2-3 Package Contents System Requirements Site Requirements 2-4 2-5 For Infrastructure Devices For Client Devices 2-6 2-5 Installing the Client Adapter 3-1 Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software 3-2 Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software on Windows 98, 98 SE, 2000, Me, or XP Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software on Windows NT 3-12 3-2 3-22 Verifying Installation Deciding How to Configure Your Client Adapter (Windows XP Only) Selecting Among Several Installed Client Adapters 3-24 3-22 Using the Profile Manager 4-1 4-3 4-2 4-2 Overview of Profile Manager Opening Profile Manager Creating a New Profile Including a Profile in Auto Profile Selection Selecting the Active Profile Modifying a Profile Editing a Profile Setting a Profile to Default Values Renaming a Profile Deleting a Profile 4-7 4-7 4-6 4-8 4-8 4-8 4-4 Importing and Exporting Profiles 4-9 Importing a Profile Exporting a Profile 4-9 4-9 Granting or Denying Access to Non-Administrative Users 4-10 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows iv OL-1394-06 Configuring the Client Adapter 5-1 Contents Overview 5-2 Setting System Parameters 5-3 Setting RF Network Parameters Setting Advanced Infrastructure Parameters Setting Advanced Ad Hoc Parameters Setting Network Security Parameters 5-7 5-20 5-17 5-14 Setting the Allow Association to Mixed Cells Parameter Overview of Security Features 5-21 5-21 5-22 Static WEP Keys EAP (with Dynamic WEP Keys) 5-22 Additional WEP Key Security Features Reporting Access Points that Fail LEAP Authentication Fast Secure Roaming 5-25 5-26 Synchronizing Security Features Using Static WEP 5-29 5-27 5-26 Entering a New Static WEP Key 5-29 Overwriting an Existing Static WEP Key Disabling Static WEP 5-31 5-30 Enabling LEAP Enabling Host-Based EAP 5-31 5-34 5-36 Enabling EAP-TLS Enabling PEAP Enabling EAP-SIM 5-41 5-39 Disabling LEAP or Host-Based EAP 5-42 Disabling LEAP Disabling Host-Based EAP 5-42 5-42 Using EAP Authentication 6-1 Overview 6-2 Using LEAP Using LEAP with the Windows Username and Password 6-2 6-3 After Profile Selection or Card Insertion After a Reboot or Logon After Your LEAP Credentials Expire 6-4 6-5 6-3 Using LEAP with an Automatically Prompted Login 6-6 After Profile Selection or Card Insertion After a Reboot or Logon After Your LEAP Credentials Expire 6-7 6-9 6-6 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows v Contents Using LEAP with a Manually Prompted Login 6-9 After Profile Selection After a Reboot, Logon, or Card Insertion After Your LEAP Credentials Expire 6-9 6-13 6-11 Using LEAP with a Saved Username and Password 6-13 After Profile Selection or Card Insertion After a Reboot or Logon After Your LEAP Credentials Expire 6-14 6-14 6-13 Using EAP-TLS 6-15 After Profile Selection or Card Insertion After a Reboot or Logon 6-15 6-15 Using PEAP 6-16 After Profile Selection, Card Insertion, Reboot, or Logon 6-16 Windows NT or 2000 Domain Databases or LDAP Databases Only OTP Databases Only 6-17 6-16 After Your Password Expires (Windows NT or 2000 Domain Databases Only) After Your PIN Expires (OTP Databases Only) 6-19 6-18 Using EAP-SIM 6-19 If You Are Prompted for the PIN 6-20 If the PIN Is Stored on the Computer 6-21 Restarting the Authentication Process 6-21 Performing Diagnostics 7-1 7-2 Overview of ACU Diagnostic Tools Setting Parameters that Affect ACU Diagnostic Tools Viewing the Current Status of Your Client Adapter Viewing Statistics for Your Client Adapter Viewing the Link Status Meter Running an RF Link Test 7-17 7-11 7-16 7-3 7-4 Using the Aironet Client Monitor (ACM) 8-1 Overview of ACM 8-2 The ACM Icon Tool Tip Window 8-3 Pop-Up Menu 8-2 8-5 8-5 8-6 About Exit Launch Aironet Client Utility Troubleshooting 8-6 8-6 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows vi OL-1394-06 Contents 8-9 8-7 Preferences 8-6 Turn Radio On/Off Reauthenticate Select Profile Show Connection Status 8-8 8-8 Routine Procedures 9-1 Inserting and Removing a Client Adapter 9-2 Inserting a Client Adapter 9-2 Inserting a PC Card or PC-Cardbus Card Inserting a PCI Card 9-3 9-2 Removing a Client Adapter 9-4 Removing a PC Card or PC-Cardbus Card Removing a PCI Card 9-5 Client Adapter Software Procedures 9-5 9-4 Finding the Install Wizard Version 9-5 Upgrading the Client Adapter Software Uninstalling the Client Adapter Software Finding the Driver Version Firmware Procedures 9-8 9-7 9-6 9-6 Finding the Firmware Version Upgrading the Firmware 9-8 Preventing the Driver from Upgrading the Firmware 9-8 9-10 ACU Procedures 9-12 9-13 9-12 Opening ACU Exiting ACU Modifying ACU Installation Settings Finding the Version of ACU Adding the ACU Icon to or Removing it from the Desktop Accessing Online Help 9-13 9-13 9-14 9-14 ACM Procedures 9-15 Restarting the Client Adapter Turning Your Client Adapters Radio On or Off Uninstalling the Microsoft Hot Fix 9-15 9-16 9-15 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows vii Contents Troubleshooting 10-1 Accessing the Latest Troubleshooting Information Interpreting the Indicator LEDs Troubleshooting the Client Adapter 10-3 10-2 Using the Troubleshooting Utility 10-4 Diagnosing Your Client Adapters Operation Saving the Detailed Report to a Text File Accessing Online Help 10-7 Client Adapter Recognition Problems Resolving Resource Conflicts 10-8 10-7 10-2 10-4 10-6 Resolving Resource Conflicts in Windows 98, 98 SE, and Me Resolving Resource Conflicts in Windows NT Resolving Resource Conflicts in Windows 2000 Resolving Resource Conflicts in Windows XP 10-11 10-9 10-10 10-9 10-8 10-11 Problems Associating to an Access Point Problems Authenticating to an Access Point Problems Connecting to the Network 10-11 Prioritizing Network Connections (Windows 2000 and XP Only) Losing Association upon Resuming from Suspend Mode
(Windows NT and Mini PCI Cards Only) Parameters Missing from Profile Manager Screen Windows Wireless Network Connection Icon Shows Unavailable Connection (Windows XP Only) LEAP Login Screen Does Not Appear Before Windows Login Screen (Windows 98, 98 SE, and Me Only) Microsoft Hot Fix (Windows 98 and 98 SE Only) 10-13 10-11 10-12 10-13 10-12 10-12 Error Messages 10-13 General Error Messages LEAP Authentication Error Messages PEAP Authentication Error Messages 10-14 10-18 10-21 10-21 For All PEAP-Supported Databases For Windows NT or 2000 Domain Databases For All OTP Databases For OTP Databases Using Secure Computing SofToken Version 1.3 For OTP Databases Using Secure Computing SofToken II Version 2.0 For OTP Databases Using RSA SecurID Version 2.5 10-26 10-22 10-23 10-24 10-25 EAP-SIM Authentication Error Messages 10-26 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows viii OL-1394-06 Technical Specifications A-1 Translated Safety Warnings B-1 Explosive Device Proximity Warning Dipole Antenna Installation Warning Warning for Laptop Users B-4 B-2 B-3 Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information C-1 Manufacturers Federal Communication Commission Declaration of Conformity Statement Department of Communications Canada C-3 Canadian Compliance Statement C-3 Contents C-2 European Community, Switzerland, Norway, Iceland, and Liechtenstein C-4 Declaration of Conformity with Regard to the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC 2.4-GHz Client Adapters 5-GHz Client Adapters C-5 C-6 C-4 Declaration of Conformity for RF Exposure Guidelines for Operating Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters in Japan C-6 C-6 Japanese Translation English Translation C-6 C-7 Channels, Power Levels, and Antenna Gains D-1 Channels D-2 IEEE 802.11a IEEE 802.11b D-2 D-3 Maximum Power Levels and Antenna Gains D-4 IEEE 802.11a IEEE 802.11b D-4 D-4 Configuring the Client Adapter through Windows XP E-1 Overview E-2 Overview of Security Features E-2 Static WEP Keys EAP (with Dynamic WEP Keys) E-2 E-2 Configuring the Client Adapter E-4 Enabling EAP-TLS Authentication Enabling PEAP Authentication Enabling EAP-SIM Authentication E-8 E-10 E-14 Associating to an Access Point Using Windows XP Viewing the Current Status of Your Client Adapter E-16 E-17 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows ix Contents G L O S S A R Y I N D E X Performing a Site Survey F-1 Overview F-2 Guidelines Additional Information F-2 F-2 Specifying Signal Strength Units Using Passive Mode Using Active Mode Forcing the Client Adapter to Reassociate F-3 F-7 F-3 F-13 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows x OL-1394-06 Preface The preface provides an overview of the Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows, references related publications, and explains how to obtain other documentation and technical assistance, if necessary. The following topics are covered in this section:
Audience, page xii
Purpose, page xii
Organization, page xii
Conventions, page xiii
Related Publications, page xv
Obtaining Documentation, page xv
Obtaining Technical Assistance, page xvi
Obtaining Additional Publications and Information, page xviii OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows xi Preface This publication is for the person responsible for installing, configuring, and maintaining a Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapter on a computer running Microsoft Windows 98, 98 SE, NT, 2000, Me, or XP. This person should be familiar with computing devices and with network terms and concepts. Audience Audience Purpose This publication describes the Cisco Aironet client adapters and explains how to install, configure, and troubleshoot them. Note This version of the Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows pertains specifically to versions of the client adapter software that are installed through an Install Wizard file. If you are using, installing, or upgrading to versions of client adapter software that do not use the Install Wizard, refer to version OL-1394-04 of this manual for information and instructions. Organization This publication contains the following chapters:
Chapter 1, Product Overview, describes the client adapters and their hardware and software components and illustrates two common network configurations.
Chapter 2, Preparing for Installation, provides information that you need to know before installing a client adapter, such as safety information and system requirements.
Chapter 3, Installing the Client Adapter, provides instructions for installing client adapter software.
Chapter 4, Using the Profile Manager, explains how to use the ACU profile manager feature to create and manage profiles for your client adapter.
Chapter 5, Configuring the Client Adapter, explains how to change the configuration parameters for a specific profile.
Chapter 6, Using EAP Authentication, explains the sequence of events that occurs and the actions you must take when a profile that is set for EAP authentication is selected for use.
Chapter 7, Performing Diagnostics, explains how to use ACU to perform user-level diagnostics.
Chapter 8, Using the Aironet Client Monitor (ACM), explains how to use the Aironet Client Monitor (ACM) to access status information about your client adapter and perform basic tasks.
Chapter 9, Routine Procedures, provides procedures for common tasks related to the client adapters, such as uninstalling client adapter software and restarting an adapter.
Chapter 10, Troubleshooting, provides information for diagnosing and correcting common problems that may be encountered when installing or operating a client adapter.
Appendix A, Technical Specifications, lists the physical, radio, power, and regulatory specifications for the client adapters.
Appendix B, Translated Safety Warnings, provides translations of client adapter safety warnings in nine languages. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows xii OL-1394-06 Preface Conventions
Appendix C, Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information, provides declarations of conformity and regulatory information for the client adapters.
Appendix D, Channels, Power Levels, and Antenna Gains, lists the IEEE 802.11a and IEEE 802.11b channels supported by the world's regulatory domains as well as the maximum power levels and antenna gains allowed per domain.
Appendix E, Configuring the Client Adapter through Windows XP, explains how to configure and use your client adapter with Windows XP.
Appendix F, Performing a Site Survey, shows people who are responsible for conducting a site survey how they can use ACU to determine the best placement for infrastructure devices within a wireless network. Conventions This publication uses the following conventions to convey instructions and information:
Commands and keywords are in boldface.
Variables are in italics.
Configuration parameters are capitalized.
Notes, cautions, and warnings use the following conventions and symbols:
Note Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to materials not contained in this manual. Caution Means reader be careful. In this situation, you might do something that could result in equipment damage or loss of data. Warning This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents. (To see translations of the warnings that appear in this publication, refer to the appendix Translated Safety Warnings.) Waarschuwing Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in een situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken, dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij elektrische schakelingen betrokken risicos en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van standaard maatregelen om ongelukken te voorkomen. (Voor vertalingen van de waarschuwingen die in deze publicatie verschijnen, kunt u het aanhangsel Translated Safety Warnings (Vertalingen van veiligheidsvoorschriften) raadplegen.) Varoitus Tm varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Olet tilanteessa, joka voi johtaa ruumiinvammaan. Ennen kuin tyskentelet minkn laitteiston parissa, ota selv shkkytkentihin liittyvist vaaroista ja tavanomaisista onnettomuuksien ehkisykeinoista. (Tss julkaisussa esiintyvien varoitusten knnkset lydt liitteest "Translated Safety Warnings" (knnetyt turvallisuutta koskevat varoitukset).) OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows xiii Conventions Attention Warnung Avvertenza Advarsel Preface Ce symbole davertissement indique un danger. Vous vous trouvez dans une situation pouvant entraner des blessures. Avant daccder cet quipement, soyez conscient des dangers poss par les circuits lectriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procdures courantes de prvention des accidents. Pour obtenir les traductions des mises en garde figurant dans cette publication, veuillez consulter lannexe intitule Translated Safety Warnings (Traduction des avis de scurit). Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer Situation, die zu einer Krperverletzung fhren knnte. Bevor Sie mit der Arbeit an irgendeinem Gert beginnen, seien Sie sich der mit elektrischen Stromkreisen verbundenen Gefahren und der Standardpraktiken zur Vermeidung von Unfllen bewut. (bersetzungen der in dieser Verffentlichung enthaltenen Warnhinweise finden Sie im Anhang mit dem Titel Translated Safety Warnings (bersetzung der Warnhinweise).) Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. Si in una situazione che pu causare infortuni. Prima di lavorare su qualsiasi apparecchiatura, occorre conoscere i pericoli relativi ai circuiti elettrici ed essere al corrente delle pratiche standard per la prevenzione di incidenti. La traduzione delle avvertenze riportate in questa pubblicazione si trova nellappendice, Translated Safety Warnings (Traduzione delle avvertenze di sicurezza). Dette varselsymbolet betyr fare. Du befinner deg i en situasjon som kan fre til personskade. Fr du utfrer arbeid p utstyr, m du vre oppmerksom p de faremomentene som elektriske kretser innebrer, samt gjre deg kjent med vanlig praksis nr det gjelder unng ulykker. (Hvis du vil se oversettelser av de advarslene som finnes i denne publikasjonen, kan du se i vedlegget "Translated Safety Warnings" [Oversatte sikkerhetsadvarsler].) Aviso Este smbolo de aviso indica perigo. Encontra-se numa situao que lhe poder causar danos fisicos. Antes de comear a trabalhar com qualquer equipamento, familiarize-se com os perigos relacionados com circuitos elctricos, e com quaisquer prticas comuns que possam prevenir possveis acidentes. (Para ver as tradues dos avisos que constam desta publicao, consulte o apndice Translated Safety Warnings - Tradues dos Avisos de Segurana). Advertencia!
Este smbolo de aviso significa peligro. Existe riesgo para su integridad fsica. Antes de manipular cualquier equipo, considerar los riesgos que entraa la corriente elctrica y familiarizarse con los procedimientos estndar de prevencin de accidentes. (Para ver traducciones de las advertencias que aparecen en esta publicacin, consultar el apndice titulado Translated Safety Warnings.) Varning!
Denna varningssymbol signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situation som kan leda till personskada. Innan du utfr arbete p ngon utrustning mste du vara medveten om farorna med elkretsar och knna till vanligt frfarande fr att frebygga skador. (Se frklaringar av de varningar som frekommer i denna publikation i appendix "Translated Safety Warnings" [versatta skerhetsvarningar].) Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows xiv OL-1394-06 Preface Related Publications Related Publications For more information about Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters for Windows, refer to the following publications:
Release Notes for Cisco Aironet Client Adapter Install Wizard
Release Notes for Cisco Aironet Client Adapter Firmware For more information about related Cisco Aironet products, refer to the publications for your infrastructure device. You can access Cisco Aironet technical documentation at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/wireless/index.html Obtaining Documentation Cisco provides several ways to obtain documentation, technical assistance, and other technical resources. These sections explain how to obtain technical information from Cisco Systems. Cisco.com You can access the most current Cisco documentation on the World Wide Web at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/home/home.htm You can access the Cisco website at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com International Cisco websites can be accessed from this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/public/countries_languages.shtml Documentation CD-ROM Cisco documentation and additional literature are available in a Cisco Documentation CD-ROM package, which may have shipped with your product. The Documentation CD-ROM is updated regularly and may be more current than printed documentation. The CD-ROM package is available as a single unit or through an annual or quarterly subscription. Registered Cisco.com users can order a single Documentation CD-ROM (product number DOC-CONDOCCD=) through the Cisco Ordering tool:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/partner/ordering/ordering_place_order_ordering_tool_launch.html All users can order monthly or quarterly subscriptions through the online Subscription Store:
http://www.cisco.com/go/subscription OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows xv Obtaining Technical Assistance Ordering Documentation Preface You can find instructions for ordering documentation at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/es_inpck/pdi.htm You can order Cisco documentation in these ways:
Registered Cisco.com users (Cisco direct customers) can order Cisco product documentation from the Networking Products MarketPlace:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/partner/ordering/index.shtml
Nonregistered Cisco.com users can order documentation through a local account representative by calling Cisco Systems Corporate Headquarters (California, U.S.A.) at 408 526-7208 or, elsewhere in North America, by calling 800 553-NETS (6387). Documentation Feedback You can submit comments electronically on Cisco.com. On the Cisco Documentation home page, click Feedback at the top of the page. You can e-mail your comments to bug-doc@cisco.com. You can submit comments by using the response card (if present) behind the front cover of your document or by writing to the following address:
Cisco Systems Attn: Customer Document Ordering 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose, CA 95134-9883 We appreciate your comments. Obtaining Technical Assistance Cisco provides Cisco.com, which includes the Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC) website, as a starting point for all technical assistance. Customers and partners can obtain online documentation, troubleshooting tips, and sample configurations from the Cisco TAC website. Cisco.com registered users have complete access to the technical support resources on the Cisco TAC website, including TAC tools and utilities. Cisco.com Cisco.com offers a suite of interactive, networked services that let you access Cisco information, networking solutions, services, programs, and resources at any time, from anywhere in the world. Cisco.com provides a broad range of features and services to help you with these tasks:
Streamline business processes and improve productivity
Resolve technical issues with online support
Download and test software packages Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows xvi OL-1394-06 Preface Obtaining Technical Assistance
Order Cisco learning materials and merchandise
Register for online skill assessment, training, and certification programs To obtain customized information and service, you can self-register on Cisco.com at this URL:
http://tools.cisco.com/RPF/register/register.do Technical Assistance Center The Cisco TAC is available to all customers who need technical assistance with a Cisco product, technology, or solution. Two types of support are available: the Cisco TAC website and the Cisco TAC Escalation Center. The type of support that you choose depends on the priority of the problem and the conditions stated in service contracts, when applicable. We categorize Cisco TAC inquiries according to urgency:
Priority level 4 (P4)You need information or assistance concerning Cisco product capabilities, product installation, or basic product configuration. There is little or no impact to your business operations.
Priority level 3 (P3)Operational performance of the network is impaired, but most business operations remain functional. You and Cisco are willing to commit resources during normal business hours to restore service to satisfactory levels.
Priority level 2 (P2)Operation of an existing network is severely degraded, or significant aspects of your business operations are negatively impacted by inadequate performance of Cisco products. You and Cisco will commit full-time resources during normal business hours to resolve the situation.
Priority level 1 (P1)An existing network is down, or there is a critical impact to your business operations. You and Cisco will commit all necessary resources around the clock to resolve the situation. Cisco TAC Website The Cisco TAC website provides online documents and tools to help troubleshoot and resolve technical issues with Cisco products and technologies. To access the Cisco TAC website, go to this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/tac All customers, partners, and resellers who have a valid Cisco service contract have complete access to the technical support resources on the Cisco TAC website. Some services on the Cisco TAC website require a Cisco.com login ID and password. If you have a valid service contract but do not have a login ID or password, go to this URL to register:
http://tools.cisco.com/RPF/register/register.do If you are a Cisco.com registered user, and you cannot resolve your technical issues by using the Cisco TAC website, you can open a case online at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/tac/caseopen If you have Internet access, we recommend that you open P3 and P4 cases online so that you can fully describe the situation and attach any necessary files. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows xvii Obtaining Additional Publications and Information Cisco TAC Escalation Center Preface The Cisco TAC Escalation Center addresses priority level 1 or priority level 2 issues. These classifications are assigned when severe network degradation significantly impacts business operations. When you contact the TAC Escalation Center with a P1 or P2 problem, a Cisco TAC engineer automatically opens a case. To obtain a directory of toll-free Cisco TAC telephone numbers for your country, go to this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/warp/public/687/Directory/DirTAC.shtml Before calling, please check with your network operations center to determine the Cisco support services to which your company is entitled: for example, SMARTnet, SMARTnet Onsite, or Network Supported Accounts (NSA). When you call the center, please have available your service agreement number and your product serial number. Obtaining Additional Publications and Information Information about Cisco products, technologies, and network solutions is available from various online and printed sources.
The Cisco Product Catalog describes the networking products offered by Cisco Systems, as well as ordering and customer support services. Access the Cisco Product Catalog at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/products_catalog_links_launch.html
Cisco Press publishes a wide range of networking publications. Cisco suggests these titles for new and experienced users: Internetworking Terms and Acronyms Dictionary, Internetworking Technology Handbook, Internetworking Troubleshooting Guide, and the Internetworking Design Guide. For current Cisco Press titles and other information, go to Cisco Press online at this URL:
http://www.ciscopress.com
Packet magazine is the Cisco quarterly publication that provides the latest networking trends, technology breakthroughs, and Cisco products and solutions to help industry professionals get the most from their networking investment. Included are networking deployment and troubleshooting tips, configuration examples, customer case studies, tutorials and training, certification information, and links to numerous in-depth online resources. You can access Packet magazine at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/go/packet
iQ Magazine is the Cisco bimonthly publication that delivers the latest information about Internet business strategies for executives. You can access iQ Magazine at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/go/iqmagazine Internet Protocol Journal is a quarterly journal published by Cisco Systems for engineering professionals involved in designing, developing, and operating public and private internets and intranets. You can access the Internet Protocol Journal at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/about/ac123/ac147/about_cisco_the_internet_protocol_journal.html
TrainingCisco offers world-class networking training. Current offerings in network training are listed at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/learning/le31/learning_recommended_training_list.html Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows xviii OL-1394-06 C H A P T E R 1 Product Overview This chapter describes the Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters and illustrates their role in a wireless network. The following topics are covered in this chapter:
Introduction to the Client Adapters, page 1-2
Hardware Components, page 1-3
Software Components, page 1-5
Network Configurations Using Client Adapters, page 1-8 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 1-1 Introduction to the Client Adapters Chapter 1 Product Overview Introduction to the Client Adapters The Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters are radio modules that provide transparent wireless data communications between fixed, portable, or mobile devices and other wireless devices or a wired network infrastructure. The client adapters are fully compatible when used in devices supporting Plug-and-Play (PnP) technology. The primary function of the client adapters is to transfer data packets transparently through the wireless infrastructure through an access point connected to a wired LAN. The adapters operate similarly to a standard network product except that the cable is replaced with a radio connection and an access point is required to make the connection to the wire. No special wireless networking functions are required, and all existing applications that operate over a network can operate using the adapters. This document covers the five client adapters described in Table 1-1. Table 1-1 Client Adapter Types Client Adapter Model Number PC card AIR-PCM3xx LM card AIR-LMC3xx PCI card AIR-PCI3xx Description An IEEE 802.11b-compliant 2.4-GHz 11-Mbps PCMCIA card radio module that can be inserted into any device equipped with an external Type II or Type III PC card slot. Host devices can include laptops, notebook computers, personal digital assistants, and handheld or portable devices. The PC card is available in the 340 and 350 series. An IEEE 802.11b-compliant 2.4-GHz 11-Mbps PCMCIA card radio module that is usually preinstalled in a device equipped with an internal Type II or Type III PC card slot. Host devices usually include handheld or portable devices. The LM card is available in the 340 and 350 series. An IEEE 802.11b-compliant 2.4-GHz 11-Mbps client adapter card radio module that can be inserted into any device equipped with an empty PCI expansion slot, such as a desktop personal computer. The PCI card is available in the 340 and 350 series. Illustration CISCO AIRONET 340 SERIES 11 Mbps WIRELESS LAN ADAPTER CISCO AIRONET 340 SERIES 11 Mbps WIRELESS LAN ADAPTER Mini PCI card AIR-MPI350 An IEEE 802.11b-compliant 2.4-GHz 11-Mbps client adapter card radio module that is preinstalled in a device equipped with an internal Type IIIA mini PCI card slot, such as a laptop computer. The mini PCI card is available only in the 350 series. PC-Cardbus card AIR-CB20A An IEEE 802.11a-compliant 5-GHz 54-Mbps client adapter card radio module with a Cardbus interface that can be inserted into any device equipped with an external Type II or Type III Cardbus slot. Host devices can include laptops, notebook computers, personal digital assistants, and handheld or portable devices. 9 1 5 7 4 3 9 8 7 4 9 8 1 5 6 0 9 1 5 6 5 9 7 4 7 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 1-2 OL-1394-06 Chapter 1 Product Overview Hardware Components Note In the first three product model numbers, the first x represents the client adapter series (340 or 350), and the second x indicates the wired equivalent privacy (WEP) level of the card, where 0 = no WEP capability, 1 = 40-bit WEP, and 2 = 128-bit WEP. If the last two product model numbers contain K9, the card is 128-bit WEP capable. Terminology The following terms are used throughout this document:
client adapterRefers to all five types of adapters.
PC card, LM card, PCI card, mini PCI card, or PC-Cardbus cardRefers to a specific adapter.
workstation (or station)Refers to a computing device with an installed client adapter.
infrastructure deviceRefers to a device that connects client adapters to a wired LAN, such as an access point, bridge, or base station. Throughout this document, access point is used to represent infrastructure devices in general. Hardware Components The client adapter has three major hardware components: a radio, a radio antenna, and two LEDs. Radio Different radios are used for the 2.4-GHz and 5-GHz client adapters:
The Cisco Aironet 340 and 350 series PC, LM, PCI, and mini PCI cards are IEEE 802.11b-compliant client adapters. They contain a direct-sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) radio that operates in the 2.4-GHz Industrial Scientific Medical (ISM) license-free band. The 340 series 30-milliwatt (mW) radio and the 350 series 100-mW radio transmit data over a half-duplex radio channel operating at up to 11 Mbps. These cards operate with other IEEE 802.11b-compliant client devices in ad hoc (or peer-to-peer) mode or with Cisco Aironet 340, 350, 1100, and 1200 Series Access Points (with a 2.4-GHz radio) and other IEEE 802.11b-compliant infrastructure devices in infrastructure mode. They are approved for indoor and outdoor use. DSSS technology distributes a radio signal over a wide range of frequencies and then returns the signal to the original frequency range at the receiver. The benefit of this technology is its ability to protect the data transmission from interference. For example, if a particular frequency encounters noise or interference or both, enough redundancy is built into the signal on other frequencies that the client adapter usually will still be successful in its transmission.
The Cisco Aironet AIR-CB20A PC-Cardbus card is an IEEE 802.11a-compliant client adapter. It contains an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) radio that operates in the Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (UNII) 1 and UNII 2 license-free bands located in the lower 5-GHz portion of the radio frequency spectrum. The 20-mW radio transmits data over a half-duplex radio channel operating at up to 54 Mbps. This card interoperates with other IEEE 802.11a-compliant client devices in ad hoc mode or with Cisco Aironet 1200 Series Access Points
(with a 5-GHz radio) and other IEEE 802.11a-compliant infrastructure devices in infrastructure mode. It is approved for indoor use only except in the United States, which allows for outdoor use on channels 52 through 64. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 1-3 Hardware Components Radio Antenna Chapter 1 Product Overview The type of antenna used depends on your client adapter:
PC cards have an integrated, permanently attached diversity antenna. The benefit of the diversity antenna system is improved coverage. The system works by allowing the card to switch and sample between its two antenna ports in order to select the optimum port for receiving data packets. As a result, the card has a better chance of maintaining the radio frequency (RF) connection in areas of interference. The antenna is housed within the section of the card that hangs out of the PC card slot when the card is installed.
LM cards are shipped without an antenna; however, an antenna can be connected through the cards external connector.
PCI cards are shipped with a 2-dBi dipole antenna that attaches to the cards antenna connector. However, other types of antennas may be used. PCI cards can be operated through only the primary
(or right) antenna port.
Mini PCI cards are designed to be used with either one or two antennas, which connect to the cards two antenna connectors. If two antennas are used, the radio automatically selects the antenna that presents the best RF signal. If only one antenna is used, the radio finds and uses it regardless of which connector it is plugged into.
PC-Cardbus cards have an integrated, permanently attached non-diversity antenna that contains two antenna ports, one for transmitting and one for receiving. The card cannot switch and sample between the ports. The antenna is housed within the section of the card that hangs out of the Cardbus slot when the card is installed. Note Refer to the Antenna Mode (Transmit and Receive) parameters in Table 5-4 and Table 5-5 for information on setting the client adapters antenna mode. Note External antennas used in combination with a power setting resulting in a radiated power level above 100 mW equivalent isotropic radiated power (EIRP) are not allowed for use within the European community and other countries that have adopted the European R&TTE directive or the CEPT recommendation Rec 70.03 or both. For more details on legal combinations of power levels and antennas in those countries, refer to the Declaration of Conformity with Regard to the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC section on page C-4 and the Maximum Power Levels and Antenna Gains section on page D-4. LEDs The client adapters have two LEDs that glow or blink to indicate the status of the adapter or to convey error messages. Refer to Chapter 10 for an interpretation of the LED codes. Note Mini PCI cards do not have LEDs. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 1-4 OL-1394-06 Chapter 1 Product Overview Software Components Software Components The client adapter has three major software components: radio firmware, a driver, and client utilities. These components are installed together by running a single Install Wizard file that is available from Cisco.com. This file can be run on Windows 98, 98 SE, NT, 2000, Me, or XP and can be used with any of the following client adapter types:
340 and 350 series PC, LM, and PCI cards
350 series mini PCI cards
PC-Cardbus (CB20A) cards Chapter 3 provides instructions on using the Install Wizard to install or upgrade these software components. Note Prior to the release of the Install Wizard file, each software component had to be installed separately. This version of the Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows pertains specifically to versions of the software that are available through the Install Wizard. If you are using, installing, or upgrading to versions of client adapter software that do not use the Install Wizard, refer to version OL-1394-04 of this manual for information and instructions. Radio Firmware The firmware controls the client adapters radio. The client adapter is shipped with the firmware installed in Flash memory. However, Cisco recommends that you always use the latest version. You can upgrade the client adapters firmware in three ways:
Through the Install WizardThe Install Wizard automatically upgrades the client adapters firmware to the version included in the Install Wizard file.
Through the driverThe driver included in the Install Wizard file is also bundled with client adapter firmware. Each time you insert a client adapter or reboot your computer, the driver loads and may install the firmware with which it is bundled (if that firmware is newer than the firmware that is currently installed in the adapter). You can use the Install Wizards Disable Firmware Checking parameter or ACUs Automatically Load New Firmware When NDIS Driver Is Updated parameter to specify whether the driver upgrades the firmware. Refer to page 3-6 and page 9-10 for more information.
Through ACUThe Load Firmware icon or Load New Firmware menu option in ACU enables you to upgrade the client adapters firmware from an image (*.img) file that contains only firmware. Refer to the Upgrading the Firmware section on page 9-8 for more information. Driver The driver provides an interface between a computer running a Windows operating system and the client adapter, thereby enabling Windows and the applications it runs to communicate with the adapter. The driver must be installed before the adapter can be used. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 1-5 Software Components Client Utilities Chapter 1 Product Overview Two client utilities are available for use with Cisco Aironet client adapters: Aironet Client Utility (ACU) and Aironet Client Monitor (ACM). These utilities are optional applications that interact with the radio firmware to adjust client adapter settings and display information about the adapter. ACU enables you to create configuration profiles for your client adapter and perform user-level diagnostics. Because ACU performs a variety of functions, it is documented by function throughout this manual. However, an overview of the utility is provided below to familiarize you with its interface. ACM, which is accessible from an icon in the Windows system tray, provides a small subset of the features available through ACU. Specifically, it enables you to access status information about your client adapter and perform basic tasks. Chapter 8 provides detailed information and instructions on using ACM. Note If your computer is running Windows XP, you can configure your client adapter through the Windows operating system instead of through ACU. Refer to Appendix E for information. However, ACU is recommended for configuring the client adapter. Overview of ACU The Aironet Client Utility screen (see Figure 1-1) is ACUs primary screen. Figure 1-1 Aironet Client Utility Screen Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 1-6 OL-1394-06 Chapter 1 Product Overview Software Components The title bar at the top of the Aironet Client Utility screen shows the profile that is being used by the client adapter. The status bar at the bottom of the Aironet Client Utility screen reflects the current state of your client adapter. The following states are possible, where radio_name is the client adapter type and ap_name is the configured name of an access point:
Your radio_name is Associated to ap_name
Your radio_name is Not Associated!
Authentication Started with ap_name
Your radio_name is Authenticated to ap_name
Authentication Failed with ap_name
Your radio_name is in AdHoc Mode
Your radio_name is being loaded with new firmware!
The radio in your radio_name is turned OFF!
Unable to read the status from your Wireless LAN Adapter!
Your radio_name has a problem!
Note Some 340 series cards may improperly display a radio_name of 4800. Note Aironet Extensions must be enabled on access points running Cisco IOS release 12.2(4)JA or greater in order for the ap_name to appear in the status bar. The information shown in the status bar is updated once per second. The right side of the status bar shows the current time of day. If you set the clock to display seconds in the Aironet Client Utility Preferences screen, the time includes seconds in addition to hours and minutes. Note To enable the clock to display seconds, open ACU, click the Preferences icon or select Preferences from the Options drop-down menu, check the Display Seconds on Clock check box, and click OK. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 1-7 Network Configurations Using Client Adapters Buttons on the ACU Screens Chapter 1 Product Overview The buttons on the ACU screens are used to perform specific functions. Table 1-2 describes the most common buttons. Table 1-2 Buttons on the ACU Screens Button Apply Cancel Defaults Help OK Start Stop Description Saves any changes without exiting the screen Exits the screen without saving any changes Displays the default value of each parameter Provides information on the screen and its parameters Saves any changes and exits the screen Initiates a test Stops a test that is running Network Configurations Using Client Adapters Client adapters can be used in a variety of network configurations. In some configurations, access points provide connections to your network or act as repeaters to increase wireless communication range. The maximum communication range is based on how you configure your wireless network. This section describes and illustrates the two most common network configurations:
Ad hoc wireless local area network (LAN)
Wireless infrastructure with workstations accessing a wired LAN For examples of more complex network configurations involving client adapters and access points, refer to the documentation for your access point. Note Refer to Chapter 5 for information on setting the client adapters network mode. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 1-8 OL-1394-06 Chapter 1 Product Overview Ad Hoc Wireless LAN Network Configurations Using Client Adapters An ad hoc (or peer-to-peer) wireless LAN (see Figure 1-2) is the simplest wireless LAN configuration. In a wireless LAN using an ad hoc network configuration, all devices equipped with a client adapter can be linked together and communicate directly with each other. The use of an infrastructure device, such as an access point, is not required. Figure 1-2 Ad Hoc Wireless LAN 0 2 5 7 4 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 1-9 Network Configurations Using Client Adapters Chapter 1 Product Overview Wireless Infrastructure with Workstations Accessing a Wired LAN A microcellular network can be created by placing two or more access points on a LAN. Figure 1-3 shows a microcellular network with workstations accessing a wired LAN through several access points. This configuration is useful with portable or mobile stations because it allows them to be directly connected to the wired network even while moving from one microcell domain to another. This process is transparent, and the connection to the file server or host is maintained without disruption. The mobile station stays connected to an access point as long as it can. However, once the transfer of data packets needs to be retried or beacons are missed, the station automatically searches for and associates to another access point. This process is referred to as seamless roaming. Figure 1-3 Wireless Infrastructure with Workstations Accessing a Wired LAN Access Point
(Root Unit) Wired LAN Access Point
(Root Unit) 5 3 8 5 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 1-10 OL-1394-06 C H A P T E R 2 Preparing for Installation This chapter provides information that you need to know before installing a client adapter. The following topics are covered in this chapter:
Safety information, page 2-2
Unpacking the Client Adapter, page 2-3
System Requirements, page 2-4
Site Requirements, page 2-5 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 2-1 Safety information Safety information Chapter 2 Preparing for Installation Follow the guidelines in this section to ensure proper operation and safe use of the client adapter. FCC Safety Compliance Statement The FCC, with its action in ET Docket 96-8, has adopted a safety standard for human exposure to RF electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC-certified equipment. When used with approved Cisco Aironet antennas, Cisco Aironet products meet the uncontrolled environmental limits found in OET-65 and ANSI C95.1, 1991. Proper operation of this radio device according to the instructions in this publication will result in user exposure substantially below the FCC recommended limits. Safety Guidelines
Do not touch or move the antenna while the unit is transmitting or receiving.
Do not hold any component containing a radio such that the antenna is very close to or touching any exposed parts of the body, especially the face or eyes, while transmitting.
Do not operate the radio or attempt to transmit data unless the antenna is connected; otherwise, the radio may be damaged.
High-gain, wall-mount, or mast-mount antennas are designed to be professionally installed and should be located at a minimum distance of 12 inches (30 cm) or more from the body of all persons. Please contact your professional installer, VAR, or antenna manufacturer for proper installation requirements.
Use in specific environments:
The use of wireless devices in hazardous locations is limited to the constraints posed by the safety directors of such environments. The use of wireless devices on airplanes is governed by the Federal Aviation Administration
(FAA). The use of wireless devices in hospitals is restricted to the limits set forth by each hospital. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 2-2 OL-1394-06 Chapter 2 Preparing for Installation Warnings Unpacking the Client Adapter Observe the following warnings when operating the client adapter:
Warning Do not operate your wireless network device near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the device has been modified to be especially qualified for such use. Warning In order to comply with FCC radio frequency (RF) exposure limits, dipole antennas should be located at a minimum of 7.9 inches (20 cm) or more from the body of all persons. Warning In order to comply with RF exposure limits established in the ANSI C95.1 standards, it is recommended when using a laptop with a PC card client adapter that the adapters integrated antenna is positioned more than 2 inches (5 cm) from your body or nearby persons during extended periods of transmitting or operating time. If the antenna is positioned less than 2 inches (5 cm) from the user, it is recommended that the user limit exposure time. Translated versions of these safety warnings are provided in Appendix B. Unpacking the Client Adapter Follow these steps to unpack the client adapter:
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Open the shipping container and carefully remove the contents. Return all packing materials to the shipping container and save it. Ensure that all items listed in the Package Contents section below are included in the shipment. Check each item for damage. Note If any item is damaged or missing, notify your authorized Cisco sales representative. Any remote antenna and its associated wiring are shipped separately. Package Contents Each client adapter is shipped with the following items:
Standard 2-dBi dipole antenna (PCI cards only)
Quick Start Guide: Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters
Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters CD (for 2.4-GHz client adapters) or Cisco Aironet 5-GHz 54-Mbps Wireless Adapters CD (for 5-GHz client adapters)
Cisco product registration card OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 2-3 System Requirements System Requirements Chapter 2 Preparing for Installation In addition to the items shipped with the client adapter, you also need the following in order to install and use the adapter:
One of the following computing devices running Windows 98, 98 SE, NT, 2000, Me, or XP:
Laptop, notebook, or portable or handheld device equipped with a Type II or Type III PC card slot or Cardbus slot Desktop personal computer equipped with an empty PCI expansion slot Handheld or portable device with an embedded LM card Laptop or other computing device with an embedded mini PCI card Note PC-Cardbus cards are not supported for use with Windows NT. Note Cisco recommends using a display with a minimum resolution of 800 x 600 pixels. Note All drivers and supporting software (Card and Socket Services) for the PC card slot or Cardbus slot must be loaded and configured.
35 MB of free hard disk space (minimum)
A maximum of eight network connections if your computer is running Windows 98 or 98 SE Note Windows 98 and 98 SE limit your computers network connections. If you try to install a client adapter when eight network devices (such as a PCMCIA Ethernet card, dial-up adapter, VPN adapter, docking station Ethernet card, etc.) are already connected to your computer, the new adapter cannot establish a network connection.
Windows NT Service Pack 6 or greater if your computer is running Windows NT
A Phillips screwdriver (for PCI cards)
The Microsoft 802.1X supplicant, if your wireless network uses EAP-TLS, PEAP, or EAP-SIM authentication
If your wireless network uses PEAP authentication with a One-Time Password (OTP) user database:
SofToken version 1.3, 2.0, or greater from Secure Computing; SecurID version 2.5 from RSA;
or hardware token from OTP vendors Your software token PIN or hardware token password Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 2-4 OL-1394-06 Chapter 2 Preparing for Installation Site Requirements
If your wireless network uses EAP-SIM authentication:
PCSC-compliant smartcard reader installed in your computers Type II or Type III PC card slot Gemplus SIM+ smartcard inserted in the reader The SIM cards PIN Note The EAP-SIM supplicant included in the Install Wizard file supports only Gemplus SIM+
cards; however, an updated supplicant is available that supports standard GSM-SIM cards as well as more recent versions of the EAP-SIM protocol. The new supplicant is available for download from the ftpeng FTP server at the following URL:
ftp://ftpeng.cisco.com/ftp/pwlan/eapsim/CiscoEapSim.dll
The following information from your system administrator:
The logical name for your workstation (also referred to as client name) The protocols necessary to bind to the client adapter The case-sensitive service set identifier (SSID) for your RF network If your computer is not connected to a DHCP server, the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway address of your computer The wired equivalent privacy (WEP) keys of the access points with which your client adapter will communicate, if your wireless network uses static WEP for security The username and password for your network account Site Requirements This section discusses the site requirements for both infrastructure and client devices. For Infrastructure Devices Because of differences in component configuration, placement, and physical environment, every network application is a unique installation. Therefore, before you install any wireless infrastructure devices (such as access points, bridges, and base stations, which connect your client adapters to a wired LAN), a site survey must be performed to determine the optimum placement of these devices to maximize range, coverage, and network performance. Appendix F, which is provided for people who are responsible for conducting a site survey, explains how ACUs site survey tool can be used to determine the best placement for infrastructure devices within a wireless network. Note Infrastructure devices are installed and initially configured prior to client devices. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 2-5 Site Requirements For Client Devices Chapter 2 Preparing for Installation Because the client adapter is a radio device, it is susceptible to RF obstructions and common sources of interference that can reduce throughput and range. Follow these guidelines to ensure the best possible performance:
Install the client adapter in an area where large steel structures such as shelving units, bookcases, and filing cabinets will not obstruct radio signals to and from the client adapter. Install the client adapter away from microwave ovens. Microwave ovens operate on the same frequency as the client adapter and can cause signal interference. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 2-6 OL-1394-06 C H A P T E R 3 Installing the Client Adapter This chapter provides instructions for installing the client adapters firmware, driver, utilities, and security modules. The following topics are covered in this chapter:
Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software, page 3-2
Verifying Installation, page 3-22
Deciding How to Configure Your Client Adapter (Windows XP Only), page 3-22
Selecting Among Several Installed Client Adapters, page 3-24 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 3-1 Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software Chapter 3 Installing the Client Adapter Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software This section enables you to install or upgrade Cisco Aironet client adapter firmware, drivers, utilities, and security modules from a self-extracting executable file named Windows-Client-Installation-Wizard-v.exe, where v represents the version number. Follow the instructions below to install or upgrade client adapter software on a computer running Windows 98, 98 SE, 2000, Me, or XP. If your computer is running Windows NT, follow the instructions on page 3-12. Caution The Install Wizard automatically upgrades client adapter firmware to the version included in the Install Wizard file. Both of the client adapters LEDs light continuously while the firmware upgrade occurs. Do not eject the client adapter while the firmware is being upgraded. Note The Install Wizard file is not yet available on the CD that ships with Cisco Aironet client adapters. If you are installing or upgrading to versions of client adapter software that do not use the Install Wizard file, refer to version OL-1394-04 of this manual for installation, configuration, and operation instructions. Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software on Windows 98, 98 SE, 2000, Me, or XP Follow the steps below to install or upgrade client adapter software components on a computer running Windows 98, 98 SE, 2000, Me, or XP. Note Windows Me and XP come with a driver that is installed automatically the first time you insert a PC, LM, or PCI card. Follow the procedure below to upgrade this driver to the latest one available. Step 1 Step 2 Use your computers web browser to access the following URL:
http://www.cisco.com/public/sw-center/sw-wireless.shtml Select Option #2: Aironet Wireless Software Display Tables. Note You can download software from the Software Selector tool instead of the display tables. To do so, select Option #1: Aironet Wireless Software Selector, follow the instructions on the screen, and go to Step 6. Select Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters. Under Aironet Client Adapter Installation Wizard (For Windows), select Aironet Client Adapter Installation Wizard for Windows. Select the Install Wizard file with the greatest version number. Read and accept the terms and conditions of the Software License Agreement. Select the file again to download it. Save the file to your computers hard drive. Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 3-2 OL-1394-06 Chapter 3 Installing the Client Adapter Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software Step 9 Follow the instructions in Chapter 9 to insert the client adapter into your computer, if it is not already inserted. The instructions are different for PC cards, PC-Cardbus cards, and PCI cards. Caution Do not eject your client adapter at any time during the installation process, including during the reboot. Step 10 If a driver is not currently installed for your client adapter, the Found New Hardware Wizard screen appears. Click Cancel. Step 11 Find the Install Wizard file using Windows Explorer, double-click it, and extract its files to a folder. Note To extract the files, click Browse on the WinZip Self-Extractor screen, select the folder in which you want the files to be placed, and click OK and Unzip. After the files are extracted, click OK to close the screen. Step 12 Close Windows Explorer. The Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapter Installation Wizard screen appears (see Figure 3-1). Figure 3-1 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapter Installation Wizard Screen OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 3-3 Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software Chapter 3 Installing the Client Adapter Step 13 Select one of the following options on the Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapter Installation Wizard screen and click Next:
Note To ensure compatibility among software components, Cisco recommends that you perform an express installation. If you perform a custom installation, Cisco recommends that you install all components.
Express Installation/Upgrade (recommended)Silently installs the client adapter firmware, drivers, client utilities, and security modules using the default values listed in Table 3-1.
Custom Installation/UpgradeEnables you to specify which software components are installed and to change the default values of certain parameters. Step 14 If a message appears indicating that you may be required to restart your computer at the end of the installation process, click OK. Note If you click Cancel, the installation process terminates. Step 15 If you selected an express installation, go to Step 17. If you selected a custom installation, the Custom Installation screen appears (see Figure 3-2). Figure 3-2 Custom Installation Screen Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 3-4 OL-1394-06 Chapter 3 Installing the Client Adapter Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software Step 16 Follow the steps below to make selections on this screen. a. Make sure a check mark appears beside every software component that you want to install. For every component that is checked, the Install Wizard will install its version of that component. Every component that is not checked will remain as it currently is on your system. Note Click the + sign beside the Security Modules option to reveal the available security components. Note Some components are dependent on others. Therefore, when you select or deselect these components, the settings of other components may change. A dependency notice appears when this occurs. b. Click the + sign beside each component to view additional parameters. The current value of each parameter appears in the Value field. c. To change the value of any parameter, click its current value in the Value field. A screen appears that lets you change the existing value. d. Enter or select a new value and click OK. Table 3-1 describes each component and its parameters and lists any default value. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 3-5 Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software Chapter 3 Installing the Client Adapter Table 3-1 Software Components and Their Parameters Component or Parameter Firmware Disable Firmware Checking Description Installs the firmware version included in the Install Wizard file. Default: Checked The Disable Firmware Checking parameter affects the firmware that is bundled with the driver, not the firmware that is included in the Install Wizard. This parameter controls whether the driver (whenever it loads) installs the firmware with which it is bundled. Note The driver loads each time you insert a client adapter or reboot your computer. Options: Yes or No Default: Yes Disable Firmware Checking Description Yes No Note Prevents the driver from installing the firmware with which it is bundled, enabling the client adapter to retain its current firmware version. Causes the driver to install the firmware with which it is bundled if that firmware is newer than the firmware that is currently installed in the client adapter. The Disable Firmware Checking parameter is functionally equivalent to the Automatically Load New Firmware When NDIS Driver Is Updated parameter on the ACU Preferences screen. The parameter that is set last is the one that governs how the driver behaves. Refer to the Preventing the Driver from Upgrading the Firmware section on page 9-10 for additional information. Drivers Aironet Client Utility Installation Path Program Folder Note The Disable Firmware Checking parameter is available in Install Wizard version 1.1 or greater. Installs the driver version included in the Install Wizard file. Default: Checked Installs the ACU version included in the Install Wizard file. Default: Checked Determines the path where the ACU software will be installed. You can change the default by entering a new path. Default: C:\Program Files\Cisco Systems\Aironet Client Utility Determines the program folder where the ACU software will be installed. You can change the default by entering a new folder name. Default: Cisco Systems Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 3-6 OL-1394-06 Chapter 3 Installing the Client Adapter Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software Table 3-1 Software Components and Their Parameters (continued) Component or Parameter Place Icon on Desktop Allow Non-Administrator Users to Save Settings to the Registry Aironet Client Monitor Installation Path Program Folder Auto Start Start After Install Description Causes the installation program to add an ACU icon to your computers desktop to provide quick access to the utility. Options: Yes or No Default: Yes Enables users without administrative rights to modify profiles in ACU and save them to the registry on computers running Windows 2000 or XP. Options: Yes or No Default: Yes Note This option is not available for Windows 98, 98 SE, and Me because these versions of Windows do not support different classes of users. Installs the ACM version included in the Install Wizard file. Default: Checked Determines the path where the ACM software will be installed. You can change the default by entering a new path. Default: C:\Program Files\Cisco Systems\Aironet Client Monitor Determines the program folder where the ACM software will be installed. You can change the default by entering a new folder name. Default: Cisco Systems Determines whether ACM starts automatically every time Windows boots. Options: Yes or No Default: Yes Note If you select No, you can later activate ACM by using Windows Explorer to find the path where the ACM software is installed and double-clicking ACUMon.exe. Determines whether ACM starts automatically after ACM is installed. Options: Yes or No Default: Yes Note If you select No, you can later activate ACM by using Windows Explorer to find the path where the ACM software is installed and double-clicking ACUMon.exe. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 3-7 Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software Chapter 3 Installing the Client Adapter Table 3-1 Software Components and Their Parameters (continued) Component or Parameter Description Program Feature Overrides Determines which ACM components are enabled. If any components are not selected now and you later want to use them, you must run this installation program again and enable them. Components: See the table below Options per component: Enable or Disable Default per component: Enable Component About Box (Help) Exit Program Launch Aironet Client Utility Troubleshooting Preferences Turn Radio On/Off Reauthenticate Select Profile Auto Profile Selection Description Displays the ACM version number and enables you to access the online help. Closes ACM for all client adapters. Activates ACU, if it is installed. Activates the troubleshooting utility, which enables you to identify and resolve configuration and association problems with your client adapter. Enables you to determine when ACM runs and to select the options that appear on the ACM pop-up menu. Turns the client adapters radio on or off. Forces your client adapter to try to reauthenticate using the username and password of the current profile. Enables you to select the active profile for your client adapter. Causes the client adapters driver to automatically select a profile from the list of profiles that were set up in ACU to be included in auto profile selection. Enables an application other than ACU to configure the client adapter. Other Configuration Application Show Connection Status Provides information on the current status Menu Options (Defaults) Determines which options are displayed on the ACM pop-up menu. Menu options: About Box (Help), Exit Program, Launch Aironet of your client adapter. Client Utility, Troubleshooting, Turn Radio On/Off, Reauthenticate, Select Profile, Show Connection Status Options per menu option: Show or Hide Default per menu option: Show Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 3-8 OL-1394-06 Chapter 3 Installing the Client Adapter Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software Table 3-1 Software Components and Their Parameters (continued) Component or Parameter Security Modules LEAP Allow Saved LEAP User Name and Password EAP-SIM Description Installs the LEAP supplicant version included in the Install Wizard file. Installing the LEAP supplicant enables you to create a profile in ACU that uses LEAP authentication. If this option is not selected now and you later want to create a profile that uses LEAP, you must run this installation program again and select this option. Default: Checked Note Refer to Chapter 5 for information on enabling LEAP. Note If you select LEAP on a Windows 98 or 98 SE device, a Microsoft hot fix is installed during installation of the LEAP security module to fix two problems related to the use of LEAP. Refer to Chapter 10 for more information on the hot fix. Note If you select LEAP on a Windows XP device, Windows XPs fast user switching feature is disabled. Enables you to create a profile in ACU that uses a saved (rather than temporary) username and password for LEAP authentication. When such a profile is used, the saved username and password are used to start the LEAP authentication process, and you are not prompted to enter them. Options: Yes or No Default: Yes Installs the EAP-SIM supplicant version included in the Install Wizard file. Installing the EAP-SIM supplicant enables the client to support EAP-SIM authentication. If this option is not selected now and you later want to use EAP-SIM, you must run this installation program again and select this option. Default: Unchecked Note Refer to Chapter 5 for information on enabling EAP-SIM. Note Note To enable EAP-SIM authentication, your computer must run Windows 2000 with the Microsoft 802.1X supplicant installed or Windows XP. If you installed the new EAP-SIM supplicant from the ftpeng FTP server, make sure the EAP-SIM option is not selected. Otherwise, the EAP-SIM supplicant included in the Install Wizard file overwrites the new supplicants settings. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 3-9 Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software Chapter 3 Installing the Client Adapter Table 3-1 Software Components and Their Parameters (continued) Component or Parameter PEAP Description Installs the PEAP supplicant version included in the Install Wizard file. Installing the PEAP supplicant enables the client to support PEAP authentication. If this option is not selected now and you later want to use PEAP, you must run this installation program again and select this option. Default: Unchecked Note Refer to Chapter 5 for information on enabling PEAP. Note Note To enable Cisco PEAP authentication, your computer must run Windows 2000 with the Microsoft 802.1X supplicant installed or Windows XP. Service Pack 1 for Windows XP and the Microsoft 802.1X supplicant for Windows 2000 include Microsofts PEAP supplicant, which supports a Windows username and password only and does not interoperate with Ciscos PEAP supplicant. To use Ciscos PEAP supplicant, install the Install Wizard file after Service Pack 1 for Windows XP or the Microsoft 802.1X supplicant for Windows 2000. Otherwise, Ciscos PEAP supplicant is overwritten by Microsofts PEAP supplicant. e. When you are finished making selections, click Next. Step 17 The installation process begins, and you are notified as each component is installed. Perform one of the following:
If the following message appears, click OK and then reboot your computer: The installation will complete and applications will be installed when a wireless LAN client adapter is inserted. If an adapter is already inserted, remove and reinsert the adapter or reboot the machine. The Found New Hardware screen appears. Depending on your computers operating system, you may have to click Next. The driver and other software components are installed. Then an ACM icon appears in the Windows system tray (unless you changed the default value during installation). Perform one of the following:
If a message appears asking if you wish to reboot now, click Yes. Note To ensure that your client adapter software is installed properly, Cisco recommends that you click Yes to reboot your computer now. If a message appears indicating that the system is about to reboot, click OK and allow your computer to restart.
If a message appears asking if you wish to reboot now, click Yes. Note To ensure that your client adapter software is installed properly, Cisco recommends that you click Yes to reboot your computer now. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 3-10 OL-1394-06 Chapter 3 Installing the Client Adapter Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software
If a message appears indicating that the system is about to reboot, click OK and allow your computer to restart. Step 18 If you want to install a second client adapter, allow your computer to reboot completely; then insert the second adapter into your computer. Depending on your computers operating system, one of the following scenarios occurs:
The Found New Hardware Wizard screen appears. Depending on your computers operating system, you may have to click Next. The driver and other software components are installed, and another ACM icon appears in the Windows system tray. Click Yes or OK when a message appears about rebooting your computer. Note To ensure that your client adapter software is installed properly, Cisco recommends that you reboot your computer now.
The driver and other software components are installed, and another ACM icon appears in the Windows system tray. Click Yes or OK when a message appears about rebooting your computer. Step 19 Note To ensure that your client adapter software is installed properly, Cisco recommends that you reboot your computer now. If your computer is not connected to a DHCP server and you plan to use TCP/IP, follow the steps below for your operating system. If you have more than one client adapter installed, repeat this step for each adapter.
Windows 98, 98 SE, and MeDouble-click My Computer, Control Panel, and Network. Select TCP/IP > Cisco Systems Wireless LAN Adapter. Click Properties, select Specify an IP address, and enter the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway address of your computer (which can be obtained from your system administrator). Click OK. In the Network window, click OK.
Windows 2000Double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and Network and Dial-up Connections. Right-click Local Area Connection x (where x represents the number of the connection). Click Properties, Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and Properties. Click Use the following IP address and enter the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway address of your computer (which can be obtained from your system administrator). Click OK. In the Local Area Connection Properties window, click OK.
Windows XPRight-click Wireless Network Connection and click Properties. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click Properties. Select Use the following IP address and enter the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway address of your computer (which can be obtained from your system administrator). Click OK Step 20 If you are prompted to restart your computer, click Yes. Step 21 Go to the Verifying Installation section on page 3-22 to determine if the installation was successful. After you verify installation, go to Chapter 4 if you want to create profiles for your client adapter. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 3-11 Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software Chapter 3 Installing the Client Adapter Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software on Windows NT Follow the steps below to install or upgrade client adapter software components on a computer running Windows NT. Note PC-Cardbus cards are not supported for use with Windows NT. Note This procedure requires that your computer has Windows NT Service Pack 6 or greater. Step 1 Use your computers web browser to access the following URL:
http://www.cisco.com/public/sw-center/sw-wireless.shtml Select Option #2: Aironet Wireless Software Display Tables. Step 2 Note You can download software from the Software Selector tool instead of the display tables. To do so, select Option #1: Aironet Wireless Software Selector, follow the instructions on the screen, and go to Step 6. Select Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters. Under Aironet Client Adapter Installation Wizard (For Windows), select Aironet Client Adapter Installation Wizard for Windows. Select the Install Wizard file with the greatest version number. Read and accept the terms and conditions of the Software License Agreement. Select the file again to download it. Save the file to your computers hard drive. If you are installing a PC or LM card, follow the steps below to obtain an available interrupt request
(IRQ):
a. Select Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Windows NT Diagnostics. b. Click the Resources tab. c. Click the IRQ button. d. The used IRQs are listed in numerical order along the left side of the Resources window. Write down the number of an IRQ that is not being used. You will need this IRQ for Step 21. If you are installing a PC or LM card, double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and Devices. Scroll down and select Pcmcia. Click Startup, select Automatic, and click OK. Follow the instructions in Chapter 9 to insert the client adapter into your computer if it is not already inserted. The instructions are different for PC cards and PCI cards. Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Caution Do not eject your client adapter at any time during the installation process, including during the reboot. Step 12 If the Windows NT Wizard screen appears, click Exit. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 3-12 OL-1394-06 Chapter 3 Installing the Client Adapter Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software Step 13 Find the Install Wizard file using Windows Explorer, double-click it, and extract its files to a folder. Note To extract the files, click Browse on the WinZip Self-Extractor screen, select the folder in which you want the files to be placed, and click OK and Unzip. After the files are extracted, click OK to close the screen. Step 14 Close Windows Explorer. The Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapter Installation Wizard screen appears (see Figure 3-3). Figure 3-3 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapter Installation Wizard Screen Step 15 Select one of the following options and click Next:
Note To ensure compatibility among software components, Cisco recommends that you perform an express installation. If you perform a custom installation, Cisco recommends that you install all components.
Express Installation/Upgrade (recommended)Silently installs the client adapter firmware, drivers, client utilities, and security modules using the default values listed in Table 3-2.
Custom Installation/UpgradeEnables you to specify which software components are installed and to change the default values of certain parameters. Step 16 A screen appears with a list of available drivers (see Figure 3-4). OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 3-13 Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software Chapter 3 Installing the Client Adapter Figure 3-4 Installable Drivers Screen Step 17 Select the driver that corresponds to your client adapter type and click Next. Note You must select a driver even if one is not being installed. Step 18 If you selected an express installation, go to Step 20. If you selected a custom installation, the Custom Installation screen appears (see Figure 3-5). Figure 3-5 Custom Installation Screen Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 3-14 OL-1394-06 Chapter 3 Installing the Client Adapter Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software Step 19 Follow the steps below to make selections on this screen. a. Make sure a check mark appears beside every software component that you want to install. For every component that is checked, the Install Wizard will install its version of that component. Every component that is not checked will remain as it is on your system. Note Click the + sign beside the Security Modules option to reveal the available security components. Note Some components are dependent on others. Therefore, when you select or deselect these components, the settings of other components may change. A dependency notice appears when this occurs. b. Click the + sign beside each component to view additional parameters. The current value of each parameter appears in the Value field. c. To change the value of any parameter, click its current value in the Value field. A screen appears that lets you change the existing value. d. Enter or select a new value and click OK. Table 3-2 describes each component and its parameters and lists any default value. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 3-15 Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software Chapter 3 Installing the Client Adapter Table 3-2 Software Components and Their Parameters Component or Parameter Firmware Disable Firmware Checking Description Installs the firmware version included in the Install Wizard file. Default: Checked The Disable Firmware Checking parameter affects the firmware that is bundled with the driver, not the firmware that is included in the Install Wizard. This parameter controls whether the driver (whenever it loads) installs the firmware with which it is bundled. Note The driver loads each time you insert a client adapter or reboot your computer. Options: Yes or No Default: Yes Disable Firmware Checking Description Yes No Note Prevents the driver from installing the firmware with which it is bundled, enabling the client adapter to retain its current firmware version. Causes the driver to install the firmware with which it is bundled if that firmware is newer than the firmware that is currently installed in the client adapter. This parameter is functionally equivalent to the Automatically Load New Firmware When NDIS Driver Is Updated parameter on the ACU Preferences screen. The parameter that is set last is the one that governs how the driver behaves. Refer to the Preventing the Driver from Upgrading the Firmware section on page 9-10 for additional information. Drivers Aironet Client Utility Installation Path Program Folder Note The Disable Firmware Checking parameter is available in Install Wizard version 1.1 or greater. Installs the driver version included in the Install Wizard file. Default: Checked Installs the ACU version included in the Install Wizard file. Default: Checked Determines the path where the ACU software will be installed. You can change the default by entering a new path. Default: C:\Program Files\Cisco Systems\Aironet Client Utility Determines the program folder where the ACU software will be installed. You can change the default by entering a new folder name. Default: Cisco Systems Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 3-16 OL-1394-06 Chapter 3 Installing the Client Adapter Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software Table 3-2 Software Components and Their Parameters (continued) Component or Parameter Place Icon on Desktop Allow Non-Administrator Users to Save Settings to the Registry Aironet Client Monitor Installation Path Program Folder Auto Start Start After Install Description Causes the installation program to add an ACU icon to your computers desktop to provide quick access to the utility. Options: Yes or No Default: Yes Enables users without administrative rights to modify profiles in ACU and save them to the registry. Options: Yes or No Default: Yes Installs the ACM version included in the Install Wizard file. Default: Checked Determines the path where the ACM software will be installed. You can change the default by entering a new path. Default: C:\Program Files\Cisco Systems\Aironet Client Monitor Determines the program folder where the ACM software will be installed. You can change the default by entering a new folder name. Default: Cisco Systems Determines whether ACM starts automatically every time Windows boots. Options: Yes or No Default: Yes Determines whether ACM starts automatically after ACM is installed. Options: Yes or No Default: Yes OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 3-17 Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software Chapter 3 Installing the Client Adapter Table 3-2 Software Components and Their Parameters (continued) Component or Parameter Description Program Feature Overrides Determines which ACM components are enabled. If any components are not selected now and you later want to use them, you must run this installation program again and enable them. Components: See the table below Options per component: Enable or Disable Default per component: Enable Component About Box (Help) Exit Program Launch Aironet Client Utility Troubleshooting Preferences Turn Radio On/Off Reauthenticate Select Profile Auto Profile Selection Description Displays the ACM version number and enables you to access the online help. Closes ACM for all client adapters. Activates ACU, if it is installed. Activates the troubleshooting utility, which enables you to identify and resolve configuration and association problems with your client adapter. Enables you to determine when ACM runs and to select the options that appear on the ACM pop-up menu. Turns the client adapters radio on or off. Forces your client adapter to try to reauthenticate using the username and password of the current profile. Enables you to select the active profile for your client adapter. Causes the client adapters driver to automatically select a profile from the list of profiles that were set up in ACU to be included in auto profile selection. Enables an application other than ACU to configure the client adapter. Other Configuration Application Show Connection Status Provides information on the current status Menu Options (Defaults) Determines which options are displayed on the ACM pop-up menu. Menu options: About Box (Help), Exit Program, Launch Aironet of your client adapter. Client Utility, Troubleshooting, Turn Radio On/Off, Reauthenticate, Select Profile, Show Connection Status Options per menu option: Show or Hide Default per menu option: Show Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 3-18 OL-1394-06 Chapter 3 Installing the Client Adapter Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software Table 3-2 Software Components and Their Parameters (continued) Component or Parameter Security Modules LEAP Allow Saved LEAP User Name and Password EAP-SIM PEAP Description Installs the LEAP supplicant version included in the Install Wizard file. Installing the LEAP supplicant enables you to create a profile in ACU that uses LEAP authentication. If this option is not selected now and you later want to create a profile that uses LEAP, you must run this installation program again and select this option. Default: Checked Note Refer to Chapter 5 for information on enabling LEAP. Enables you to create a profile in ACU that uses a saved (rather than temporary) username and password for LEAP authentication. When such a profile is used, the saved username and password are used to start the LEAP authentication process, and you are not prompted to enter them. Options: Yes or No Default: Yes Installs the EAP-SIM supplicant version included in the Install Wizard file. Installing the EAP-SIM supplicant enables the client to support EAP-SIM authentication. If this option is not selected now and you later want to use EAP-SIM, you must run this installation program again and select this option. Default: Unchecked Note Note The Microsoft 802.1X supplicant does not support EAP-SIM authentication on Windows NT; therefore, EAP-SIM cannot be enabled for this operating system. If you installed the new EAP-SIM supplicant from the ftpeng FTP server, make sure the EAP-SIM option is not selected. Otherwise, the EAP-SIM supplicant included in the Install Wizard file overwrites the new supplicants settings. Installs the PEAP supplicant version included in the Install Wizard file. Installing the PEAP supplicant enables the client to support PEAP authentication. If this option is not selected now and you later want to use PEAP, you must run this installation program again and select this option. Default: Unchecked Note The Microsoft 802.1X supplicant does not support Cisco PEAP authentication on Windows NT; therefore, Cisco PEAP cannot be enabled for this operating system. e. When you are finished making selections, click Next. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 3-19 Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software Chapter 3 Installing the Client Adapter Step 20 The wizard starts to copy files, and the Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Adapter Setup screen appears (see Figure 3-6). Figure 3-6 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Adapter Setup Screen Step 21 If you are installing a PC or LM card, select Interrupt in the Property list and an unused interrupt (from Step 9) in the Value field and click OK. If you are installing a PCI or mini PCI card, click OK. Step 22 Messages appear as binding configurations are stored. Then the Microsoft TCP/IP Properties screen appears (see Figure 3-7). Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 3-20 OL-1394-06 Chapter 3 Installing the Client Adapter Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software Figure 3-7 Microsoft TCP/IP Properties Screen Step 23 On the IP Address tab, find and select the client adapter that you are installing under Adapter. Step 24 Perform one of the following:
If your computer is connected to a DHCP server, select Obtain an IP address from a DHCP server. When asked if you want to enable DHCP, click Yes and OK. If your computer is not connected to a DHCP server and you plan to use TCP/IP, select Specify an IP address and enter the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway address of your computer
(which can be obtained from your system administrator). Click OK. The installation process begins, and you are notified as each component is installed. Step 25 Windows NT must be rebooted in order for your changes to take effect. Click Yes when a message appears asking if you wish to reboot now. Caution To prevent unpredictable results, Cisco recommends that you click Yes to reboot your computer now. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 3-21 Verifying Installation Chapter 3 Installing the Client Adapter Step 26 If you want to install a second client adapter, allow your computer to completely reboot; then repeat the steps in this section for the second adapter. Note In Step 13, find the Install Wizard files using Windows Explorer. Then double-click the Setup.exe file. Step 27 Go to the Verifying Installation section below to determine if the installation was successful. After you verify installation, go to Chapter 4 if you want to create profiles for your client adapter. Verifying Installation To verify that you have properly installed the client adapter software, check the client adapters LEDs. If the installation was successful, the client adapters green LED blinks. Note If your installation was unsuccessful or you experienced problems during or after installation, refer to Chapter 10 for troubleshooting information. Now that your client adapter is properly installed, you are ready to go to Chapter 4 to create profiles for your client adapter, unless you are running Windows XP or have more than one client adapter installed.
If you are running Windows XP, go to the Deciding How to Configure Your Client Adapter
(Windows XP Only) section below. If you have more than one client adapter installed, go to the Selecting Among Several Installed Client Adapters section on page 3-24. Deciding How to Configure Your Client Adapter
(Windows XP Only) Windows XP is the only operating system that enables you to configure your client adapter without using ACU. Therefore, if your computer is running Windows XP, you must decide whether to configure your client adapter through Windows XP or ACU. To help you with your decision, Table 3-3 compares the Windows XP and ACU client adapter features. Table 3-3 Comparison of Windows XP and ACU Client Adapter Features Feature Configuration parameters Capabilities Create profiles Upgrade radio firmware Restart client adapter without rebooting or ejecting card Turn radio on or off Windows XP Limited ACU Extensive No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 3-22 OL-1394-06 Chapter 3 Installing the Client Adapter Deciding How to Configure Your Client Adapter (Windows XP Only) Table 3-3 Comparison of Windows XP and ACU Client Adapter Features (continued) Feature Security Static WEP LEAP authentication with dynamic WEP Host-based EAP authentication with static or dynamic WEP Diagnostics Status screen Statistics screen (transmit & receive) Site survey tool RF link test tool Link status meter (graphical display) Perform one of the following:
Windows XP Yes No Yes ACU Yes Yes Yes Limited Extensive No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
If you are planning to configure your client adapter through ACU instead of through Windows XP, follow the steps below:
a. Double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and Network Connections. b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and click Properties. c. Select the Wireless Networks tab and uncheck the Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings check box. d. Select the Authentication tab. Note In Service Pack 1 for Windows XP, the Authentication tab has moved from its previous location. To access it, click the Wireless Networks tab, select the network that you are configuring in the Preferred network list, and click Properties. e. Uncheck the Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1X check box. f. Follow the instructions in Chapter 4 and Chapter 5 to configure your client adapter through ACU. If you are planning to configure your client adapter through Windows XP instead of through ACU, go to Appendix E and follow the instructions there. If you are planning to configure your client adapter through Windows XP but you want to use ACUs diagnostic tools, go to Appendix E to configure the adapter through Windows XP; then follow the instructions in Chapter 7 to use ACUs diagnostic tools. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 3-23 Selecting Among Several Installed Client Adapters Chapter 3 Installing the Client Adapter Selecting Among Several Installed Client Adapters If more than one client adapter is installed in your computer, follow the instructions below to specify the one for which you want to set up profiles in ACU. Step 1 Double-click the Aironet Client Utility (ACU) icon on your desktop or double-click My Computer >
Control Panel > Aironet Client Utility to open ACU. The Select A Wireless LAN Adapter Card screen appears (see Figure 3-8). Note The Select A Wireless LAN Adapter Card screen appears when you start ACU if more than one card is inserted in your computer or no cards are inserted but more than one card is installed. Figure 3-8 Select A Wireless LAN Adapter Card Screen Step 2 Step 3 Select the card you wish to configure from the list of available cards and click OK. Go to Chapter 4 to create profiles for this card. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 3-24 OL-1394-06 C H A P T E R 4 Using the Profile Manager This chapter explains how to use ACUs profile manager feature to create and manage profiles for your client adapter. The following topics are covered in this chapter:
Overview of Profile Manager, page 4-2
Opening Profile Manager, page 4-2
Creating a New Profile, page 4-3
Including a Profile in Auto Profile Selection, page 4-4
Selecting the Active Profile, page 4-6
Modifying a Profile, page 4-7
Importing and Exporting Profiles, page 4-9
Granting or Denying Access to Non-Administrative Users, page 4-10 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 4-1 Overview of Profile Manager Chapter 4 Using the Profile Manager Overview of Profile Manager ACUs profile manager feature allows you to create and manage up to 16 profiles (or saved configurations) for your client adapter. These profiles enable you to use your client adapter in different locations, each of which requires different configuration settings. For example, you may want to set up profiles for using your client adapter at the office, at home, and in public areas such as airports. Once the profiles are created, you can easily switch between them without having to reconfigure your client adapter each time you enter a new location. Profiles are stored in the part of the registry reserved for the client adapter driver and, therefore, are tied to radio type. Consequently, if you set up profiles for a 340 series PC card and later upgrade to a 350 series PC card, all of the profiles will be lost. Similarly, all profiles are lost if you uninstall the client adapters software components. To prevent your profiles from becoming lost, Cisco recommends that you back up your profiles using the profile managers import/export feature. See the Importing and Exporting Profiles section on page 4-9 for details. Opening Profile Manager To open ACUs profile manager, double-click the Aironet Client Utility (ACU) icon on your desktop or double-click My Computer > Control Panel > Aironet Client Utility to open ACU. Then click the Profile Manager icon or select Profile Manager from the Commands drop-down menu. The Profile Manager screen appears (see Figure 4-1). Figure 4-1 Profile Manager Screen Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 4-2 OL-1394-06 Chapter 4 Using the Profile Manager Creating a New Profile Profile manager allows you to perform the following tasks related to the management of profiles:
Create a new profile, see below
Include a profile in auto profile selection, page 4-4
Select the active profile, page 4-6
Edit a profile, page 4-7
Set a profile to default values, page 4-8
Rename a profile, page 4-8
Delete a profile, page 4-8
Import a profile, page 4-9
Export a profile, page 4-9 Follow the instructions on the page indicated for the task you want to perform. Note If your system administrator used an administrative tool to deactivate certain parameters, these parameters are disabled on the Profile Manager screen and cannot be selected. Creating a New Profile Follow the steps below to create a new profile. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Click Add on the Profile Manager screen. A cursor appears in the Profile Management edit box. Enter the name for your new profile (for example, Office, Home, etc.). Press Enter. The Properties screens appear with the name of your new profile in parentheses. Perform one of the following:
If you want this profile to use the default values, click OK. The profile is added to the list of profiles on the Profile Manager screen. If you want to change any of the configuration parameter settings, follow the instructions in Chapter 5. The profile is added to the list of profiles on the Profile Manager screen. Step 5 Click OK or Apply to save your profile. Note The profiles for PC-Cardbus cards are tied to the slot in which the card is inserted. Therefore, you must always insert your PC-Cardbus card into the same slot, create profiles for both slots, or export the profiles from one slot and import them for the other slot. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 4-3 Including a Profile in Auto Profile Selection Chapter 4 Using the Profile Manager Including a Profile in Auto Profile Selection After you have created profiles for your client adapter, you can choose to include them in the profile managers auto profile selection feature. Then when auto profile selection is enabled, the client adapter automatically selects a profile from the list of profiles that were included in auto profile selection and uses it to establish a connection to the network. Follow the steps below to include any of your profiles in auto profile selection and to establish the order in which the profiles will be selected for use. Step 1 Open ACU; click the Select Profile icon or select Select Profile from the Commands drop-down menu. The Select Profile screen appears (see Figure 4-2). Figure 4-2 Select Profile Screen Step 2 Click the Manage button next to the Use Auto Profile Selection option. The Auto Profile Selection Management screen appears (see Figure 4-3). Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 4-4 OL-1394-06 Chapter 4 Using the Profile Manager Including a Profile in Auto Profile Selection Figure 4-3 Auto Profile Selection Management Screen Step 3 All the profiles that you created are listed in the Available Profiles box. Highlight each one that you want to include in auto profile selection and click the Add button. The profiles move to the Auto Selected Profiles box. The following rules apply to auto profile selection:
You must include at least two profiles in the Auto Selected Profiles Box.
The profiles must specify an SSID; otherwise, they cannot be selected in the Available Profiles box.
Profiles cannot specify multiple SSIDs; otherwise, they cannot be selected in the Available Profiles box.
Each profile that is included in auto profile selection must have a unique SSID. For example, if Profile A and Profile B both have ABCD as their SSID, only Profile A or Profile B can be included in auto profile selection. Note If you ever want to remove a profile from auto profile selection, highlight the profile in the Auto Selected Profiles box and click the Remove button. The profile moves to the Available Profiles box. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 4-5 Selecting the Active Profile Chapter 4 Using the Profile Manager Step 4 The first profile in the Auto Selected Profiles box has the highest priority while the last profile has the lowest priority. To change the order (and priority) of your auto-selectable profiles, highlight the profile that you want to move and click the High Priority or Low Priority arrow to move the profile up or down, respectively. When auto profile selection is enabled, the client adapter scans for an available network. The profile with the highest priority and the same SSID as one of the found networks is the one that is used to connect to the network. If the connection fails, the client adapter tries the next highest priority profile that matches the SSID and so on. Click OK to save your changes. Step 5 Selecting the Active Profile Follow the steps below to specify the profile that the client adapter is to use. Note Because EAP-TLS, PEAP, and EAP-SIM authentication are enabled in the operating system and not in ACU, you cannot switch between these authentication types simply by switching profiles in ACU. You can create a profile in ACU that uses host-based EAP, but you must enable the specific authentication type in Windows (provided Windows is using the Microsoft 802.1X supplicant). In addition, Windows can be set for only one authentication type at a time; therefore, if you have more than one profile in ACU that uses host-based EAP and you want to use another authentication type, you must change authentication types in Windows after switching profiles in ACU. Note You can use ACM instead of ACUs Profile Manager to select the active profile. Refer to Chapter 8 for instructions. Step 1 Step 2 Open ACU; click the Select Profile icon or select Select Profile from the Commands drop-down menu. The Select Profile screen appears (see Figure 4-2). Select one of the following options:
Use Selected ProfileThis option enables you to select one profile for the client adapter to use. If you choose this option, you also must select the desired profile from the drop-down box. If the client adapter cannot associate to an access point or loses association while using the selected profile, the adapter does not attempt to associate using another profile. To associate, you must select a different profile or select Use Auto Profile Selection. Note If no profiles have been set for your client adapter, the Use Selected Profile drop-down box is disabled but displays Driver Advanced Tab Settings. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 4-6 OL-1394-06 Chapter 4 Using the Profile Manager Modifying a Profile
Use Auto Profile SelectionThis option causes the client adapters driver to automatically select a profile from the list of profiles that were set up to be included in auto profile selection. If the client adapter loses association for more than 10 seconds (or for more than the time specified by the LEAP authentication timeout value on the LEAP Settings screen if LEAP is enabled), the driver switches automatically to another profile that is included in auto profile selection. The adapter will not switch profiles as long as it remains associated or reassociates within 10 seconds (or within the time specified by the LEAP authentication timeout value). To force the client adapter to associate to a different access point, you must select a new profile using the Use Selected Profile option. Note This option is available only if two or more profiles are included in auto profile selection. Note Login scripts are not reliable if you use auto profile selection with LEAP. If you LEAP authenticate and achieve full network connectivity before or at the same time as you log into the computer, the login scripts will run. However, if you LEAP authenticate and achieve full network connectivity after you log into the computer, the login scripts will not run.
Use Another Application to Configure My Wireless SettingsThis option enables an application other than ACU to configure the client adapter. Examples of such applications include Windows XP and Boingo. Note You must select this option if you are configuring your card through Windows XP but want to use ACUs diagnostic tools. Refer to Appendix E for information on configuring your client adapter through Windows XP. Step 3 Click OK or Apply to save your selection. The client adapter starts using a profile based on the option selected above. Modifying a Profile This section provides instructions for modifying an existing profile. Follow the steps in the corresponding section below to edit, set to default values, rename, or delete a profile. Editing a Profile Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Open ACU; click the Profile Manager icon or select Profile Manager from the Commands drop-down menu. The Profile Manager screen appears (see Figure 4-1). From the Profile Management drop-down box, select the profile that you want to edit. Click Edit. The Properties screens appear with the name of the profile in parentheses. Follow the instructions in Chapter 5 to change any of the configuration parameters for this profile. Click OK or Apply to save your configuration changes. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 4-7 Modifying a Profile Chapter 4 Using the Profile Manager Setting a Profile to Default Values Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Open ACU; click the Profile Manager icon or select Profile Manager from the Commands drop-down menu. The Profile Manager screen appears (see Figure 4-1). From the Profile Management drop-down box, select the profile that you want to set to default values. Click Use Defaults. Step 4 When prompted, click Yes to confirm your decision. Step 5 Click OK or Apply to save your change. The profile is saved with default values. Renaming a Profile Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Open ACU; click the Profile Manager icon or select Profile Manager from the Commands drop-down menu. The Profile Manager screen appears (see Figure 4-1). From the Profile Management drop-down box, select the profile that you want to rename. Click Rename. The Profile Management edit box becomes enabled. Enter a new name for the profile. Click OK or Apply to save your change. The profile is renamed and added to the list of profiles. Deleting a Profile Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Open ACU; click the Profile Manager icon or select Profile Manager from the Commands drop-down menu. The Profile Manager screen appears (see Figure 4-1). From the Profile Management drop-down box, select the profile that you want to delete. Click Delete. Step 4 When prompted, click Yes to confirm your decision. Step 5 Click OK or Apply to save your change. The profile is deleted. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 4-8 OL-1394-06 Chapter 4 Using the Profile Manager Importing and Exporting Profiles Importing and Exporting Profiles This section provides instructions for importing and exporting profiles. You may want to use the import/export feature for the following reasons:
To back up profiles before changing client adapter types or uninstalling client adapter software components
To export profiles for a PC-Cardbus card in one Cardbus slot and import them for use with a second Cardbus slot
To set up your computer with a profile from another computer
To export one of your profiles and use it to set up additional computers Follow the steps in the corresponding section below to import or export profiles. Importing a Profile Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 If the profile that you want to import is on a floppy disk, insert the disk into your computers floppy drive. Open ACU; click the Profile Manager icon or select Profile Manager from the Commands drop-down menu. The Profile Manager screen appears (see Figure 4-1). Click Import. The Import Profile screen appears. Find the directory where the profile is located. Click the profile so it appears in the File name box at the bottom of the Import Profile screen. Click Open. The imported profile appears in the list of profiles on the Profile Manager screen. Exporting a Profile Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Insert a blank floppy disk into your computers floppy drive, if you wish to export a profile to a floppy disk. Open ACU; click the Profile Manager icon or select Profile Manager from the Commands drop-down menu. The Profile Manager screen appears (see Figure 4-1). From the Profile Management drop-down box, select the profile that you want to export. Click Export. The Save Profile As screen appears. The default filename is ProfileName.pro, where ProfileName is the name of the selected profile, and the default directory is the directory in which ACU is installed. If you want to change the profile name, enter a new name in the File name edit box. Select a different directory (for example, your computers floppy disk drive or a location on the network) from the Save in drop-down box. Click Save. The profile is exported to the specified location. Follow the instructions in the Importing a Profile section to import the profile on another computer. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 4-9 Granting or Denying Access to Non-Administrative Users Chapter 4 Using the Profile Manager Granting or Denying Access to Non-Administrative Users If you used the Install Wizard to perform a custom installation, you were able to specify the value of the Allow Non-Administrator Users to Save Settings to the Registry parameter. When this parameter is set to Yes, it enables users without administrative rights to modify profiles in ACU and save them to the registry on computers running Windows NT, 2000, or XP. (This option is not available for Windows 98, 98 SE, and Me because these versions of Windows do not support different classes of users.) When this parameter is set to No, access to non-administrative users is denied. ACU has a similar parameter that you can use to change the selection you made during installation, provided you have administrative rights. Follow the steps below if you want to change the current setting of this parameter. Step 1 Step 2 Open ACU. Click the Preferences icon or select Preferences from the Options drop-down menu. The Aironet Client Utility Preferences screen appears (see Figure 4-4). Figure 4-4 Aironet Client Utility Preferences Screen Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 4-10 OL-1394-06 Chapter 4 Using the Profile Manager Granting or Denying Access to Non-Administrative Users Step 3 Perform one of the following:
Check the Allow Non-Administrator Users to Save Profiles to the Registry check box if you want to allow regular-class users to modify and save profiles.
Uncheck the Allow Non-Administrator Users to Save Profiles to the Registry check box if you want to prevent regular-class users from modifying and saving profiles. Step 4 Click OK to save your changes. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 4-11 Granting or Denying Access to Non-Administrative Users Chapter 4 Using the Profile Manager Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 4-12 OL-1394-06 C H A P T E R 5 Configuring the Client Adapter This chapter explains how to set the configuration parameters for a specific profile. The following topics are covered in this chapter:
Overview, page 5-2
Setting System Parameters, page 5-3
Setting RF Network Parameters, page 5-7
Setting Advanced Infrastructure Parameters, page 5-14
Setting Advanced Ad Hoc Parameters, page 5-17
Setting Network Security Parameters, page 5-20 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-1 Overview Overview Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter When you choose to create a new profile or edit an existing profile on the Profile Manager screen, the Properties screens appear with the name of your profile in parentheses. These screens enable you to set the configuration parameters for that profile. Note If you do not change any of the configuration parameters, the default values are used. Note If you are planning to set parameters on more than one of the Properties screens, wait until you are finished with all of the screens before clicking OK. When you click OK, you are returned to the Profile Manager screen. Each of the Properties screens (listed below) contains parameters that affect a specific aspect of the client adapter:
System ParametersPrepares the client adapter for use in a wireless network
RF NetworkControls how the client adapter transmits and receives data
Advanced (Infrastructure)Controls how the client adapter operates within an infrastructure network
Advanced (Ad Hoc)Controls how the client adapter operates within an ad hoc (peer-to-peer) network
Network SecurityControls how a client adapter associates to an access point, authenticates to the wireless network, and encrypts and decrypts data Table 5-1 enables you to quickly locate the instructions for setting each Properties screens parameters. Table 5-1 Locating Configuration Instructions Parameter Category System RF network Advanced infrastructure Advanced ad hoc Network security Page Number page 5-3 page 5-7 page 5-14 page 5-17 page 5-20 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-2 OL-1394-06 Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Setting System Parameters Setting System Parameters The System Parameters screen (see Figure 5-1) enables you to set parameters that prepare the client adapter for use in a wireless network. This screen appears after you create and save a new profile or click Edit on the Profile Manager screen. Figure 5-1 System Parameters Screen Table 5-2 lists and describes the client adapters system parameters. Follow the instructions in the table to change any parameters. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-3 Setting System Parameters Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Table 5-2 System Parameters Parameter Client Name SSID1 SSID2 SSID3 Description A logical name for your workstation. It allows an administrator to determine which devices are connected to the access point without having to memorize every MAC address. This name is included in the access points list of connected devices. Range: You can key in up to 16 ASCII characters Default: A blank field Note Each computer on the network should have a unique client name. The service set identifier (SSID) identifies the specific wireless network that you want to access. Range: You can key in up to 32 ASCII characters (case sensitive) Default: A blank field Note If you leave this parameter blank, your client adapter can associate to any access point on the network that is configured to allow broadcast SSIDs (see the AP Radio Hardware page in the access point management system). If the access point with which the client adapter is to communicate is not configured to allow broadcast SSIDs, the value of this parameter must match the SSID of the access point. Otherwise, the client adapter is unable to access the network. An optional SSID that identifies a second distinct network and enables you to roam to that network without having to reconfigure your client adapter. Range: You can key in up to 32 ASCII characters (case sensitive) Default: A blank field Note Note If a profile specifies more than one SSID, it cannot be included in auto profile selection. This field is unavailable for any profiles that are included in auto profile selection. An optional SSID that identifies a third distinct network and enables you to roam to that network without having to reconfigure your client adapter. Range: You can key in up to 32 ASCII characters (case sensitive) Default: A blank field Note Note If a profile specifies more than one SSID, it cannot be included in auto profile selection. This field is unavailable for any profiles that are included in auto profile selection. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-4 OL-1394-06 Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Setting System Parameters Table 5-2 System Parameters (continued) Parameter Power Save Mode Description Sets your client adapter to its optimum power consumption setting. Options: CAM, Max PSP, or Fast PSP Default: CAM (Constantly Awake Mode) Power Save Mode CAM (Constantly Awake Mode) Description Keeps the client adapter powered up continuously so there is little lag in message response time. Max PSP (Max Power Savings) Fast PSP (Power Save Mode) Consumes the most power but offers the highest throughput. Is recommended for desktop computers and devices that use AC power. Causes the access point to buffer incoming messages for the client adapter, which wakes up periodically and polls the access point to see if any buffered messages are waiting for it. The adapter can request each message and then go back to sleep. Conserves the most power but offers the lowest throughput. Is recommended for devices for which power consumption is the ultimate concern (such as small battery-powered devices). Note When you set Max PSP mode and close ACU, the following message appears the next time you open ACU: Maximum Power Save Mode will be temporarily disabled while you are running this application. While ACU is open, Fast PSP mode is active. When you close ACU, the card returns to Max PSP mode. Switches between PSP mode and CAM mode, depending on network traffic. This mode switches to CAM when retrieving a large number of packets and switches back to PSP after the packets have been retrieved. Is recommended when power consumption is a concern but you need greater throughput than that allowed by Max PSP. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-5 Setting System Parameters Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Table 5-2 System Parameters (continued) Parameter Network Type Description Specifies the type of network in which your client adapter is installed. Options: Ad Hoc or Infrastructure Default: Infrastructure Network Type Ad Hoc Infrastructure Description Often referred to as peer to peer. Indicates that your wireless network consists of a few wireless devices that are not connected to a wired Ethernet network through an access point. For example, an ad hoc network can be set up between computers in a conference room so users can share information in a meeting. Indicates that your wireless network is connected to a wired Ethernet network through an access point. Go to the next section to set additional parameters or click OK to return to the Profile Manager screen. On the Profile Manager screen, click OK or Apply to save your changes. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-6 OL-1394-06 Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Setting RF Network Parameters Setting RF Network Parameters The RF Network screen (see Figure 5-2) enables you to set parameters that control how and when the client adapter transmits and receives data. To access this screen, select the RF Network tab from the Properties screens. Figure 5-2 RF Network Screen OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-7 Setting RF Network Parameters Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Table 5-3 lists and describes the client adapters RF network parameters. Follow the instructions in the table to change any parameters. Table 5-3 RF Network Parameters Parameter Data Rate Description Specifies the rate at which your client adapter should transmit or receive packets to or from access points (in infrastructure mode) or other clients (in ad hoc mode). Auto Rate Selection is recommended for infrastructure mode; setting a specific data rate is recommended for ad hoc mode. Options: Auto Rate Selection, 1 Mbps Only, 2 Mbps Only, 5.5 Mbps Only, or 11 Mbps Only (2.4-GHz client adapters);
Auto Rate Selection, 6 Mbps Only, 9 Mbps Only, 12 Mbps Only, 18 Mbps Only, 24 Mbps Only, 36 Mbps Only, 48 Mbps Only, or 54 Mbps Only (5-GHz client adapters) Default: Auto Rate Selection Data Rate 2.4-GHz Client Adapters Auto Rate Selection 5-GHz Client Adapters Auto Rate Selection 1 Mbps Only 2 Mbps Only and 5.5 Mbps Only 11 Mbps Only Note 6 Mbps Only 9 Mbps Only to 48 Mbps Only 54 Mbps Only Description Uses the 11-Mbps (for 2.4-GHz client adapters) or 54-Mbps (for 5-GHz client adapters) data rate when possible but drops to lower rates when necessary. Offers the greatest range but the lowest throughput. Progressively offers less range but greater throughput than the 1 Mbps Only (for 2.4-GHz client adapters) or 6 Mbps Only
(for 5-GHz client adapters) option. Offers the greatest throughput but the lowest range. Your client adapters data rate must be set to Auto Rate Selection or must match the data rate of the access point (in infrastructure mode) or the other clients (in ad hoc mode) with which it is to communicate. Otherwise, your client adapter may not be able to associate to them. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-8 OL-1394-06 Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Setting RF Network Parameters Table 5-3 RF Network Parameters (continued) Parameter Use Short Radio Headers World Mode Scan For A Better Access Point Description Checking this check box sets your client adapter to use short radio headers. However, the adapter can use short radio headers only if the access point is also configured to support them and is using them. If any clients associated to an access point are using long headers, then all clients in that cell must also use long headers, even if both this client and the access point have short radio headers enabled. Short radio headers improve throughput performance; long radio headers ensure compatibility with clients and access points that do not support short radio headers. Default: Checked Note This parameter is available only for 2.4-GHz client adapters. Note This parameter is referred to as Preambles on the access point screens. Checking this check box enables the client adapter to adopt the maximum transmit power level and the frequency range of the access point to which it is associated, provided the access point is also configured for world mode. This parameter is available only in infrastructure mode and is designed for users who travel between countries and want their client adapters to associate to access points in different regulatory domains. Default: Unchecked Note This parameter is available only for 2.4-GHz client adapters. Note When World Mode is enabled, the client adapter is limited to the maximum transmit power level allowed by the country of operations regulatory agency. Checking this check box causes the client to look for a better access point if the signal strength of its associated access point is less than the specified value after the specified time and to switch associations if it finds one. Example: If the default values of 20 seconds and 50% are used, the client begins monitoring the strength of the signal received from its associated access point 20 seconds after becoming associated. The monitoring continues once per second. If the client detects a signal strength reading below 50%, it scans for a better access point. Range:
5 to 255 seconds; 0 to 75% signal strength Defaults: Checked, 20 seconds, 50% signal strength Note The ability to specify the time and signal strength is available in ACU version 6.1 or greater, which is included in Install Wizard version 1.1 or greater. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-9 Setting RF Network Parameters Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Table 5-3 RF Network Parameters (continued) Parameter Channel Description Specifies the frequency that your client adapter will use as the channel for communications. These channels conform to the IEEE 802.11 Standard for your regulatory domain.
In infrastructure mode, this parameter is set automatically and cannot be changed. The client adapter listens to the entire spectrum, selects the best access point to associate to, and uses the same frequency as that access point. In ad hoc mode, the channel of the client adapter must be set to match the channel used by the other clients in the wireless network. If the client adapter does not find any other ad hoc adapters, this parameter specifies the channel with which the adapter will start its cell. Range: Dependent on client adapter radio and regulatory domain Example for 2.4-GHz client adapters:
1 to 11 (2412 to 2462 MHz) in North America Example for 5-GHz client adapters:
36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, and 64 (5180, 5200, 5220, 5240, 5260, 5280, 5300, and 5320 MHz) in North America Default: Dependent on client adapter radio and regulatory domain Example for 2.4-GHz client adapters:
6 (2437 MHz) in North America Example for 5-GHz client adapters:
36 (5180 MHz) in North America Note Refer to Appendix D for a list of channel identifiers, channel center frequencies, and regulatory domains for each channel. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-10 OL-1394-06 Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Setting RF Network Parameters Table 5-3 RF Network Parameters (continued) Parameter Transmit Power Description Defines the power level at which your client adapter transmits. This value must not be higher than that allowed by your countrys regulatory agency (FCC in the U.S., DOC in Canada, ETSI in Europe, MKK in Japan, etc.). Options: Dependent on the power table programmed into the client adapter; see the table below Default: The maximum power level programmed into the client adapter and allowed by your countrys regulatory agency Client Adapter Type 340 series PC cards 340 series LM cards and PCI cards Possible Power Levels 30 mW or 1 mW 30 mW, 15 mW, 5 mW, or 1 mW 100 mW, 50 mW, 30 mW, 20 mW, 5 mW, or 1 mW 20 mW, 10 mW, or 5 mW PC-Cardbus card Note 350 series client adapters Reducing the transmit power level conserves battery power but decreases radio range. Note When World Mode is enabled, the client adapter is limited to the maximum transmit power level allowed by the country of operations regulatory agency. Note If you are using an older version of a 340 or 350 series client adapter, your power level options may be different than those listed here. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-11 Setting RF Network Parameters Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Table 5-3 RF Network Parameters (continued) Parameter Clear Channel Assessment Description Specifies the method that determines whether the channel on which your client adapter will operate is clear prior to the transmission of data. Options: Firmware Default (XXX), Carrier/Correlation (Car/Cor), Energy Detect (ED), or ED or Car/Cor Default: Firmware Default (XXX) Method Firmware Default (XXX) Carrier/Correlation
(Car/Cor) Energy Detect (ED) ED or Car/Cor Description The Clear Channel Assessment (CCA) mechanism will report that the channel is busy based on the default value of the client adapters firmware. The firmwares CCA default value is shown in parentheses. Note The CCA default value for PCM, LMC, and PCI card firmware is Car/Cor; the default value for mini PCI card firmware is ED. The CCA mechanism will report that the channel is busy upon detection of a direct-sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) signal. This signal may be above or below the ED threshold. The CCA mechanism will report that the channel is busy upon detection of any energy above the ED threshold. The CCA mechanism will report that the channel is busy upon detection of a DSSS signal or any energy above the ED threshold. Note This parameter is available only for 2.4-GHz client adapters. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-12 OL-1394-06 Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Setting RF Network Parameters Table 5-3 RF Network Parameters (continued) Parameter Data Retries Fragment Threshold Description Defines the number of times a packet is resent if the initial transmission is unsuccessful. Range:
Default: 16 (2.4-GHz client adapters) or 32 (5-GHz client adapters) 1 to 128 Note If your network protocol performs its own retries, set this to a smaller value than the default. This way notification of a bad packet is sent up the protocol stack quickly so the application can retransmit the packet if necessary. Defines the threshold above which an RF data packet is split up or fragmented. If one of those fragmented packets experiences interference during transmission, only that specific packet would need to be resent. Throughput is generally lower for fragmented packets because the fixed packet overhead consumes a higher portion of the RF bandwidth. Range:
Default: 2312 256 to 2312 Go to the next section to set additional parameters or click OK to return to the Profile Manager screen. On the Profile Manager screen, click OK or Apply to save your changes. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-13 Setting Advanced Infrastructure Parameters Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Setting Advanced Infrastructure Parameters Note You can set advanced infrastructure parameters only if your client adapter has been set to operate in an infrastructure network. See the Network Type parameter in Table 5-2. The Advanced (Infrastructure) screen (see Figure 5-3) enables you to set parameters that control how the client adapter operates within an infrastructure network. To access this screen, select the Advanced
(Infrastructure) tab from the Properties screens. Figure 5-3 Advanced (Infrastructure) Screen Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-14 OL-1394-06 Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Setting Advanced Infrastructure Parameters Table 5-4 lists and describes the client adapters advanced infrastructure parameters. Follow the instructions in the table to change any parameters. Table 5-4 Advanced (Infrastructure) Parameters Parameter Antenna Mode (Receive) Description Specifies the antenna that your client adapter uses to receive data.
PC cardThe PC cards integrated, permanently attached antenna operates best when used in diversity mode. Diversity mode allows the card to use the better signal from its two antenna ports. Options: Diversity (Both), Primary Antenna Only, Secondary Antenna Only Default: Diversity (Both)
LM cardThe LM card is shipped without an antenna; however, an antenna can be connected through the cards external connector. If a snap-on antenna is used, diversity mode is recommended. Otherwise, select the mode that corresponds to the antenna port to which the antenna is connected. Options: Diversity (Both), Primary Antenna Only, Secondary Antenna Only Default: Diversity (Both)
PCI cardThe PCI card must use the Primary Antenna Only option. Default: Primary Antenna Only
Mini PCI cardThe mini PCI card, which can be used with one or two antennas, operates best in diversity mode. Diversity mode allows the card to use the better signal from its two antenna connectors. Options: Diversity (Both), Primary Antenna Only, Secondary Antenna Only Default: Diversity (Both) Note This parameter is available only for 2.4-GHz client adapters. Note The Primary Antenna Only and Secondary Antenna Only options were formerly named Right Antenna Only and Left Antenna Only, respectively. Specifies the antenna that your client adapter uses to transmit data. See the Antenna Mode (Receive) parameter above for information on the options available for your client adapter. Note This parameter is available only for 2.4-GHz client adapters. Antenna Mode (Transmit) OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-15 Setting Advanced Infrastructure Parameters Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Table 5-4 Advanced (Infrastructure) Parameters (continued) Parameter Specified Access Point 1- 4 RTS Threshold RTS Retry Limit Description Specifies the MAC addresses of up to four preferred access points with which the client adapter can associate. If the specified access points are not found or the client adapter roams out of range, the adapter may associate to another access point. You can enter the MAC addresses of the access points in the edit boxes or choose not to specify access points by leaving the boxes blank. Default: Blank fields Note This parameter should be used only for access points that are in repeater mode. For normal operation, leave these fields blank because specifying an access point slows down the roaming process. Specifies the size of the data packet that the low-level RF protocol issues to a request-to-send (RTS) packet. Setting this parameter to a small value causes RTS packets to be sent more often. When this occurs, more of the available bandwidth is consumed and the throughput of other network packets is reduced, but the system is able to recover faster from interference or collisions, which may be caused from a high multipath environment characterized by obstructions or metallic surfaces. Range:
Default: 2312 0 to 2312 Note Refer to the IEEE 802.11 Standard for more information on the RTS/CTS mechanism. Specifies the number of times the client adapter resends a request-to-send (RTS) packet if it does not receive a clear-to-send
(CTS) packet from the previously sent RTS packet. Setting this parameter to a large value decreases the available bandwidth whenever interference is encountered but makes the system more immune to interference and collisions, which may be caused from a high multipath environment characterized by obstructions or metallic surfaces. Range:
Default: 16 (2.4-GHz client adapters) or 32 (5-GHz client adapters) 1 to 128 Note Refer to the IEEE 802.11 Standard for more information on the RTS/CTS mechanism. Go to the next section to set additional parameters or click OK to return to the Profile Manager screen. On the Profile Manager screen, click OK or Apply to save your changes. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-16 OL-1394-06 Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Setting Advanced Ad Hoc Parameters Setting Advanced Ad Hoc Parameters Note You can set advanced ad hoc parameters only if your client adapter has been set to operate in an ad hoc network. See the Network Type parameter in Table 5-2. The Advanced (Ad Hoc) screen (see Figure 5-4) enables you to set parameters that control how the client adapter operates within an ad hoc network. To access this screen, select the Advanced (Ad Hoc) tab from the Properties screens. Figure 5-4 Advanced (Ad Hoc) Screen OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-17 Setting Advanced Ad Hoc Parameters Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Table 5-5 lists and describes the client adapters advanced ad hoc parameters. Follow the instructions in the table to change any parameters. Table 5-5 Advanced (Ad Hoc) Parameters Parameter Antenna Mode (Receive) Description Specifies the antenna that your client adapter uses to receive data.
PC cardThe PC cards integrated, permanently attached antenna operates best when used in diversity mode. Diversity mode allows the card to use the better signal from its two antenna ports. Options: Diversity (Both), Primary Antenna Only, Secondary Antenna Only Default: Diversity (Both)
LM cardThe LM card is shipped without an antenna; however, an antenna can be connected through the cards external connector. If a snap-on antenna is used, diversity mode is recommended. Otherwise, select the mode that corresponds to the antenna port to which the antenna is connected. Options: Diversity (Both), Primary Antenna Only, Secondary Antenna Only Default: Diversity (Both)
PCI cardThe PCI card must use the Primary Antenna Only option. Default: Primary Antenna Only
Mini PCI cardThe mini PCI card, which can be used with one or two antennas, operates best in diversity mode. Diversity mode allows the card to use the better signal from its two antenna connectors. Options: Diversity (Both), Primary Antenna Only, Secondary Antenna Only Default: Diversity (Both) Note This parameter is available only for 2.4-GHz client adapters. Note The Primary Antenna Only and Secondary Antenna Only options were formerly named Right Antenna Only and Left Antenna Only, respectively. Specifies the antenna that your client adapter uses to transmit data. See the Antenna Mode (Receive) parameter above for information on the options available for your client adapter. Note This parameter is available only for 2.4-GHz client adapters. Antenna Mode (Transmit) Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-18 OL-1394-06 Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Setting Advanced Ad Hoc Parameters Table 5-5 Advanced (Ad Hoc) Parameters (continued) Parameter RTS Threshold RTS Retry Limit Wake Duration (Ks) Description Specifies the size of the data packet that the low-level RF protocol issues to a request-to-send (RTS) packet. Setting this parameter to a small value causes RTS packets to be sent more often. When this occurs, more of the available bandwidth is consumed and the throughput of other network packets is reduced, but the system is able to recover faster from interference or collisions, which may be caused from a high multipath environment characterized by obstructions or metallic surfaces. Range:
Default: 2312 0 to 2312 Note Refer to the IEEE 802.11 Standard for more information on the RTS/CTS mechanism. Specifies the number of times the client adapter resends a request-to-send (RTS) packet if it does not receive a clear-to-send
(CTS) packet from the previously sent RTS packet. Setting this parameter to a large value decreases the available bandwidth whenever interference is encountered but makes the system more immune to interference and collisions, which may be caused from a high multipath environment characterized by obstructions or metallic surfaces. Range:
Default: 16 (2.4-GHz client adapters) or 32 (5-GHz client adapters) 1 to 128 Note Refer to the IEEE 802.11 Standard for more information on the RTS/CTS mechanism. Specifies the amount of time following a beacon that the client adapter stays awake to receive announcement traffic indication message
(ATIM) packets, which are sent to the adapter to keep it awake until the next beacon. Refer to the Power Save Mode parameter in Table 5-2. Range:
0 Ks (in CAM mode); 5 to 60 Ks (in Max PSP or Fast PSP mode) Default: 5 Ks Note If your client adapter is set to CAM mode, you must set the wake duration to 0 Ks. If your client adapter is set to Max PSP or Fast PSP mode, you must set the wake duration to a minimum of 5 Ks. Ks is a unit of measurement in software terms. K = 1024,
= 10-6, and s = seconds, so Ks = .001024 seconds, 1.024 milliseconds, or 1024 microseconds. Note OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-19 Setting Network Security Parameters Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Table 5-5 Advanced (Ad Hoc) Parameters (continued) Parameter Beacon Period (Ks) Description Specifies the duration between beacon packets, which are used to help clients find each other in ad hoc mode. Range:
Default: 100 Ks 20 to 976 Ks Go to the next section to set additional parameters or click OK to return to the Profile Manager screen. On the Profile Manager screen, click OK or Apply to save your changes. Setting Network Security Parameters The Network Security screen (see Figure 5-5) enables you to set parameters that control how the client adapter associates to an access point, authenticates to the wireless network, and encrypts and decrypts data. To access this screen, select the Network Security tab from the Properties screens. Figure 5-5 Network Security Screen Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-20 OL-1394-06 Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Setting Network Security Parameters This screen is different from the other Properties screens in that it presents several security features, each of which involves a number of steps. In addition, the security features themselves are complex and need to be understood before they are implemented. Therefore, this section provides an overview of the security features as well as procedures for using them. However, before you determine the appropriate security settings for your client adapter, you must decide how to set the Allow Association to Mixed Cells parameter, which appears at the bottom of the Network Security screen and is not associated to any of the security features. See the Setting the Allow Association to Mixed Cells Parameter section below. Setting the Allow Association to Mixed Cells Parameter The Allow Association to Mixed Cells parameter indicates whether the client adapter can associate to an access point that allows both WEP and non-WEP associations. Follow the steps below to set this parameter. Step 1 Perform one of the following:
Check the Allow Association to Mixed Cells check box if the access point with which the client adapter is to associate has WEP set to Optional and WEP is enabled on the client adapter. Otherwise, the client is unable to establish a connection with the access point.
Uncheck the Allow Association to Mixed Cells check box if the access point with which the client adapter is to associate does not have WEP set to Optional. This is the default setting. Note For security reasons, Cisco recommends that WEP-enabled and WEP-disabled clients not be allowed in the same cell because broadcast packets are sent unencrypted, even to clients running WEP. Step 2 Perform one of the following:
If you do not want to change any other parameters on the Network Security screen, click OK to return to the Profile Manager screen; then click OK or Apply to save your changes If you want to change some of the other parameters on the Network Security screen, go to the next section. Overview of Security Features You can protect your data as it is transmitted through your wireless network by encrypting it through the use of wired equivalent privacy (WEP) encryption keys. With WEP encryption, the transmitting device encrypts each packet with a WEP key, and the receiving device uses that same key to decrypt each packet. The WEP keys used to encrypt and decrypt transmitted data can be statically associated with your adapter or dynamically created as part of the EAP authentication process. The information in the Static WEP Keys and EAP (with Dynamic WEP Keys) sections below can help you to decide which type of WEP keys you want to use. Dynamic WEP keys with EAP offer a higher degree of security than static WEP keys. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-21 Setting Network Security Parameters Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter WEP keys, whether static or dynamic, are either 40 or 128 bits in length. 128-bit WEP keys offer a greater level of security than 40-bit WEP keys. Note Refer to the Additional WEP Key Security Features section on page 5-25 for information on three security features that can make your WEP keys even more secure. Static WEP Keys Each device (or profile) within your wireless network can be assigned up to four static WEP keys. If a device receives a packet that is not encrypted with the appropriate key (as the WEP keys of all devices that are to communicate with each other must match), the device discards the packet and never delivers it to the intended receiver. Static WEP keys are write-only and temporary; therefore, they cannot be read back from the client adapter, and they are lost when power to the adapter is removed or the Windows device is rebooted. Although the keys are temporary, you do not need to re-enter them each time the client adapter is inserted or the Windows device is rebooted. This is because the keys are stored (in an encrypted format for security reasons) in the registry of the Windows device. When the driver loads and reads the client adapters registry parameters, it also finds the static WEP keys, unencrypts them, and stores them in volatile memory on the adapter. The Network Security screen enables you to view the current WEP key settings for the client adapter and then to assign new WEP keys or overwrite existing WEP keys as well as to enable or disable static WEP. Refer to the Using Static WEP section on page 5-29 for instructions. EAP (with Dynamic WEP Keys) The new standard for wireless LAN security, as defined by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), is called 802.1X for 802.11, or simply 802.1X. An access point that supports 802.1X and its protocol, Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP), acts as the interface between a wireless client and an authentication server, such as a Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) server, to which the access point communicates over the wired network. Two 802.1X authentication types can be selected in ACU for use with Windows operating systems:
EAP-Cisco Wireless (or LEAP)This authentication type is available for Windows 98, 98 SE, NT, 2000, Me, and XP, as well as non-Windows systems. Support for LEAP is provided not in the Windows operating system but in your client adapters firmware and the Cisco software that supports it. RADIUS servers that support LEAP include Cisco Secure ACS version 2.6 and greater, Cisco Access Registrar version 1.7 and greater, and Funk Softwares Steel-Belted RADIUS version 3.0 and greater. LEAP is enabled or disabled for a specific profile through ACU, provided the LEAP security module was selected during installation. After LEAP is enabled, a variety of configuration options are available, including how and when a username and password are entered to begin the authentication process. The username and password are used by the client adapter to perform mutual authentication with the RADIUS server through the access point. The username and password are stored in the client adapters volatile memory; therefore, they are temporary and need to be re-entered whenever power is removed from the adapter, typically due to the client adapter being ejected or the system powering down. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-22 OL-1394-06 Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Setting Network Security Parameters Note If the LEAP security module was not selected during installation, the LEAP option is unavailable in ACU. If you want to be able to enable and disable LEAP, you must run the installation program again and select LEAP.
Host Based EAPSelecting this option enables you to use any 802.1X authentication type for which your operating system has support. For example, if your operating system uses the Microsoft 802.1X supplicant, it provides native support for EAP-TLS authentication and general support for PEAP and EAP-SIM authentication. Note To use EAP-TLS, PEAP, or EAP-SIM authentication, you must install the Microsoft 802.1X supplicant, ACU, and the PEAP or EAP-SIM security module; configure your client adapter using ACU; enable the authentication type in Windows; and enable Network-EAP on the access point. EAP-TLSEAP-TLS is enabled or disabled through the operating system and uses a dynamic session-based WEP key, which is derived from the client adapter and RADIUS server, to encrypt data. Once enabled, a few configuration parameters must be set within the operating system. RADIUS servers that support EAP-TLS include Cisco Secure ACS version 3.0 or greater and Cisco Access Registrar version 1.8 or greater. Note EAP-TLS requires the use of a certificate. Refer to Microsofts documentation for information on downloading and installing the certificate. Protected EAP (or PEAP)PEAP authentication is designed to support One-Time Password
(OTP), Windows NT or 2000 domain, and LDAP user databases over a wireless LAN. It is based on EAP-TLS authentication but uses a password or PIN instead of a client certificate for authentication. PEAP is enabled or disabled through the operating system and uses a dynamic session-based WEP key, which is derived from the client adapter and RADIUS server, to encrypt data. If your network uses an OTP user database, PEAP requires you to enter either a hardware token password or a software token PIN to start the EAP authentication process and gain access to the network. If your network uses a Windows NT or 2000 domain user database or an LDAP user database (such as NDS), PEAP requires you to enter your username, password, and domain name in order to start the authentication process. RADIUS servers that support PEAP authentication include Cisco Secure ACS version 3.1 or greater. Note Service Pack 1 for Windows XP and the Microsoft 802.1X supplicant for Windows 2000 include Microsofts PEAP supplicant, which supports a Windows username and password only and does not interoperate with Ciscos PEAP supplicant. To use Ciscos PEAP supplicant, install the Install Wizard file after Service Pack 1 for Windows XP or the Microsoft 802.1X supplicant for Windows 2000. Otherwise, Ciscos PEAP supplicant is overwritten by Microsofts PEAP supplicant. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-23 Setting Network Security Parameters Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter EAP-SIMEAP-SIM authentication is designed for use in public wireless LANs and requires clients equipped with PCSC-compliant smartcard readers. The EAP-SIM supplicant included in the Install Wizard file supports only Gemplus SIM+ cards; however, an updated supplicant is available that supports standard GSM-SIM cards as well as more recent versions of the EAP-SIM protocol. The new supplicant is available for download from the ftpeng FTP server at the following URL:
ftp://ftpeng.cisco.com/ftp/pwlan/eapsim/CiscoEapSim.dll Please note that the above requirements are necessary but not sufficient to successfully perform EAP-SIM authentication. Typically, you are also required to enter into a service contract with a WLAN service provider, who must support EAP-SIM authentication in its network. Also, while your PCSC smartcard reader may be able to read standard GSM-SIM cards or chips, EAP-SIM authentication usually requires your GSM cell phone account to be provisioned for WLAN service by your service provider. EAP-SIM is enabled or disabled through the operating system and uses a dynamic session-based WEP key, which is derived from the client adapter and RADIUS server, to encrypt data. EAP-SIM requires you to enter a user verification code, or PIN, for communication with the SIM card. You can choose to have the PIN stored in your computer or to be prompted to enter it after a reboot or prior to every authentication attempt. RADIUS servers that support EAP-SIM include Cisco Access Registrar version 3.0 or greater. Note Because EAP-TLS, PEAP, and EAP-SIM authentication are enabled in the operating system and not in ACU, you cannot switch between these authentication types simply by switching profiles in ACU. You can create a profile in ACU that uses host-based EAP, but you must enable the specific authentication type in Windows (provided Windows uses the Microsoft 802.1X supplicant). In addition, Windows can be set for only one authentication type at a time; therefore, if you have more than one profile in ACU that uses host-based EAP and you want to use another authentication type, you must change authentication types in Windows after switching profiles in ACU. When you enable Network-EAP or Require EAP on your access point and configure your client adapter for LEAP, EAP-TLS, PEAP, or EAP-SIM, authentication to the network occurs in the following sequence:
1. The client associates to an access point and begins the authentication process. Note The client does not gain full access to the network until authentication between the client and the RADIUS server is successful. 2. Communicating through the access point, the client and RADIUS server complete the authentication process, with the password (LEAP and PEAP), certificate (EAP-TLS), or internal key stored on the SIM card and in the service providers Authentication Center (EAP-SIM) being the shared secret for authentication. The password or internal key is never transmitted during the process. 3. If authentication is successful, the client and RADIUS server derive a dynamic, session-based WEP key that is unique to the client. 4. The RADIUS server transmits the key to the access point using a secure channel on the wired LAN. 5. For the length of a session, or time period, the access point and the client use this key to encrypt or decrypt all unicast packets (and broadcast packets if the access point is set up to do so) that travel between them. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-24 OL-1394-06 Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Setting Network Security Parameters Refer to the Enabling LEAP section on page 5-31 for instructions on enabling LEAP or to the Enabling Host-Based EAP section on page 5-34 for instructions on enabling EAP-TLS, PEAP, or EAP-SIM. Note Refer to the IEEE 802.11 Standard for more information on 802.1X authentication and to the following URL for additional information on RADIUS servers:
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/software/ios120/12cgcr/secur_c/scprt2/scrad.htm Additional WEP Key Security Features The three security features discussed in this section (MIC, TKIP, and broadcast key rotation) are designed to prevent sophisticated attacks on your wireless networks WEP keys. These features do not need to be enabled on the client adapter; they are supported automatically in the firmware and driver versions included in the Install Wizard file. However, they must be enabled on the access point. Note Access point firmware version 11.10T or greater is required to enable these security features. Refer to the documentation for your access point for instructions on enabling these security features. Message Integrity Check (MIC) MIC prevents bit-flip attacks on encrypted packets. During a bit-flip attack, an intruder intercepts an encrypted message, alters it slightly, and retransmits it, and the receiver accepts the retransmitted message as legitimate. The MIC adds a few bytes to each packet to make the packets tamper-proof. The Status screen indicates if MIC is being used, and the Statistics screen provides MIC statistics. Note If you enable MIC on the access point, your client adapters driver must support these features;
otherwise, the client cannot associate. Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) This feature, also referred to as WEP key hashing, defends against an attack on WEP in which the intruder uses the initialization vector (IV) in encrypted packets to calculate the WEP key. TKIP removes the predictability that an intruder relies on to determine the WEP key by exploiting IVs. It protects both unicast and broadcast WEP keys. Note If you enable TKIP on the access point, your client adapters firmware must support these features;
otherwise, the client cannot associate. Broadcast Key Rotation EAP authentication provides dynamic unicast WEP keys for client devices but uses static broadcast, or multicast, keys. When you enable broadcast WEP key rotation, the access point provides a dynamic broadcast WEP key and changes it at the interval you select. When you enable this feature, only wireless client devices using LEAP, EAP-TLS, PEAP, or EAP-SIM authentication can associate to the access point. Client devices using static WEP (with open or shared key authentication) cannot associate. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-25 Setting Network Security Parameters Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Reporting Access Points that Fail LEAP Authentication Client adapter firmware version 5.02.20 or greater and the following access point firmware versions support a new feature that is designed to detect access points that fail LEAP authentication:
12.00T or greater (340, 350, and 1200 series access points)
12.2(4)JA or greater (1100 series access points) An access point running one of these firmware versions records a message in the system log when a client running firmware version 5.02.20 or greater discovers and reports another access point in the wireless network that has failed LEAP authentication. The process takes place as follows:
1. A client with a LEAP profile attempts to associate to access point A. 2. Access point A does not handle LEAP authentication successfully, perhaps because the access point does not understand LEAP or cannot communicate to a trusted LEAP authentication server. 3. The client records the MAC address for access point A and the reason why the association failed. 4. The client associates successfully to access point B. 5. The client sends the MAC address of access point A and the reason code for the failure to access point B. 6. Access point B logs the failure in the system log. Note This feature does not need to be enabled on the client adapter or access point; it is supported automatically in the firmware of both devices. However, both the client and access point must use these firmware versions or greater. Fast Secure Roaming Some applications that run on a client device may require fast roaming between access points. Voice applications, for example, require seamless roaming to prevent delays and gaps in conversation. Support for fast secure roaming is now available for LEAP-enabled clients in client adapter firmware version 5.20.17. During normal operation, LEAP-enabled clients mutually authenticate with a new access point by performing a complete LEAP authentication, including communication with the main RADIUS server. However, when you configure your wireless LAN for fast secure roaming, LEAP-enabled clients securely roam from one access point to another without the need to reauthenticate with the RADIUS server. Using Cisco Centralized Key Management (CCKM), an access point that is configured for wireless domain services (WDS) uses a fast rekeying technique that enables client devices to roam from one access point to another in under 150 milliseconds (ms). Fast secure roaming ensures that there is no perceptible delay in time-sensitive applications such as wireless Voice over IP (VoIP), enterprise resource planning (ERP), or Citrix-based solutions. This feature does not need to be enabled on the client adapter; it is supported automatically in client adapter firmware version 5.20.17 or greater (which is included in Install Wizard version 1.1 or greater). However, it must be enabled on the access point. Note Access point firmware version 12.2(11)JA or greater is required to enable fast roaming. Refer to the documentation for your access point for instructions on enabling this feature. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-26 OL-1394-06 Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Setting Network Security Parameters Note If the Microsoft 802.1X supplicant is installed on your computer, you must disable one or two Windows parameters in order for this feature to operate correctly. Refer to Step 10 in the Enabling LEAP section for details. Synchronizing Security Features In order to use any of the security features discussed in this section, both your client adapter and the access point to which it will associate must be set appropriately. Table 5-6 indicates the client and access point settings required for each security feature. This chapter provides specific instructions for enabling the security features on your client adapter. Refer to the documentation for your access point for instructions on enabling any of these features on the access point. Table 5-6 Client and Access Point Security Settings Security Feature Static WEP with open authentication Static WEP with shared key authentication LEAP authentication EAP-TLS authentication If using ACU to configure card If using Windows XP to configure card PEAP authentication If using ACU to configure card If using Windows XP to configure card Client Setting Create a WEP key and enable Use Static WEP Keys and Open Authentication Create a WEP key and enable Use Static WEP Keys and Shared Key Authentication Enable LEAP Access Point Setting Set up and enable WEP and enable Open Authentication Set up and enable WEP and enable Shared Key Authentication Set up and enable WEP and enable Network-EAP Enable Host Based EAP and Use Dynamic WEP Keys in ACU and select Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1X and Certificates (or Smart Card or Other Certificate) as the EAP Type in Windows Select Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1X and Smart Card or other Certificate as the EAP Type Enable Host Based EAP and Use Dynamic WEP Keys in ACU and select Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1X and PEAP as the EAP Type in Windows Select Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1X and PEAP as the EAP Type Set up and enable WEP and enable Network-EAP Set up and enable WEP and enable Require EAP and Open Authentication Set up and enable WEP and enable Network-EAP Set up and enable WEP and enable Require EAP and Open Authentication OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-27 Setting Network Security Parameters Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Table 5-6 Client and Access Point Security Settings (continued) Client Setting Access Point Setting Security Feature EAP-SIM authentication If using ACU to configure card If using Windows XP to configure card MIC TKIP Broadcast key rotation Enable Host Based EAP and Use Dynamic WEP Keys in ACU and select Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1X and SIM Authentication as the EAP Type in Windows Select Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1X and SIM Authentication as the EAP Type No settings required; automatically enabled by the driver included in the Install Wizard file No settings required; automatically enabled by the firmware included in the Install Wizard file Enable LEAP, EAP-TLS, PEAP, or EAP-SIM and use the firmware included in the Install Wizard file Reporting access points that fail LEAP authentication No settings required; automatically enabled in firmware version 5.02.20 or greater Fast secure roaming Enable LEAP and use firmware version 5.20.17 or greater Set up and enable WEP with full encryption and enable Network-EAP Set up and enable WEP with full encryption and enable Require EAP and Open Authentication Set up and enable WEP with full encryption, set MIC to MMH, and set Use Aironet Extensions to Yes Set up and enable WEP, set TKIP to Cisco, and set Use Aironet Extensions to Yes Set up and enable WEP and set Broadcast WEP Key Rotation Interval to any value other than zero (0) No settings required; automatically enabled in the following firmware versions: 12.00T or greater (340, 350, and 1200 series access points) or 12.2(4)JA or greater (1100 series access points) Use firmware version 12.2(11)JA or greater, select a cipher suite, and enable open authentication with EAP and CCKM Note To allow both 802.1X clients and non-802.1X clients to use the SSID, enable optional CCKM. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-28 OL-1394-06 Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Using Static WEP Setting Network Security Parameters This section provides instructions for entering new static WEP keys or overwriting existing static WEP keys. Entering a New Static WEP Key Follow the steps below to enter a new static WEP key for this profile. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Select None from the Network Security Type drop-down box on the Network Security screen. Select Use Static WEP Keys under WEP. Select one of the following WEP key entry methods:
Hexadecimal (0-9, A-F)Specifies that the WEP key will be entered in hexadecimal characters, which include 0-9, A-F, and a-f.
ASCII TextSpecifies that the WEP key will be entered in ASCII text, which includes alpha characters, numbers, and punctuation marks. Note ASCII text WEP keys are not supported on the Cisco Aironet 1200 Series Access Points, so you must select the Hexadecimal (0-9, A-F) option if you are planning to use your client adapter with these access points. Step 4 Select one of the following access point authentication options, which defines how your client adapter will attempt to authenticate to an access point:
Open AuthenticationEnables your client adapter, regardless of its WEP settings, to authenticate and attempt to communicate with an access point. Open Authentication is the default setting.
Shared Key AuthenticationEnables your client adapter to communicate only with access points that have the same WEP key. This option is available only if Use Static WEP Keys is selected. In shared key authentication, the access point sends a known unencrypted challenge packet to the client adapter, which encrypts the packet and sends it back to the access point. The access point attempts to decrypt the encrypted packet and sends an authentication response packet indicating the success or failure of the decryption back to the client adapter. If the packet is successfully encrypted/decrypted, the user is considered to be authenticated. Note Cisco recommends that shared key authentication not be used because it presents a security risk. Step 5 For the static WEP key that you are entering (1, 2, 3, or 4), select a WEP key size of 40 or 128 on the right side of the screen. 128-bit client adapters can use 40- or 128-bit keys, but 40-bit adapters can use only 40-bit keys. If 128 bit is not supported by the client adapter, this option is unavailable. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-29 Setting Network Security Parameters Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Step 6 Obtain the static WEP key from your system administrator and enter it in the blank field for the key you are creating. Follow the guidelines below to enter a new static WEP key:
WEP keys must contain the following number of characters:
10 hexadecimal characters or 5 ASCII text characters for 40-bit keys Example: 5A5A313859 (hexadecimal) or ZZ18Y (ASCII) 26 hexadecimal characters or 13 ASCII text characters for 128-bit keys Example: 5A583135333554595549333534 (hexadecimal) or ZX1535TYUI354 (ASCII) Note You must enter hexadecimal characters for 5-GHz client adapters if these adapters will be used with Cisco Aironet 1200 Series Access Points.
Your client adapters WEP key must match the WEP key used by the access point (in infrastructure mode) or clients (in ad hoc mode) with which you are planning to communicate.
When setting more than one WEP key, the keys must be assigned to the same WEP key numbers for all devices. For example, WEP key 2 must be WEP key number 2 on all devices. When multiple WEP keys are set, they must be in the same order on all devices. Note After you enter a WEP key, you can write over it, but you cannot edit or delete it. Step 7 Step 8 Click the Transmit Key button to the left of the key you want to use to transmit packets. Only one WEP key can be selected as the transmit key. Click OK to return to the Profile Manager screen; then click OK or Apply to save your changes. Overwriting an Existing Static WEP Key Follow the steps below to overwrite an existing static WEP key. Note You can overwrite existing WEP keys, but you cannot edit or delete them. Step 1 Look at the current WEP key settings in the middle of the Network Security screen. A checkmark appears in the Already Set? box for all existing static WEP keys. Note For security reasons, the codes for existing static WEP keys do not appear on the screen. Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Decide which existing static WEP key you want to overwrite. Click within the blank field of that key. Enter a new key, following the guidelines outlined in Step 6 of the Entering a New Static WEP Key section on page 5-29. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-30 OL-1394-06 Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Setting Network Security Parameters Step 5 Make sure the Transmit Key button to the left of your key is selected, if you want this key to be used to transmit packets. Click OK to return to the Profile Manager screen; then click OK or Apply to save your changes Step 6 Disabling Static WEP If you ever need to disable static WEP for a particular profile, select No WEP under WEP on the Network Security screen, click OK, and click OK or Apply on the Profile Manager screen. Note Selecting LEAP from the Network Security Type drop-down box on the Network Security screen disables static WEP automatically. Enabling LEAP Before you can enable LEAP authentication, your network devices must meet the following requirements:
Client adapters must support WEP and use the firmware, drivers, utilities, and security modules included in the Install Wizard file. Note To use the reporting access points that fail LEAP authentication and fast secure roaming features, client adapters must use the software included in Install Wizard version 1.1 or greater.
Access points to which your client adapter may attempt to authenticate must use the following software versions or greater: firmware version 12.00T (340, 350, and 1200 series access points) or IOS release 12.2(4)JA (1100 series access points). Note To use the reporting access points that fail LEAP authentication and fast secure roaming features, access points must use the firmware versions listed on page 5-26.
All necessary infrastructure devices (for example, access points, servers, etc.) must be properly configured for LEAP authentication. Follow the steps below to enable LEAP authentication for this profile. Step 1 Select LEAP from the Network Security Type drop-down box on the bottom of the Network Security screen. Note The LEAP option is available only if you selected the LEAP security module during installation. Note When you select this option, dynamic WEP is set automatically. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-31 Setting Network Security Parameters Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Step 2 Click Configure to the right of the Network Security Type drop-down box. The LEAP Settings screen appears (see Figure 5-6). Figure 5-6 LEAP Settings Screen Step 3 Select one of the following LEAP username and password setting options:
Use Temporary User Name and PasswordRequires you to enter the LEAP username and password each time the computer reboots in order to authenticate and gain access to the network.
Use Saved User Name and PasswordDoes not require you to enter a LEAP username and password each time the computer reboots. Authentication occurs automatically as needed using a saved username and password (which are registered with the RADIUS server). Note The Use Saved User Name and Password option is available only if the Allow Saved LEAP User Name and Password option was enabled (set to Yes) during installation. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-32 OL-1394-06 Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Setting Network Security Parameters Step 4 Perform one of the following:
If you selected Use Temporary User Name and Password in Step 3, select one of the following options:
Use Windows User Name and PasswordCauses your Windows username and password to also serve as your LEAP username and password, giving you only one set of credentials to remember. After you log in, the LEAP authentication process begins automatically. This option is the default setting. Automatically Prompt for LEAP User Name and PasswordRequires you to enter a separate LEAP username and password (which are registered with the RADIUS server) in addition to your regular Windows login in order to start the LEAP authentication process. Manually Prompt for LEAP User Name and PasswordRequires you to manually invoke the LEAP authentication process as needed using the Manual LEAP Login option from the Commands drop-down menu. You are not prompted to enter a LEAP username and password during the Windows login. This option might be used to support a software token one-time password system or other systems that require additional software that is not available at login.
If you selected Use Saved User Name and Password in Step 3, follow the steps below:
a. Enter a username and password in the appropriate fields. Note Usernames and passwords are limited to 32 ASCII characters each. However, if a domain name is entered in the Domain field, the sum of the username and domain name is limited to 31 ASCII characters. b. Re-enter the password in the Confirm Password field. c. If you wish to specify a domain name that will be passed to the RADIUS server along with your username, enter it in the Domain field. Step 5 If you work in an environment with multiple domains and, therefore, want your Windows login domain to be passed to the RADIUS server along with your username, check the Include Windows Logon Domain with User Name check box. The default setting is checked. Note If you selected to use a saved username and password but do not check the Include Windows Logon Domain with User Name check box, the Domain field becomes unavailable, and a domain name is not passed to the RADIUS server. Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 If you want to force the client adapter to disassociate after you log off so that another user cannot gain access to the wireless network using your credentials, check the No Network Connection Unless User Is Logged In check box. The default setting is checked. In the LEAP Authentication Timeout Value field, enter the amount of time (in seconds) before a LEAP authentication is considered to be failed and an error message appears. Range: 45 to 300 seconds Default: 90 seconds Click OK to exit the LEAP Settings screen. Click OK to exit the Network Security screen and return to the Profile Manager screen. On the Profile Manager screen, click OK or Apply to save your changes. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-33 Setting Network Security Parameters Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Step 10 Follow the steps below if the Microsoft 802.1X supplicant is installed on your computer and you want to take advantage of the fast secure roaming feature:
a. Perform one of the following steps, depending on your computers operating system:
If your computer is running Windows 98, 98 SE, NT, or Me, run the Microsoft 802.1X Authentication Client application. Then go to Step c. If your computer is running Windows 2000, double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and Network and Dial-up Connections. Right-click Local Area Connection. Click Properties. The Local Area Connection Properties screen appears. If your computer is running Windows XP, double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and Network Connections. Right-click Wireless Network Connection. Click Properties. The Wireless Network Connection Properties screen appears. Uncheck the Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings check box. b. Click the Authentication tab. Note In Service Pack 1 for Windows XP, the Authentication tab has moved from its previous location. To access it, click the Wireless Networks tab, select the network that you are configuring in the Preferred network list, and click Properties. c. Uncheck the Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1X check box. Step 11 Refer to Chapter 6 for instructions on authenticating using LEAP. Enabling Host-Based EAP Before you can enable host-based EAP authentication, your network devices must meet the following requirements:
Client adapters must support WEP and use the firmware, drivers, utilities, and security modules included in the Install Wizard file.
Access points to which your client adapter may attempt to authenticate must use the following software versions or greater: firmware version 12.00T (340, 350, and 1200 series access points) or IOS release 12.2(4)JA (1100 series access points).
The Microsoft 802.1X supplicant must be installed on your Windows device.
All necessary infrastructure devices (for example, access points, servers, gateways, user databases, etc.) must be properly configured for the authentication type you plan to enable on the client. Follow the steps below to enable host-based EAP authentication (EAP-TLS, PEAP, or EAP-SIM) for this profile. Note Because EAP-TLS, PEAP, and EAP-SIM authentication are enabled in the operating system and not in ACU, you cannot switch between these authentication types simply by switching profiles in ACU. You can create a profile in ACU that uses host-based EAP, but you must enable the specific authentication type in Windows (provided Windows uses the Microsoft 802.1X supplicant). In addition, Windows can be set for only one authentication type at a time; therefore, if you have more than one profile in ACU that uses host-based EAP and you want to use another authentication type, you must change authentication types in Windows after switching profiles in ACU. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-34 OL-1394-06 Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Setting Network Security Parameters Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Select Host Based EAP from the Network Security Type drop-down box on the Network Security screen. Select Use Dynamic WEP Keys under WEP. Click OK to return to the Profile Manager screen. Click OK or Apply on the Profile Manager screen to save your changes. Perform one of the following, depending on your computers operating system:
If your computer is running Windows 98, 98 SE, NT, or Me, run the Microsoft 802.1X Authentication Client application. Then go to Step 7. If your computer is running Windows 2000, double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and Network and Dial-up Connections. Right-click Local Area Connection. Click Properties. The Local Area Connection Properties screen appears. If your computer is running Windows XP, double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and Network Connections. Right-click Wireless Network Connection. Click Properties. The Wireless Network Connection Properties screen appears. Note These instructions assume you are using Windows XPs classic view rather than its category view. Step 6 Click the Authentication tab. The following screen appears (see Figure 5-7). Note In Service Pack 1 for Windows XP, the Authentication tab has moved from its previous location. To access it, click the Wireless Networks tab, select the network that you are configuring in the Preferred network list, and click Properties. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-35 Setting Network Security Parameters Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Figure 5-7 Wireless Network Connection Properties Screen (Authentication Tab) - Windows 2000 and XP Only Step 7 Step 8 Check the Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1X check box. Perform one of the following, depending on the authentication type you want to use:
If you are planning to use EAP-TLS, go to the Enabling EAP-TLS section below. If you are planning to use PEAP, go to the Enabling PEAP section on page 5-39. If you are planning to use EAP-SIM, go to the Enabling EAP-SIM section on page 5-41. Enabling EAP-TLS Follow the steps below to enable EAP-TLS. Step 1 Step 2 For EAP type, select Certificates (on Windows 98, 98 SE, NT, or Me) or Smart Card or other Certificate (on Windows 2000 or XP). Click Properties. The Certificate Properties screen (see Figure 5-8) or the Smart Card or other Certificate Properties screen appears (see Figure 5-9). Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-36 OL-1394-06 Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Setting Network Security Parameters Figure 5-8 Certificate Properties Screen - Windows 98, 98 SE, NT, and Me Only Figure 5-9 Smart Card or other Certificate Properties Screen - Windows 2000 and XP Only OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-37 Setting Network Security Parameters Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Select the Use a certificate on this computer option. If your computer is running Windows 98, 98 SE, NT, or Me, make sure the Use simple certificate selection (Recommended) check box is selected. Check the Validate server certificate check box if server certificate validation is required. If you want to specify the name of the server to connect to, check the Connect to these servers or Connect only if server name ends with check box and enter the appropriate server name or server name suffix in the field below. Note If you enter a server name and the client adapter connects to a server that does not match the name you entered, you are prompted to accept or cancel the connection during the authentication process. Note If you leave this field blank, the server name is not verified, and a connection is established as long as the certificate is valid. Step 7 Perform one of the following:
If your computer is running Windows 98, 98 SE, NT, or Me, select the certificate authority from which the server certificate was downloaded in the Trusted Root Certification Authorities field. If your computer is running Windows 2000 or XP, make sure that the name of the certificate authority from which the server certificate was downloaded appears in the Trusted root certificate authority field. Note If you leave this field blank, you are prompted to accept a connection to the root certification authority during the authentication process. Step 8 Step 9 Click OK twice to save your settings. The configuration is complete. Refer to Chapter 6 for instructions on authenticating using EAP-TLS. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-38 OL-1394-06 Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Setting Network Security Parameters Enabling PEAP Follow the steps below to enable PEAP. Step 1 Step 2 For EAP type, select PEAP. Click Properties. The PEAP Properties screen appears (see Figure 5-10). Figure 5-10 PEAP Properties Screen Step 3 Step 4 Check the Validate server certificate check box if server certificate validation is required
(recommended). If you want to specify the name of the server to connect to, check the Connect only if server name ends with check box and enter the appropriate server name suffix in the field below. Note If you enter a server name and the client adapter connects to a server that does not match the name you entered, you are prompted to accept or cancel the connection during the authentication process. Note If you leave this field blank, the server name is not verified, and a connection is established as long as the certificate is valid. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-39 Setting Network Security Parameters Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Step 5 Make sure that the name of the certificate authority from which the server certificate was downloaded appears in the Trusted root certificate authority (CA) field. If necessary, click the arrow on the drop-down menu and select the appropriate name. Note If you leave this field blank, you are prompted to accept a connection to the root certification authority during the authentication process. Step 6 Step 7 Check the Connect only if server is signed by specified trusted root CA check box if you want to ensure that the certificate server uses the trusted root certificate specified in the field above. This prevents the client from establishing connections to rogue access points. Currently Generic Token Card is the only second phase EAP type available. Click Properties. The Generic Token Card Properties screen appears (see Figure 5-11). Figure 5-11 Generic Token Card Properties Screen Step 8 Select either the Static Password (Windows NT/2000, LDAP) or the One Time Password option, depending on your user database. Step 9 Perform one of the following:
If you selected the Static Password (Windows NT/2000, LDAP) option in Step 8, go to Step 10. If you selected the One Time Password option in Step 8, check one or both of the following check boxes to specify the type of tokens that will be supported for one-time passwords:
Support Hardware TokenA hardware token device obtains the one-time password. You must use your hardware token device to obtain the one-time password and enter the password when prompted for your user credentials. Support Software TokenThe PEAP supplicant works with a software token program to retrieve the one-time password. You have to enter only the PIN, not the one-time password. If you check this check box, you must also select from the Supported Type drop-down box the software token software that is installed on the client (such as Secure Computing SofToken Version 1.3, Secure Computing SofToken II 2.0, or RSA SecurID Software Token v 2.5), and if Secure Computing SofToken Version 1.3 is selected, you must locate the software program path using the Browse button. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-40 OL-1394-06 Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Setting Network Security Parameters Note The SofToken Program Path field is unavailable if a software token program other than Secure Computing SofToken Version 1.3 is selected. Step 10 Click OK three times to save your settings. The configuration is complete. Step 11 Refer to Chapter 6 for instructions on authenticating using PEAP. Enabling EAP-SIM Follow the steps below to enable EAP-SIM. Step 1 Step 2 For EAP type, select SIM Authentication. Click Properties. The SIM Authentication Properties screen appears (see Figure 5-12). Figure 5-12 SIM Authentication Properties Screen Step 3 To access any resources (data or commands) on the SIM, the EAP-SIM supplicant must provide a valid PIN to the SIM card, which must match the PIN stored on the SIM. Select one of the following options to specify how the EAP-SIM supplicant should handle the SIM cards PIN:
Ask for my PIN once after I turn my computer on (recommended)The software does not permanently store the PIN. It prompts you for the PIN once, on the first authentication of every session, where a session is defined as the time between power-up and shutdown or reboot.
Ask for my PIN every time the network asks for authenticationThe software never stores the PIN; it prompts you for the PIN every time an EAP-SIM authentication is performed. This option is not recommended if your client will be roaming between access points or if session timeouts are implemented (such as for accounting and security purposes). OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-41 Setting Network Security Parameters Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter
Let me give my PIN to the computer now and never ask me again; PIN will be encrypted and stored on computer (not recommended)You need to enter the PIN only once, in the Enter PIN edit box below this option. The software stores the PIN in the registry and retrieves it from there when required. If you select this option, you must enter the PIN now. The PIN is validated when an authentication attempt is made. Note This option is not recommended because it enables others to use the SIM without knowing the PIN. Step 4 Step 5 Click OK twice to save your settings. The configuration is complete. If you are prompted to restart your client adapter, turn off your client adapters radio, wait a few seconds, and then turn the radio back on. Refer to the Turning Your Client Adapters Radio On or Off section on page 9-15 for instructions. Step 6 Refer to Chapter 6 for instructions on authenticating using EAP-SIM. Disabling LEAP or Host-Based EAP If you ever need to disable LEAP or host-based EAP for a particular profile, follow the instructions below for your EAP authentication type. Disabling LEAP To disable LEAP for a particular profile, select None from the Network Security Type drop-down box on the Network Security screen in ACU, click OK, and click OK or Apply on the Profile Manager screen. Disabling Host-Based EAP To disable host-based EAP (EAP-TLS, PEAP, or EAP-SIM) for a particular profile, follow the steps below:
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Select None from the Network Security Type drop-down box on the Network Security screen in ACU and click OK. Click OK or Apply on the Profile Manager screen. Perform one of the following, depending on your computers operating system:
If your computer is running Windows 98, 98 SE, NT, or Me, run the Microsoft 802.1X Authentication Client application. Then go to Step 5. If your computer is running Windows 2000, double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and Network and Dial-up Connections. Right-click Local Area Connection. Click Properties. The Local Area Connection Properties screen appears. If your computer is running Windows XP, double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and Network Connections. Right-click Wireless Network Connection. Click Properties. The Wireless Network Connection Properties screen appears. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-42 OL-1394-06 Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Setting Network Security Parameters Step 4 Click the Authentication tab. Note In Service Pack 1 for Windows XP, the Authentication tab has moved from its previous location. To access it, click the Wireless Networks tab, select the network that you are configuring in the Preferred network list, and click Properties. Step 5 Step 6 Uncheck the Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1X check box. Click OK. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-43 Setting Network Security Parameters Chapter 5 Configuring the Client Adapter Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 5-44 OL-1394-06 C H A P T E R 6 Using EAP Authentication This chapter explains the sequence of events that occurs and the actions you must take when a profile that is set for EAP authentication is selected for use. The following topics are covered in this chapter:
Overview, page 6-2
Using LEAP, page 6-2
Using LEAP with the Windows Username and Password, page 6-3
Using LEAP with an Automatically Prompted Login, page 6-6
Using LEAP with a Manually Prompted Login, page 6-9
Using LEAP with a Saved Username and Password, page 6-13
Using EAP-TLS, page 6-15
Using PEAP, page 6-16
Using EAP-SIM, page 6-19
Restarting the Authentication Process, page 6-21 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 6-1 Overview Overview Chapter 6 Using EAP Authentication This chapter explains the sequence of events that occurs as soon as you or ACUs auto profile selection feature selects a profile that uses EAP authentication as well as after you eject and reinsert the client adapter, reboot the computer, log on while this profile is selected, or are informed that your username and password have expired. The chapter contains seven sections based on the profiles authentication type and its username and password settings:
LEAP with the Windows username and password, page 6-3
LEAP with an automatically prompted login, page 6-6
LEAP with a manually prompted login, page 6-9
LEAP with a saved username and password, page 6-13
EAP-TLS, page 6-15
PEAP, page 6-16
EAP-SIM, page 6-19 Also provided are an overview of LEAP (below) and instructions for restarting the authentication process when necessary (page 6-21). Follow the instructions for your profiles authentication type and credential settings to successfully authenticate. Note If any error messages appear during authentication, refer to Chapter 10 for explanations and recommended actions. Using LEAP Step 1 When LEAP authentication begins, the LEAP Authentication Status screen appears (see Figure 6-1). Note The LEAP Authentication Status screen might appear behind any open applications. Figure 6-1 LEAP Authentication Status Screen Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 6-2 OL-1394-06 Chapter 6 Using EAP Authentication Using LEAP with the Windows Username and Password This screen provides information about the status of LEAP authentication. Table 6-1 lists and explains the stages of LEAP authentication. As each stage is completed, a status message (such as Successful) appears in the Status field. If any error messages appear, refer to the LEAP Authentication Error Messages section on page 10-18 for an explanation and the recommended action to take. Table 6-1 Stages of LEAP Authentication Stage Starting LEAP Authentication Checking Link Status Renewing IP Address Detecting IPX Frame Type Finding Domain Controller Explanation The client adapter associates to an access point, and the LEAP authentication process begins. The client adapter is LEAP authenticated, and the network connection is verified. If DHCP is enabled, the IP address is released and renewed. On Windows 2000 and XP, the IPX frame type is reset if AutoDetect is enabled. If you are logging into a domain and the active profile specifies that the domain name be included, an attempt is made to find the domain controller to make sure subsequent access to the domain is successful. Step 2 If you do not want the LEAP Authentication Status screen to appear each time the client adapter attempts to LEAP authenticate, check the Shown minimized next time check box in the bottom left corner of the screen. On future LEAP authentication attempts, the LEAP Authentication Status screen appears minimized in the Windows system tray. Note To make the LEAP Authentication Status screen reappear once it has been minimized, click the LEAP Authentication Status tab in the Windows system tray and uncheck the Shown minimized next time check box. The LEAP Authentication Status screen should now appear for all future LEAP authentication attempts. Using LEAP with the Windows Username and Password After Profile Selection or Card Insertion After you (or auto profile selection) select a profile that uses LEAP authentication and specifies that your Windows username and password also serve as your LEAP username and password or you eject and reinsert the client adapter while this profile is selected, the following events occur:
1. The LEAP Authentication Status screen appears. 2. If your client adapter authenticates, the screen shows that each stage was successful and then disappears. ACM now shows Authenticated, and the Server Based Authentication field on the ACU Status screen shows LEAP Authenticated. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 6-3 Using LEAP with the Windows Username and Password Chapter 6 Using EAP Authentication If the authentication attempt fails, an error message appears after the LEAP timeout period has expired. Refer to the LEAP Authentication Error Messages section on page 10-18 for the necessary action to take. After a Reboot or Logon After your computer reboots or you log on, follow the steps below to LEAP authenticate. Step 1 When the Windows login screen appears (see Figure 6-2 and Figure 6-3), enter your Windows username and password and click OK. The domain name is optional. Note If your computer is running Windows NT, 2000, or XP and has Novell Client 32 software installed, a separate LEAP login screen appears before the Novell login screen. If this occurs, enter your Windows and Novell username and password in the login screens and click OK. Figure 6-2 Windows Login Screen (Windows 98, 98 SE, and Me) Figure 6-3 Windows Login Screen (Windows NT) Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 6-4 OL-1394-06 Chapter 6 Using EAP Authentication Using LEAP with the Windows Username and Password Note The Windows login screens shown above appear on computers running Windows 98, 98 SE, and Me (Figure 6-2) and Windows NT (Figure 6-3), respectively. The login screen looks slightly different on computers running Windows 2000 and XP. The LEAP Authentication Status screen appears. Step 2 If your client adapter authenticates, the screen shows that each stage was successful and then disappears. ACM now shows Authenticated, and the Server Based Authentication field on the ACU Status screen shows LEAP Authenticated. If the authentication attempt fails, an error message appears after the LEAP timeout period has expired. Refer to the LEAP Authentication Error Messages section on page 10-18 for the necessary action to take. Step 3 Windows continues to log you onto the system. After Your LEAP Credentials Expire If the LEAP credentials (username and password) for your current profile expire or become invalid, follow the steps below to reauthenticate. Note If your computer is running Windows NT, 2000, or XP and you change your Windows password using the standard Windows Change Password function, the client updates the LEAP password automatically and maintains its connection to the access point if the current profile uses the Windows username and password. If your computer is running Windows 98, 98 SE, or Me and you change your Windows password, the client loses association from the access point, and you are prompted to enter your new credentials. Step 1 Click OK when the following message appears: The user name and password entered are no longer valid and have failed the LEAP authentication process. Please enter a new user name and password. Step 2 When the Windows login screen appears, enter your new username and password and click OK. The client adapter should authenticate using your new credentials. Note If you click Cancel rather than OK on the Windows login screen, the following message appears:
The profile will be disabled until you select the Reauthenticate option, Windows restarts, or the card is ejected and reinserted. Are you sure? If you click No, the Windows login screen reappears and allows you to enter your new credentials. If you click Yes, the current profile is disabled until you select Reauthenticate from ACM or the Commands drop-down menu in ACU, reboot your computer, or eject and reinsert the card. The Current Profile field on the ACU Status screen lists the profile as being Disabled. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 6-5 Using LEAP with an Automatically Prompted Login Chapter 6 Using EAP Authentication Using LEAP with an Automatically Prompted Login After Profile Selection or Card Insertion After you (or auto profile selection) select a profile that uses LEAP authentication but specifies that you be automatically prompted to enter a separate LEAP username and password or you eject and reinsert the client adapter while this profile is selected, follow the steps below to LEAP authenticate. Note This procedure is applicable the first time an automatically prompted LEAP profile is selected. After you follow the steps below to enter your LEAP credentials, you can switch profiles without having to re-enter your credentials until you reboot your computer, eject and reinsert your client adapter, or change the profile in any way (including its priority in auto profile selection). Step 1 When the LEAP login screen appears (see Figure 6-4), enter your LEAP username and password and click OK. The domain name is optional. Figure 6-4 LEAP Login Screen Note The LEAP login screen shown above appears on computers running Windows NT, 2000, or XP. The LEAP login screen looks slightly different on computers running other Windows operating systems. The LEAP Authentication Status screen appears. Step 2 If your client adapter authenticates, the screen shows that each stage was successful and then disappears. ACM now shows Authenticated, and the Server Based Authentication field on the ACU Status screen shows LEAP Authenticated. If the authentication attempt fails, an error message appears after the LEAP timeout period has expired. Refer to the LEAP Authentication Error Messages section on page 10-18 for the necessary action to take. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 6-6 OL-1394-06 Chapter 6 Using EAP Authentication Using LEAP with an Automatically Prompted Login After a Reboot or Logon After your computer reboots or you log on, follow the steps below to LEAP authenticate. Step 1 When the LEAP login screen appears (see Figure 6-5), enter your LEAP username and password and click OK. The domain name is optional. Figure 6-5 LEAP Login Screen Note Note The LEAP login screen shown above appears on computers running Windows NT, 2000, or XP. The LEAP login screen looks slightly different on computers running other Windows operating systems. The LEAP login screen should appear before the Windows login screen on computers running Windows 98, 98 SE, or Me. If the Windows screen appears first, follow the instructions in the LEAP Login Screen Does Not Appear Before Windows Login Screen (Windows 98, 98 SE, and Me Only) section on page 10-13. On computers running Windows NT, 2000, or XP, the LEAP login screen appears after the Windows login screen. The LEAP Authentication Status screen appears. Step 2 If your client adapter authenticates, the screen shows that each stage was successful and then disappears. ACM now shows Authenticated, and the Server Based Authentication field on the ACU Status screen shows LEAP Authenticated. If the authentication attempt fails, an error message appears after the LEAP timeout period has expired. Refer to the LEAP Authentication Error Messages section on page 10-18 for the necessary action to take. Step 3 When the network login screen appears (see Figure 6-6 and Figure 6-7), enter your network username and password and click OK. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 6-7 Using LEAP with an Automatically Prompted Login Chapter 6 Using EAP Authentication Note Figure 6-6 shows an example network login screen that may appear on computers running Windows 98, 98 SE, and Me. Your screen may look different. Figure 6-7 shows the network login screen that appears on Windows 2000 systems. The login screen looks slightly different on computers running Windows NT and XP. Figure 6-6 Network Login Screen (Windows 98, 98 SE, and Me) Figure 6-7 Network Login Screen (Windows 2000) Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 6-8 OL-1394-06 Chapter 6 Using EAP Authentication Using LEAP with a Manually Prompted Login After Your LEAP Credentials Expire If the LEAP credentials (username and password) for your current profile expire or become invalid, follow the steps below to reauthenticate. Step 1 Click OK when the following message appears: The user name and password entered are no longer valid and have failed the LEAP authentication process. Please enter a new user name and password. Step 2 When the LEAP login screen appears, enter your new username and password and click OK. The client adapter should authenticate using your new credentials. Note If you click Cancel rather than OK on the LEAP login screen, the following message appears:
The profile will be disabled until you select the Reauthenticate option, Windows restarts, or the card is ejected and reinserted. Are you sure? If you click No, the LEAP login screen reappears and allows you to enter your new credentials. If you click Yes, the current profile is disabled until you select Reauthenticate from ACM or the Commands drop-down menu in ACU, reboot your computer, or eject and reinsert the card. The Current Profile field on the ACU Status screen lists the profile as being Disabled. Using LEAP with a Manually Prompted Login After Profile Selection After you (or auto profile selection) select a profile that uses LEAP authentication but specifies that the process be manually invoked, follow the steps below to LEAP authenticate. Note This procedure is applicable the first time a manual LEAP profile is selected. After you follow the steps below to enter your LEAP credentials, you can switch profiles without having to re-enter your credentials until you reboot your computer, eject and reinsert your client adapter, or change the profile in any way (including its priority in auto profile selection). OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 6-9 Using LEAP with a Manually Prompted Login Chapter 6 Using EAP Authentication Step 1 Perform one of the following:
If you select a manual LEAP profile from the Use Selected Profile drop-down box, the LEAP login screen appears (see Figure 6-8). Figure 6-8 LEAP Login Screen Enter your LEAP username and password and click OK. The domain name is optional. Note The LEAP login screen shown above appears on computers running Windows NT, 2000, or XP. The LEAP login screen looks slightly different on computers running other Windows operating systems.
If auto profile selection selects a manual LEAP profile, you must select the Manual LEAP Login option from the Commands drop-down menu (see Figure 6-9). Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 6-10 OL-1394-06 Chapter 6 Using EAP Authentication Using LEAP with a Manually Prompted Login Figure 6-9 Commands Drop-Down Menu When the LEAP login screen appears (see Figure 6-8), enter your LEAP username and password and click OK. The domain name is optional. Step 2 The LEAP Authentication Status screen appears. If your client adapter authenticates, the screen shows that each stage was successful and then disappears. ACM now shows Authenticated, and the Server Based Authentication field on the ACU Status screen shows LEAP Authenticated. If the authentication attempt fails, an error message appears after the LEAP timeout period has expired. Refer to the LEAP Authentication Error Messages section on page 10-18 for the necessary action to take. After a Reboot, Logon, or Card Insertion After your computer reboots, you log on, or you eject and reinsert the client adapter, the adapter does not automatically attempt to authenticate. You must manually invoke the authentication process. To do so, follow the steps below. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 If you rebooted your computer or logged on, complete your standard Windows login. Open ACU. Select the Manual LEAP Login option from the Commands drop-down menu (see Figure 6-10). OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 6-11 Using LEAP with a Manually Prompted Login Chapter 6 Using EAP Authentication Figure 6-10 Commands Drop-Down Menu Step 4 When the LEAP login screen appears (see Figure 6-11), enter your LEAP username and password and click OK. The domain name is optional. Figure 6-11 LEAP Login Screen Note The LEAP login screen shown above appears on computers running Windows NT, 2000, or XP. The LEAP login screen looks slightly different on computers running other Windows operating systems. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 6-12 OL-1394-06 Chapter 6 Using EAP Authentication Using LEAP with a Saved Username and Password The LEAP Authentication Status screen appears. Step 5 If your client adapter authenticates, the screen shows that each stage was successful and then disappears. ACM now shows Authenticated, and the Server Based Authentication field on the ACU Status screen shows LEAP Authenticated. If the authentication attempt fails, an error message appears after the LEAP timeout period has expired. Refer to the LEAP Authentication Error Messages section on page 10-18 for the necessary action to take. After Your LEAP Credentials Expire If the LEAP credentials (username and password) for your current profile expire or become invalid, follow the steps below to reauthenticate. Step 1 Click OK when the following message appears: The user name and password entered are no longer valid and have failed the LEAP authentication process. Please enter a new user name and password. Step 2 When the LEAP login screen appears, enter your new username and password and click OK. The client adapter should authenticate using your new credentials. Note If you click Cancel rather than OK on the LEAP login screen, the following message appears:
The profile will be disabled until you select the Reauthenticate option, Windows restarts, or the card is ejected and reinserted. Are you sure? If you click No, the LEAP login screen reappears and allows you to enter your new credentials. If you click Yes, the current profile is disabled until you select Reauthenticate from ACM or the Commands drop-down menu in ACU, reboot your computer, or eject and reinsert the card. The Current Profile field on the ACU Status screen lists the profile as being Disabled. Using LEAP with a Saved Username and Password After Profile Selection or Card Insertion After you (or auto profile selection) select a profile that uses LEAP authentication with a saved LEAP username and password or you eject and reinsert the client adapter while this profile is selected, the following events occur:
1. The LEAP Authentication Status screen appears. 2. If your client adapter authenticates, the screen shows that each stage was successful and then disappears. ACM now shows Authenticated, and the Server Based Authentication field on the ACU Status screen shows LEAP Authenticated. If the authentication attempt fails, an error message appears after the LEAP timeout period has expired. Refer to the LEAP Authentication Error Messages section on page 10-18 for the necessary action to take. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 6-13 Using LEAP with a Saved Username and Password After a Reboot or Logon Chapter 6 Using EAP Authentication After your computer reboots or you log on, the following events occur:
1. After you enter your Windows username and password, the LEAP authentication process begins automatically using your saved LEAP username and password. Note If you unchecked the No Network Connection Unless User Is Logged In check box on the LEAP Settings screen, the LEAP authentication process begins before the Windows login screen appears. 2. If your client adapter authenticates, the screen shows that each stage was successful and then disappears. ACM now shows Authenticated, and the Server Based Authentication field on the ACU Status screen shows LEAP Authenticated. If the authentication attempt fails, an error message appears after the LEAP timeout period has expired. Refer to the LEAP Authentication Error Messages section on page 10-18 for the necessary action to take. 3. Windows continues to log you onto the system. After Your LEAP Credentials Expire If the LEAP credentials (username and password) for your current profile expire or become invalid, follow the steps below to reauthenticate. Step 1 Click OK when the following message appears: The saved user name and password entered for this profile are no longer valid and have failed the LEAP authentication process. Please enter a new user name and password. Remember to change them permanently in the profile using the ACU Profile Manager. Step 2 When the LEAP login screen appears, enter your new username and password and click OK. The client adapter should authenticate using your new credentials. Note If you click Cancel rather than OK on the LEAP login screen, the following message appears:
The profile will be disabled until you select the Reauthenticate option, Windows restarts, or the card is ejected and reinserted. Are you sure? If you click No, the LEAP login screen reappears and allows you to enter your new credentials. If you click Yes, the current profile is disabled until you select Reauthenticate from ACM or the Commands drop-down menu in ACU, reboot your computer, or eject and reinsert the card. The Current Profile field on the ACU Status screen lists the profile as being Disabled. Step 3 Step 4 Edit the profile in ACU by changing the saved username and password on the LEAP Settings screen. Click OK three times to save the changes to your profile. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 6-14 OL-1394-06 Chapter 6 Using EAP Authentication Using EAP-TLS After Profile Selection or Card Insertion Using EAP-TLS After you (or auto profile selection) select a profile that uses host-based EAP authentication and you configure the card in Windows (provided Windows is using the Microsoft 802.1X supplicant) for EAP-TLS authentication or you eject and reinsert the client adapter while this profile is selected, follow the steps below to EAP authenticate. Step 1 If your computer is running Windows XP and a pop-up message appears above the Windows system tray informing you that you need to accept a certificate to begin the EAP authentication process, click the message and follow the instructions provided to accept the certificate. Note You should not have to accept a certificate for future authentication attempts. After you accept one, the same certificate is used subsequently. Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 If a message appears indicating the root certification authority for the servers certificate, and it is the correct certification authority, click OK to accept the connection. Otherwise, click Cancel. If a message appears indicating the server to which your client adapter is connected, and it is the correct server to connect to, click OK to accept the connection. Otherwise, click Cancel. The client adapter should now EAP authenticate. To verify authentication, double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and Network Connections. The status appears to the right of your Wireless Network Connection. Click View and Refresh to obtain the current status. If the client adapter is authenticated, the status reads Authentication succeeded. After a Reboot or Logon After your computer reboots or you log on using your Windows username and password, the EAP authentication process begins automatically and the client adapter should EAP authenticate. To verify authentication, double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and Network Connections. The status appears to the right of your Wireless Network Connection. Click View and Refresh to obtain the current status. If the client adapter is authenticated, the status reads Authentication succeeded. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 6-15 Using PEAP Using PEAP Chapter 6 Using EAP Authentication After Profile Selection, Card Insertion, Reboot, or Logon After you (or auto profile selection) select a profile that uses host-based EAP authentication and you configure the card in Windows (provided Windows is using the Microsoft 802.1X supplicant) for PEAP authentication, follow the steps in one of the sections below, depending on your user database, to EAP authenticate. Note These instructions are applicable after profile selection, card ejection and re-insertion, reboot, or logon. Windows NT or 2000 Domain Databases or LDAP Databases Only Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 If your computer is running Windows XP, a pop-up message appears above the Windows system tray informing you that you need to select a certificate or other credentials to access the network. Click this message. If a message appears indicating the root certification authority for the servers certificate and it is the correct certification authority, click OK to accept the connection. Otherwise, click Cancel. If a message appears indicating the server to which your client adapter is connected and it is the correct server to connect to, click OK to accept the connection. Otherwise, click Cancel. Step 4 Perform one of the following:
If your computer is running Windows 2000, the Static Password screen appears (see Figure 6-12). If your computer is running Windows XP, a pop-up message appears above the Windows system tray prompting you to process your logon information for your wireless network. Click this message. The Static Password screen appears (see Figure 6-12). Figure 6-12 Static Password Screen Step 5 Step 6 Enter your PEAP authentication username and password (which are registered with the RADIUS server). If applicable, select your domain name from the drop-down list or type it in. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 6-16 OL-1394-06 Chapter 6 Using EAP Authentication Using PEAP Step 7 Step 8 Click OK. The client adapter should now EAP authenticate. To verify authentication, double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and Network Connections. The status appears to the right of your Wireless Network Connection. Click View and Refresh to obtain the current status. If the client adapter is authenticated, the status reads Authentication succeeded. If you also have a locally cached Windows password, you must change it manually in Windows to synchronize your passwords. To do so, press Ctrl-Alt-Delete, select Change Password, and enter your old password once and your new password twice. OTP Databases Only Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 If your computer is running Windows XP, a pop-up message appears above the Windows system tray informing you that you need to select a certificate or other credentials to access the network. Click this message. If a message appears indicating the root certification authority for the servers certificate and it is the correct certification authority, click OK to accept the connection. Otherwise, click Cancel. If a message appears indicating the server to which your client adapter is connected and it is the correct server to connect to, click OK to accept the connection. Otherwise, click Cancel. Step 4 Perform one of the following:
If your computer is running Windows 2000, the One Time Password screen appears (see Figure 6-13). If your computer is running Windows XP, a pop-up message appears above the Windows system tray prompting you to process your logon information for your wireless network. Click this message. The One Time Password screen appears (see Figure 6-13). Figure 6-13 One Time Password Screen Step 5 Enter your PEAP authentication username in the User Name field. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 6-17 Using PEAP Chapter 6 Using EAP Authentication Step 6 Select either the Hardware Token or Software Token option. If you select the Software Token option, the Password field on the One Time Password screen changes to the PIN field. Note The Hardware Token and Software Token options are available only if you selected both of them on the Generic Token Card Properties screen during configuration. Otherwise, only the option you selected will be available. Step 7 Step 8 Enter either your hardware token password or your software token PIN. Click OK. The client adapter should now EAP authenticate. To verify authentication, double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and Network Connections. The status appears to the right of your Wireless Network Connection. Click View and Refresh to obtain the current status. If the client adapter is authenticated, the status reads Authentication succeeded. After Your Password Expires (Windows NT or 2000 Domain Databases Only) If you are using a Windows NT or 2000 domain database with PEAP and the password for your current user ID expires, follow the steps below to change your password. Step 1 When the Change Password screen appears (see Figure 6-14) to indicate that your password has expired, enter your old password in the Old Password field. Figure 6-14 Change Password Screen Step 2 Enter your new password in both the New Password and Confirm New Password fields. Note The password is also changed in the Windows NT or 2000 domain user database. Step 3 Click OK. The client adapter should authenticate using your new password. To verify authentication, double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and Network Connections. The status appears to the right of your Wireless Network Connection. Click View and Refresh to obtain the current status. If the client adapter is authenticated, the status reads Authentication succeeded. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 6-18 OL-1394-06 Chapter 6 Using EAP Authentication Using EAP-SIM After Your PIN Expires (OTP Databases Only) If you are using an OTP database with PEAP and the PIN for your current user ID expires, follow the steps below to change your PIN. Step 1 When the Change PIN screen appears (see Figure 6-15) to indicate that your PIN has expired, enter your old PIN in the Old PIN field. Figure 6-15 Change PIN Screen Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Enter your new PIN in both the New PIN and Confirm New PIN fields. Enter a word that will help you to remember your PIN in the PIN Hint Phrase field. Click OK. The client adapter should authenticate using your new PIN. To verify authentication, double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and Network Connections. The status appears to the right of your Wireless Network Connection. Click View and Refresh to obtain the current status. If the client adapter is authenticated, the status reads Authentication succeeded. Note You should use the new PIN for future authentication attempts. Using EAP-SIM After you (or auto profile selection) select a profile that uses host-based EAP authentication and you configure the card in Windows (provided Windows is using the Microsoft 802.1X supplicant) for EAP-SIM authentication, the authentication process varies depending on the configuration option you selected for the SIM cards PIN. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 6-19 Using EAP-SIM Chapter 6 Using EAP Authentication If You Are Prompted for the PIN If you chose to be prompted for the PIN after a power-up or reboot or at every authentication request, follow the steps below to EAP authenticate. Note These instructions are applicable after profile selection, card ejection and re-insertion, reboot, or logon. Step 1 Perform one of the following:
If your computer is running Windows 2000, the Enter PIN screen appears (see Figure 6-16). If your computer is running Windows XP, a pop-up message appears above the Windows system tray informing you that you need to enter your credentials to access the network. Click this message. The Enter PIN screen appears (see Figure 6-16). Figure 6-16 Enter PIN Screen Step 2 Enter your PIN and click OK. The computer now retrieves information from the SIM card. If you enter the PIN incorrectly, an error message appears. Note If you exceed the maximum number of retries for entering the PIN, the card locks up. Step 3 The client adapter should now EAP authenticate. To verify authentication, double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and Network Connections. The status appears to the right of your Wireless Network Connection. Click View and Refresh to obtain the current status. If the client adapter is authenticated, the status reads Authentication succeeded. Note ACU and the Windows Wireless Network Connection icon in the Windows XP system tray may indicate a connection status when authentication is still in the pending state or the authentication server fails to respond. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 6-20 OL-1394-06 Chapter 6 Using EAP Authentication Restarting the Authentication Process If the PIN Is Stored on the Computer If you chose to store the PIN in the computers registry, the EAP authentication process begins automatically, and the client adapter should EAP authenticate and use the saved PIN to access the SIM card. Note These instructions are applicable after profile selection, card ejection and re-insertion, reboot, or logon. Note If the stored PIN is wrong and therefore rejected by the SIM, the EAP-SIM supplicant temporarily changes the prompt mode to the default setting (Ask for my PIN once after I turn my computer on) in order to prevent the SIM from locking up. Unless changed manually, this setting stays in effect until your computer is powered off. Change your stored PIN on the SIM Authentication Properties screen. To verify authentication, double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and Network Connections. The status appears to the right of your Wireless Network Connection. Click View and Refresh to obtain the current status. If the client adapter is authenticated, the status reads Authentication succeeded. Note ACU and the Windows Wireless Network Connection icon in the Windows XP system tray may indicate a connection status when authentication is still in the pending state or the authentication server fails to respond. Restarting the Authentication Process If your client adapter was unable to authenticate using the specified username and password and you have exhausted the retry limit (for example, LEAP tries only once to prevent you from being locked out of the system), the current profile is disabled until you change the username or password, reboot your computer, or eject and re-insert the client adapter. To force your client adapter to try to reauthenticate using the username and password of the current profile, select Reauthenticate from ACM or the Commands drop-down menu in ACU. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 6-21 Restarting the Authentication Process Chapter 6 Using EAP Authentication Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 6-22 OL-1394-06 C H A P T E R 7 Performing Diagnostics This chapter explains how to use ACU to perform user-level diagnostics. The following topics are covered in this chapter:
Overview of ACU Diagnostic Tools, page 7-2
Setting Parameters that Affect ACU Diagnostic Tools, page 7-3
Viewing the Current Status of Your Client Adapter, page 7-4
Viewing Statistics for Your Client Adapter, page 7-11
Viewing the Link Status Meter, page 7-16
Running an RF Link Test, page 7-17 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 7-1 Overview of ACU Diagnostic Tools Chapter 7 Performing Diagnostics Overview of ACU Diagnostic Tools In addition to enabling you to configure your client adapter for use in various types of networks, ACU provides tools that enable you to assess the performance of the client adapter and other devices on the wireless network. ACU diagnostic tools perform the following functions:
Display your client adapters current status and configured settings
Display statistics pertaining to your client adapters transmission and reception of data
Display a graphical image of your client adapters RF link
Run an RF link test to assess the performance of the RF link between your client adapter and its associated access point Table 7-1 enables you to quickly locate instructions for using each of the diagnostic tools. Table 7-1 Locating Diagnostic Instructions Diagnostic Tool Status Statistics Link status meter RF link test Page Number 7-4 7-11 7-16 7-17 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 7-2 OL-1394-06 Chapter 7 Performing Diagnostics Setting Parameters that Affect ACU Diagnostic Tools Setting Parameters that Affect ACU Diagnostic Tools Several parameters affect the operation of ACU diagnostic tools. Follow the steps below to set these parameters. Step 1 Step 2 Open ACU. Click the Preferences icon or select Preferences from the Options drop-down menu. The Aironet Client Utility Preferences screen appears (see Figure 7-1). Figure 7-1 Aironet Client Utility Preferences Screen OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 7-3 Viewing the Current Status of Your Client Adapter Chapter 7 Performing Diagnostics Step 3 Table 7-2 lists and describes the parameters that affect the operation of ACU diagnostic tools. Follow the instructions in the table to change any parameters. Table 7-2 Parameters Affecting ACU Diagnostic Tools Parameter Screen Update Timer
(seconds between updates) Description Specifies how often the Status and Statistics screens are updated. You can type a number in the edit box or use the slider to change this value. Range:
Default: 1 second between updates 1 to 60 seconds between updates (in 1-second increments) Signal Strength Display Units Specifies the units used to display signal strength on the Status, Linktest, and Site Survey screens. Default: Percent Show History Units Percent dBm Description Displays the signal strength as a percentage. Displays the signal strength in decibels with respect to milliwatts. Checking this check box causes the Link Status Meter graphical display to show a recent history of the RF performance between your client adapter and its associated access point. Black dots on the graphical display show the performance of the last 50 signals. Default: Checked Step 4 Click OK to save your changes. Viewing the Current Status of Your Client Adapter ACU enables you to view the current status of your client adapter as well as many of the settings that have been configured for the adapter. To view your client adapters status and settings, open ACU; then click the Status icon or select Status from the Commands drop-down menu. The Status screen appears. Figure 7-2 shows the Status screen with the signal strength values displayed as percentages, and Figure 7-3 shows the bottom of the same screen with the signal strength values displayed in decibels with respect to milliwatts (dBm). Note The name of the current profile appears in parentheses at the top of the screen. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 7-4 OL-1394-06 Chapter 7 Performing Diagnostics Viewing the Current Status of Your Client Adapter Figure 7-2 Status Screen (with Signal Strength as a Percentage) Figure 7-3 Bottom of Status Screen (with Signal Strength in dBm) OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 7-5 Viewing the Current Status of Your Client Adapter Chapter 7 Performing Diagnostics Table 7-3 interprets each element of the Status screen. Table 7-3 Client Adapter Status Status Device Serial Number Description A description of your client adapter. The serial number of your client adapter. Manufacturer Firmware Version Boot Block Version NDIS Driver Version Default Profile Note The serial number appears only if the number has been programmed into your card. The manufacturer of your client adapter. The version of the firmware that is currently running on your client adapter. The version of the boot block firmware that is currently in your client adapter. The boot block firmware contains identification information for the client adapter and functions to start up the radio and pass control to the main firmware, which (unlike the boot block) can be modified and upgraded by the user. The version of the NDIS device driver that is currently installed on your computer. The network configuration (or profile) shown in the Use Selected Profile drop-down box on the Profile Manager screen. This is the profile that you have selected as the active profile. Note The current profile may be different than the default profile if you are using auto profile selection. The client adapter will not switch profiles as long as it remains associated to the access point or reassociates within 10 seconds (or within the time specified by the LEAP authentication timeout value if LEAP is enabled). Refer to Chapter 4 for information on creating and using profiles. Current Profile The network configuration (or profile) your client adapter is currently using. Using Short Radio Headers Note The current profile may be different than the default profile if you are using auto profile selection. The client adapter does not switch profiles as long as it remains associated to the access point or reassociates within 10 seconds (or within the time specified by the LEAP authentication timeout value if LEAP is enabled). Refer to Chapter 4 for information on creating and using profiles. Note If your current profile becomes disabled due to an invalid LEAP username and password, this field lists the profile as Disabled. Indicates whether your client adapter is actually using short radio headers. Value: Yes or No Note This setting appears only for 2.4-GHz client adapters. Note Refer to the Use Short Radio Headers parameter in Table 5-3 for information on using short radio headers. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 7-6 OL-1394-06 Chapter 7 Performing Diagnostics Viewing the Current Status of Your Client Adapter Table 7-3 Client Adapter Status (continued) Status Using Message Integrity Check Description Indicates whether your client adapter is using message integrity check
(MIC) to protect packets sent to and received from the access point. Server Based Authentication MIC prevents bit-flip attacks on encrypted packets. During a bit-flip attack, an intruder intercepts an encrypted message, alters it slightly, and retransmits it, and the receiver accepts the retransmitted message as legitimate. Note MIC is supported automatically by the client adapters driver, but it must be enabled on the access point. Value: Yes or No Indicates the configuration of the access point to which your client adapter is associated. Value: None, WEP Key In Use, Cell Is Secure, or LEAP Authenticated Server Based Authentication None WEP Key In Use Cell Is Secure LEAP Authenticated Description The access point is configured for No Encryption. The access point is configured for Optional encryption. The access point is configured for Full Encryption. Note If the clients current profile does not have Allow Association to Mixed Cells enabled, the client can associate only to access points that use full encryption. The client is using LEAP and is authenticated to an access point that has WEP and Network-EAP enabled. WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) Your client adapters current WEP status. Value:
Enabled, Not Enabled, or Need Firmware Upgrade Authentication Type Note Refer to the Setting Network Security Parameters section on page 5-20 for information on enabling WEP. Indicates whether the client adapter must share the same WEP keys as the access point in order to communicate or can communicate with the access point regardless of its WEP settings. Value: Open or Shared Key Note Refer to the Setting Network Security Parameters section on page 5-20 for information on setting the authentication type. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 7-7 Viewing the Current Status of Your Client Adapter Chapter 7 Performing Diagnostics Table 7-3 Client Adapter Status (continued) Status Antenna Selection Channel Set Description The antenna mode that your client adapter is currently using. Value: Diversity, Primary Only, Secondary Only
(Primary Only is the only option available for PCI client adapters) Note This setting appears only for 2.4-GHz client adapters. Note The Primary Only and Secondary Only values were formerly named Right Only and Left Only, respectively. Refer to the Antenna Mode (Receive) and Antenna Mode (Transmit) parameters in Table 5-4 and Table 5-5 for information on setting the antenna mode. The regulatory domain for which your client adapter is currently configured, such as Americas. (For the Japan channel set, the Call ID is also displayed.) This value is not user selectable. Note Refer to Appendix D for a list of channel identifiers, channel center frequencies, and regulatory domains for each channel. Client Name The name your client adapter uses when it associates to an access point. Note Refer to the Client Name parameter in Table 5-2 for information on setting the client name. MAC Address IP Address Current Link Speed Data Rate Current Power Level The MAC address assigned to your client adapter at the factory. The IP address of your client adapter. The rate at which your client adapter is currently transmitting data packets. Value:
1, 2, 5.5, or 11 Mbps (2.4-GHz client adapters);
6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, or 54 Mbps (5-GHz client adapters) The rate at which your client adapter has been configured to transmit or receive data packets. Value:
1 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 11 Mbps, or Auto Rate Selection
(2.4-GHz client adapters);
6 Mbps, 9 Mbps, 12 Mbps, 18 Mbps, 24 Mbps, 36 Mbps, 48 Mbps, 54 Mbps, or Auto Rate Selection (5-GHz client adapters) Note Refer to the Data Rate parameter in Table 5-3 for information on setting the client adapters data rate. The power level at which your client adapter is currently transmitting. The maximum level is dependent upon the radio installed in your client adapter and your countrys regulatory agency. Value:
1, 5, 15, or 30 mW (340 series client adapters);
1, 5, 20, 30, 50, or 100 mW (350 series client adapters);
5, 10, or 20 mW (5-GHz client adapters) Note Refer to the Transmit Power parameter in Table 5-3 for information on setting the client adapters power level. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 7-8 OL-1394-06 Chapter 7 Performing Diagnostics Viewing the Current Status of Your Client Adapter Table 7-3 Client Adapter Status (continued) Status Available Power Levels Channel (Frequency) Status SSID Network Type Power Save Mode Associated Access Point Name Associated Access Point IP Address Description The power levels at which your client adapter is capable of transmitting. The maximum level is dependent upon the radio installed in your client adapter and your countrys regulatory agency. Value:
1, 5, 15, or 30 mW (340 series client adapters);
1, 5, 20, 30, 50, or 100 mW (350 series client adapters);
5, 10, or 20 mW (5-GHz client adapters) Note Refer to the Transmit Power parameter in Table 5-3 for information on the client adapters available power levels. The frequency that your client adapter is currently using as the channel for communications. Value: Dependent on client adapter radio and regulatory domain Note Refer to the Channel parameter in Table 5-3 for information on selecting the frequency for your client adapter. The operational mode of your client adapter. Value:
Error, Not Associated, Associated, Authenticating, Authenticated, Authentication Failed, or Ad Hoc Mode The name of the network to which your client adapter is currently associated. Note Refer to the SSID1 parameter in Table 5-2 for information on the client adapters SSID. The type of network in which your client adapter is being used. Value:
Infrastructure or Ad Hoc Note Refer to the Network Type parameter in Table 5-2 for information on setting the network type. The client adapters current power consumption setting. Value:
CAM, Max PSP, or Fast PSP Note Refer to the Power Save Mode parameter in Table 5-2 for information on setting the client adapters power save mode. The name of the access point to which your client adapter is associated. It is shown only if the client adapter is in infrastructure mode, the access point was configured with a name, and Aironet Extensions are enabled (on access points running Cisco IOS release 12.2(4)JA or greater). The IP address of the access point to which your client adapter is associated. It is shown only if the client adapter is in infrastructure mode, the access point was configured with an IP address, and Aironet Extensions are enabled (on access points running Cisco IOS release 12.2(4)JA or greater). Note If Aironet Extensions are disabled, the IP address of the associated access point is shown as 0.0.0.0. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 7-9 Viewing the Current Status of Your Client Adapter Chapter 7 Performing Diagnostics Table 7-3 Client Adapter Status (continued) Status Associated Access Point MAC Address Beacon Period Up Time (hh:mm:ss) Current Signal Strength Current Signal Quality
(2.4-GHz client adapters) Current Noise Level
(2.4-GHz client adapters) Description The MAC address of the access point to which your client adapter is associated. It is shown only if the client adapter is in infrastructure mode. Note This field displays the MAC address of the access points Ethernet port (for access points that do not run Cisco IOS) or the MAC address of the access points radio (for access points that run Cisco IOS). The MAC address of the Ethernet port on access points that run Cisco IOS is printed on a label on the back of the device. Specifies the duration between beacon packets, which are used to help clients find each other in ad hoc mode. Range: Approximately 20 to 999 milliseconds (ms) Note The beacon period is shown only if your client adapter is in ad hoc mode. The amount of time (in hours:minutes:seconds) that the client adapter has been receiving power. If the adapter has been running for more than 24 hours, the time is displayed in days, hours:minutes:seconds. The signal strength for all received packets. The higher the value and the more green the bar graph is, the stronger the signal. Range:
The signal quality for all received packets. The higher the value and the more green the bar graph is, the clearer the signal. Range:
0 to 100% or 95 to 45 dBm 0 to 100%
Note This setting appears only for 2.4-GHz client adapters and only if you selected signal strength to be displayed as a percentage. See the Signal Strength Display Units parameter in Table 7-2 for information. The level of background radio frequency energy in the 2.4-GHz band. The lower the value and the more green the bar graph is, the less background noise present. Range:
100 to 45 dBm Note This setting appears only for 2.4-GHz client adapters and only if you selected signal strength to be displayed in dBm. See the Signal Strength Display Units parameter in Table 7-2 for information. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 7-10 OL-1394-06 Chapter 7 Performing Diagnostics Viewing Statistics for Your Client Adapter Table 7-3 Client Adapter Status (continued) Status Current Beacons Received
(5-GHz client adapters) Overall Link Quality Signal to Noise Ratio
(2.4-GHz client adapters) Description The percentage of beacon packets received versus those expected to be received. The higher the value and the more green the bar graph is, the clearer the signal. Example: The access point sends out 10 beacons per second, so you would expect the client adapter to receive 50 beacon packets in 5 seconds. If it receives only 40 packets, the percentage of beacons received would be 80%. Range:
0 to 100%
This setting appears only for 5-GHz client adapters. Note The client adapters ability to communicate with the access point, which is determined by the combined result of the adapters signal strength and signal quality. Value: Not Associated, Poor, Fair, Good, or Excellent Note This setting appears for 2.4-GHz client adapters (but only if you selected signal strength to be displayed as a percentage) and for 5-GHz client adapters. See the Signal Strength Display Units parameter in Table 7-2 for information. The difference between the signal strength and the current noise level. The higher the value, the better the client adapters ability to communicate with the access point. Range:
0 to 90 dB Note This setting appears only for 2.4-GHz client adapters and only if you selected signal strength to be displayed in dBm. See the Signal Strength Display Units parameter in Table 7-2 for information. Viewing Statistics for Your Client Adapter ACU enables you to view statistics that indicate how data is being received and transmitted by your client adapter. To view your client adapters statistics, open ACU; then click the Statistics icon or select Statistics from the Commands drop-down menu. The Statistics screen appears (see Figure 7-4). Note The name of the current profile appears in parentheses at the top of the screen. Note The receive and transmit statistics are host statistics. That is, they show packets and errors received or sent by the Windows device. Link status tests from the access point or site survey tool are performed at the firmware level; therefore, they have no effect on the statistics shown in the Statistics screen. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 7-11 Viewing Statistics for Your Client Adapter Chapter 7 Performing Diagnostics Figure 7-4 Statistics Screen The statistics are calculated as soon as your client adapter is started or the Reset button is selected and are continually updated at the rate specified by the Screen Update Timer. Instructions for changing the Screen Update Timer setting are provided in Table 7-2. Table 7-4 describes each statistic that is displayed for your client adapter. Table 7-4 Client Adapter Statistics Statistic Receive Statistics Multicast Packets Received Broadcast Packets Received Unicast Packets Received Bytes Received Beacons Received Total Packets Received OK Duplicate Packets Received Description The number of multicast packets that were received successfully. The number of broadcast packets that were received successfully. The number of unicast packets that were received successfully. The number of bytes of data that were received successfully. The number of beacon packets that were received successfully. The number of all packets that were received successfully. The number of duplicate packets that were received successfully. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 7-12 OL-1394-06 Chapter 7 Performing Diagnostics Viewing Statistics for Your Client Adapter Table 7-4 Client Adapter Statistics (continued) Statistic Overrun Errors PLCP CRC Errors PLCP Format Errors PLCP Length Errors MAC CRC Errors Partial Packets Received SSID Mismatches AP Mismatches Data Rate Mismatches Authentication Rejects Description The number of packets received when no receive buffers were available. These errors usually occur when the host does not read the received packets from the client adapter fast enough. The number of times the client adapter started to receive an 802.11 physical layer convergence protocol (PLCP) header but the rest of the packet was ignored due to a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) error in the header. Note CRC errors can be attributed to packet collisions caused by a dense population of client adapters, overlapping access point coverage on a channel, high multipath conditions from bounced signals, or the presence of other 2.4-GHz signals from devices such as microwave ovens, wireless handset phones, etc. The number of times an 802.11 PLCP header was received with a valid CRC but the rest of the packet was ignored due to an unknown value in the header. The number of times an 802.11 PLCP header was received but the rest of the packet was ignored due to an illegal header length. The number of packets that had a valid 802.11 PLCP header but contained a CRC error in the data portion of the packet. Note CRC errors can be attributed to packet collisions caused by a dense population of client adapters, overlapping access point coverage on a channel, high multipath conditions from bounced signals, or the presence of other 2.4-GHz signals from devices such as microwave ovens, wireless handset phones, etc. The number of fragments that were discarded because the entire packet was not received successfully. The number of times the client adapter tried to associate to an access point but was unable to because the adapters SSID was not the same as the access points. The number of times the client adapter tried to associate to an access point but was unable to because the access point was not the adapters specified access point. Note Refer to the Specified Access Point 1- 4 parameter in Table 5-4 for information on specifying access points. The number of times the client adapter tried to associate to an access point but was unable to because the adapters data rate was not supported by the access point. Note Refer to the Data Rate parameter in Table 5-3 for information on supported data rates. The number of times the client adapter tried to authenticate to an access point but was rejected. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 7-13 Viewing Statistics for Your Client Adapter Chapter 7 Performing Diagnostics Table 7-4 Client Adapter Statistics (continued) Statistic Authentication Time-out Association Rejects Association Time-out Packets Aged Packets MIC OK Packets No MIC Packets Incorrect MIC Packets No MIC Seed Packets Wrong MIC Sequence Up Time (hh:mm:ss) Total Up Time (hh:mm:ss) Description The number of times the client adapter tried to authenticate to an access point but was unable to because the access point did not respond fast enough (timed out). The number of times the client adapter tried to associate to an access point but was rejected. The number of times the client adapter tried to associate to an access point but was unable to because the access point did not respond fast enough (timed out). The number of packets received successfully but discarded by the client adapter because either all fragments were not received within 10 seconds or the host did not read the packet from the adapter within 10 seconds. The number of packets that were received successfully with a valid message integrity check (MIC). Note This field is not displayed if MIC is not enabled on the access point. The number of packets that were discarded due to no MIC being found. Note This field is not displayed if MIC is not enabled on the access point. The number of packets that were discarded due to an incorrect MIC value. Note This field is not displayed if MIC is not enabled on the access point. The number of packets that were discarded due to no MIC seed being received. Note This field is not displayed if MIC is not enabled on the access point. The number of packets that were discarded due to the MIC sequence number being wrong. Note This field is not displayed if MIC is not enabled on the access point. The amount of time (in hours:minutes:seconds) since the Reset button was selected. If the client adapter has been running for more than 24 hours, the time is displayed in days, hours:minutes:seconds. The amount of time (in hours:minutes:seconds) that the client adapter has been receiving power. The total up time continues to increment even if the Reset button is selected. If the adapter has been running for more than 24 hours, the time is displayed in days, hours:minutes:seconds. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 7-14 OL-1394-06 Chapter 7 Performing Diagnostics Viewing Statistics for Your Client Adapter Table 7-4 Client Adapter Statistics (continued) Statistic Transmit Statistics Multicast Packets Transmitted Broadcast Packets Transmitted Unicast Packets Transmitted Bytes Transmitted Beacons Transmitted Ack Packets Transmitted RTS Packets Transmitted CTS Packets Transmitted Single Collisions Multiple Collisions Packets No Deferral Packets Deferred Protocol Packets Deferred Energy Detect Packets Retry Long Packets Retry Short Packets Max Retries Packets Ack Received Packets No Ack Received Packets CTS Received Description The number of multicast packets that were transmitted successfully. The number of broadcast packets that were transmitted successfully. The number of unicast packets that were transmitted successfully. The number of bytes of data that were transmitted successfully. The number of beacon packets that were transmitted successfully
(in ad hoc mode only). The number of acknowledgment (Ack) packets that were transmitted in response to successfully received unicast packets. The number of request-to-send (RTS) packets that were transmitted successfully. The number of clear-to-send (CTS) packets that were transmitted in response to a successfully received RTS packet. The number of packets that had to be retransmitted once due to a collision. The number of packets that had to be retransmitted more than once due to additional collisions. The number of packets that were able to be transmitted immediately without being delayed due to energy detect or protocol deferral. The number of packets that were delayed due to 802.11 protocol reasons (such as not enough time left to send the packet). The number of packets that were delayed because RF energy was already detected. This condition is usually caused by another radio transmitting a packet or by some other RF source jamming the signal (such as a microwave oven). The number of normal data packets that were retransmitted. The number of request-to-send (RTS) packets that were retransmitted. The number of packets that failed to be transmitted successfully after exhausting the maximum number of retries. The number of transmitted packets that had their corresponding acknowledgment (Ack) packet received successfully. The number of transmitted packets that did not have their corresponding Ack packet received successfully. The number of clear-to-send (CTS) packets that were received in response to an RTS packet. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 7-15 Viewing the Link Status Meter Chapter 7 Performing Diagnostics Table 7-4 Client Adapter Statistics (continued) Statistic Packets No CTS Received Packets Aged Description The number of packets for which no CTS packet was received in response to an RTS packet. The number of packets that were discarded by the client adapter because they were not transmitted successfully within 5 seconds. Viewing the Link Status Meter ACUs link status meter can be used to assess the performance of your client adapters RF link. If this tool is used to assess the RF link at various locations, you can avoid areas where performance is weak and eliminate the risk of losing the connection between your client adapter and an access point. To open the link status meter, open ACU; then click the Link Status Meter icon or select Link Status Meter from the Commands drop-down menu. The Link Status Meter screen appears (see Figure 7-5). Note The name of the current profile appears in parentheses at the top of the screen. Figure 7-5 Link Status Meter Screen Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 7-16 OL-1394-06 Chapter 7 Performing Diagnostics Running an RF Link Test The Link Status Meter screen provides a graphical display of the following:
Signal strengthThe strength of the client adapters radio signal at the time packets are being received. It is displayed as a percentage along the vertical axis.
Signal qualityThe quality of the client adapters radio signal at the time packets are being received. It is displayed as a percentage along the horizontal axis. The combined result of the signal strength and signal quality is represented by a diagonal line (see Figure 7-5). Where the line falls on the graphical display determines whether the RF link between your client adapter and its associated access point is poor, fair, good, or excellent. The name, IP address, and MAC address of the access point that is associated to your client adapter are indicated at the bottom of the display. The access point name and IP address are shown only if the client adapter is in infrastructure mode, the access point was configured with a name and an IP address, and Aironet Extensions are enabled (on access points running Cisco IOS release 12.2(4)JA or greater). The access point MAC address is shown only if the client adapter is in infrastructure mode. This field displays the MAC address of the access points Ethernet port (for access points that do not run Cisco IOS) or the MAC address of the access points radio (for access points that run Cisco IOS). The MAC address of the Ethernet port on access points that run Cisco IOS is printed on a label on the back of the device. Note Note Note ACUs Status screen also shows signal strength and signal quality. However on the Status screen, these data are represented by histograms. If you want to see a recent history of the RF performance between your client adapter and its associated access point, check the Show History check box on the Aironet Client Utility Preferences screen. Black dots on the graphical display show the performance of the last 50 signals. Running an RF Link Test ACUs link test tool sends out pings to assess the performance of the RF link. The test is designed to be performed multiple times at various locations throughout your area and is run at the data rate set on ACUs RF Network Properties screen (see the Data Rate parameter in Table 5-3). The results of the link test can be used to determine RF network coverage and ultimately the required number and placement of access points in your network. The test also helps you to avoid areas where performance is weak, thereby eliminating the risk of losing the connection between your client adapter and its associated access point. Because the link test operates above the RF level, it does more than test the RF link between two network devices. It also checks the status of wired sections of the network and verifies that TCP/IP and the proper drivers have been loaded. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 7-17 Running an RF Link Test Chapter 7 Performing Diagnostics The following prerequisites are required before you can run an RF link test:
The TCP/IP protocol must be installed on your system. Note See the Help section of your Windows operating system for information on installing and setting up TCP/IP.
An IP address must be configured for the access point (or other computer in ad hoc mode). Follow the steps below to run an RF link test. Step 1 Open ACU; then click the Link Test icon or select Linktest from the Commands drop-down menu. The Linktest screen appears (see Figure 7-6). Note The name of the current profile appears in parentheses at the top of the screen. Figure 7-6 Linktest Screen Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 7-18 OL-1394-06 Chapter 7 Performing Diagnostics Running an RF Link Test Step 2 Step 3 In the IP Address of Access Point field, enter the IP address of the access point or other wireless device with which you want to test the RF link. You can set the link test to run until it has attempted to send a specific number of packets or to run until you stop it. Follow one of the steps below to determine how long the link test will run:
Select the number of packets that the link test should attempt to send. You can type a number in the Number of Packets field or use the slider to select this value. (The Number of Packets parameter is ignored if the Continuous Linktest check box is checked.) Range: 1 to 1000 Default: 4
Check the Continuous Linktest check box to allow the link test to run continuously. Default: Unchecked Step 4 Select the size of the data packet that is to be sent to the access point. You can type a number in the Packet Size field or use the slider to select this value. Range:
Default: 100 64 to 2048 Note The Windows TCP/IP stack fragments (splits up) packets that are greater than 512 bytes. Therefore, the number of transmitted packets does not match the number of received packets
(even if none are lost) if the packet size is greater than 512 bytes. Step 5 Click the Start button to run the link test. While the test is running, statistics are displayed and updated periodically. Figure 7-7 shows the Linktest screen with the signal strength values displayed as percentages, and Figure 7-8 shows the bottom of the same screen with the signal strength values displayed in dBm. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 7-19 Running an RF Link Test Chapter 7 Performing Diagnostics Figure 7-7 Linktest Screen (with Test Running and Signal Strength as a Percentage) Figure 7-8 Bottom of Linktest Screen (with Test Running and Signal Strength in dBm) Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 7-20 OL-1394-06 Chapter 7 Performing Diagnostics Running an RF Link Test Table 7-5 interprets the statistics that are displayed on the Linktest screen while the link test is running. Table 7-5 Linktest Statistics Linktest Statistic Packets Received OK Packets Transmitted OK Status Current Link Speed Associated Access Point Name Associated Access Point MAC Address Current Signal Strength Current Signal Quality
(2.4-GHz client adapters) Description The number of packets of the specified size that have been received successfully. The number of packets of the specified size that have been transmitted successfully. The operational mode of your client adapter. Value:
Error, Configured, Associated, Not Associated, or Ad Hoc Mode The rate at which your client adapter is currently transmitting data packets. Value:
1, 2, 5.5, or 11 Mbps (2.4-GHz client adapters);
6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, or 54 Mbps (5-GHz client adapters) The name of the access point to which your client adapter is associated. It is shown only if the client adapter is in infrastructure mode, the access point was configured with a name, and Aironet Extensions are enabled (on access points running Cisco IOS release 12.2(4)JA or greater). The MAC address of the access point to which your client adapter is associated. It is shown only if the client adapter is in infrastructure mode. Note This field displays the MAC address of the access points Ethernet port (for access points that do not run Cisco IOS) or the MAC address of the access points radio (for access points that run Cisco IOS). The MAC address of the Ethernet port on access points that run Cisco IOS is printed on a label on the back of the device. 0 to 100% or 95 to 45 dBm The signal strength for all received packets. The higher the value and the more green the bar graph is, the stronger the signal. Range:
The signal quality for all received packets. The higher the value and the more green the bar graph is, the clearer the signal. Range:
0 to 100%
Note This setting appears only for 2.4-GHz client adapters and only if you selected signal strength to be displayed as a percentage. See the Signal Strength Display Units parameter in Table 7-2 for information. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 7-21 Running an RF Link Test Chapter 7 Performing Diagnostics Table 7-5 Linktest Statistics (continued) Linktest Statistic Current Noise Level
(2.4-GHz client adapters) Current Beacons Received
(5-GHz client adapters) Overall Link Quality Signal to Noise Ratio
(2.4-GHz client adapters) Description The level of background radio frequency energy in the 2.4-GHz band. The lower the value and the more green the bar graph is, the less background noise present. Range:
100 to 45 dBm Note This setting appears only for 2.4-GHz client adapters and only if you selected signal strength to be displayed in dBm. See the Signal Strength Display Units parameter in Table 7-2 for information. The percentage of beacon packets received versus those expected to be received. The higher the value and the more green the bar graph is, the clearer the signal. Example: The access point sends out 10 beacons per second, so you would expect the client adapter to receive 50 beacon packets in 5 seconds. If it receives only 40 packets, the percentage of beacons received would be 80%. Range:
0 to 100%
This setting appears only for 5-GHz client adapters. Note The client adapters ability to communicate with the access point, which is determined by the combined result of the adapters signal strength and signal quality. Value: Not Associated, Poor, Fair, Good, or Excellent Note This setting appears for 2.4-GHz client adapters (but only if you selected signal strength to be displayed as a percentage) and for 5-GHz client adapters. See the Signal Strength Display Units parameter in Table 7-2 for information. The difference between the signal strength and the current noise level. The higher the value, the better the client adapters ability to communicate with the access point. Range:
0 to 90 dB Note This setting appears only for 2.4-GHz client adapters and only if you selected signal strength to be displayed in dBm. See the Signal Strength Display Units parameter in Table 7-2 for information. Step 6 If you did not set the link test to run continuously, the test ends after the specified number of packets is sent, and the Stop button changes back to the Start button. To stop the link test at any time, click Stop, OK, or Cancel. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 7-22 OL-1394-06 C H A P T E R 8 Using the Aironet Client Monitor (ACM) This chapter explains how to use the Aironet Client Monitor (ACM) to access status information about your client adapter and perform basic tasks. The following topics are covered in this chapter:
Overview of ACM, page 8-2
The ACM Icon, page 8-2
Tool Tip Window, page 8-3
Pop-Up Menu, page 8-5 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 8-1 Overview of ACM Overview of ACM Chapter 8 Using the Aironet Client Monitor (ACM) ACM is an optional application that provides a small subset of the features available through ACU. Specifically, it enables you to access status information about your client adapter and perform basic tasks. ACM is accessible from an icon in the Windows system tray, making it easily accessible and convenient to use. The ACM icon appears only if a client adapter is installed in your computer and you did not disable ACM during installation. If more than one client adapter is installed, an ACM icon appears in the system tray for each adapter. ACM provides information and options in the following ways:
In the appearance of the icon itself
Through a tool tip window that appears when you hover the cursor over the icon
Through a pop-up menu that appears when you right-click the icon The ACM Icon The appearance of the ACM icon indicates the connection status of your client adapter. ACM reads the client adapter status and updates the icon every 2 seconds. Table 8-1 interprets the different appearances of the ACM icon. Note Windows 98, 98 SE, 2000, and XP may display their own wireless network connection status icon in the system tray. Cisco recommends that you turn off the Windows icon and use the ACM icon to monitor your wireless connection. Table 8-1 Interpreting the ACM Icon Icon Description The client adapters radio is turned off. The client adapter is not associated to an access point. The client adapter is associated to an access point, but the user is not authenticated. The client adapter is associated to an access point, and the link quality is excellent or good. The client adapter is associated to an access point, and the link quality is fair. The client adapter is associated to an access point, and the link quality is poor. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 8-2 OL-1394-06 Chapter 8 Using the Aironet Client Monitor (ACM) Tool Tip Window Tool Tip Window When you hover the cursor over the ACM icon, the Tool Tip window appears (see Figure 8-1). Figure 8-1 Tool Tip Window This window provides information on the current status of your client adapter. Table 8-2 lists and describes each element of the Tool Tip window. Table 8-2 Tool Tip Window Elements Status Element Active profile SSID Description The network configuration (or profile) that your client adapter is currently using. Note Note If auto profile selection is enabled, the profile name is preceded by the word Auto. If an application other than ACU was used to configure the client adapter, Other Configuration Application appears. The name of the network to which your client adapter is currently associated. Note Refer to the SSID1 parameter in Table 5-2 for information on setting the client adapters SSID. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 8-3 Tool Tip Window Chapter 8 Using the Aironet Client Monitor (ACM) Table 8-2 Tool Tip Window Elements (continued) Status Element Connection status Description The operational mode of your client adapter. Value:
Radio Off, Not Associated, Associated, Authenticating, Authenticated, or Authentication Failed Connection Status Radio Off Not Associated Associated Authenticating Authenticated Authentication Failed Description The client adapters radio is turned off. The client adapter has not established a connection to an access point. The client adapter has established a connection to an access point. The client adapter is associated to an access point, and the authentication process has begun but not yet succeeded. The client adapter is associated to an access point, and the user is authenticated. The client adapter is associated to an access point, but the attempt to authenticate the user has failed. Link quality Link speed Note This status may appear very briefly or not all as the authentication failure may result in the client adapter becoming disassociated, in which case the status reads Not Associated. The client adapters ability to communicate with the access point, which is determined by the combined result of the adapters signal strength and signal quality. Value:
The rate at which your client adapter is currently transmitting data packets. Value:
1, 2, 5.5, or 11 Mbps (2.4-GHz client adapters);
6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, or 54 Mbps (5-GHz client adapters) Excellent, Good, Fair, or Poor Client adapter type Client adapter IP address A description of your client adapter. The IP address of your client adapter. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 8-4 OL-1394-06 Chapter 8 Using the Aironet Client Monitor (ACM) Pop-Up Menu Pop-Up Menu When you right-click the ACM icon, the ACM pop-up menu appears (see Figure 8-2). Figure 8-2 ACM Pop-Up Menu The following sections describe each ACM pop-up menu option. Note If you used the Aironet Client Monitor Preferences screen or your system administrator used an administrative tool to deactivate certain ACM menu options, these options do not appear in the menu and therefore cannot be selected. About When you select this option, the About screen appears (see Figure 8-3). Figure 8-3 ACM About Screen The About screen displays the version number of ACM that your computer is running and enables you to access the online help. To access the online help, click the Help button. An overview of ACM appears. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 8-5 Pop-Up Menu Exit Chapter 8 Using the Aironet Client Monitor (ACM) This option closes ACM for all client adapters. Note To reactivate ACM, use Windows Explorer to find the path where the ACM software is installed. (The default location is C:\Program Files\Cisco Systems\Aironet Client Monitor.) Then double-click ACUMon.exe. Launch Aironet Client Utility This option activates ACU. It is available only if ACU is installed. If more than one ACM icon appears in the Windows system tray, ACU initializes itself to use the client adapter associated with the icon that initiated the launch. Troubleshooting This option activates the Cisco Wireless LAN Adapter Troubleshooting Utility, which enables you to identify and resolve configuration and association problems with your client adapter. Refer to the Using the Troubleshooting Utility section on page 10-4 for detailed instructions on using this utility. Preferences When you select this option, the Aironet Client Monitor Preferences screen appears (see Figure 8-4). Figure 8-4 Aironet Client Monitor Preferences Screen Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 8-6 OL-1394-06 Chapter 8 Using the Aironet Client Monitor (ACM) Pop-Up Menu This screen enables you to determine when ACM runs and to select the options that appear on the ACM pop-up menu. The selections you make apply to every instance of ACM. For example, if you deselect the Troubleshooting option, it will not appear in the pop-up menu for any ACM icon. Follow the steps below to make your selections. Step 1 If you want ACM to run automatically when Windows starts, make sure the Run the program automatically when Windows starts check box is checked. Otherwise, uncheck this check box. Note If you do not select this option and later want to run ACM, you must use Windows Explorer to find the path where the ACM software is installed. (The default location is C:\Program Files\Cisco Systems\Aironet Client Monitor.) Then double-click ACUMon.exe. Step 2 In the Menu Options portion of the screen, make sure the check boxes of all the options that you want to appear in the ACM pop-up menu are checked. Any options that are not checked will not be included in the menu. Note The Preferences option cannot be deselected. It always appears in the ACM pop-up menu. Step 3 Click OK to save your changes. Turn Radio On/Off This option enables you to turn the client adapters radio on or off. Turning the radio off prevents the adapter from transmitting RF energy. You might want to turn off the client adapters radio in the following situations:
You are not transmitting data and want to conserve battery power.
You have EAP-SIM authentication set up to occur transparently (the SIM card is left in the reader and the PIN is stored in the computer), and you do not want to be billed for air time upon entering an area that enables the client to authenticate.
You are using a laptop on an airplane and want to prevent the adapters transmissions from potentially interfering with the operation of certain devices. When the radio is on, it periodically sends out probes even if it is not associated to an access point, as required by the 802.11 specification. Therefore, it is important to turn it off around devices that are susceptible to RF interference. Note Your client adapter is not associated while the radio is off. Note If your client adapters radio is turned off before your computer enters standby or hibernate mode or before you reboot the computer, the radio remains off when the computer resumes. You must turn the radio back on to resume operation. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 8-7 Pop-Up Menu Chapter 8 Using the Aironet Client Monitor (ACM) If the radio is on, select Turn Radio Off to turn off the radio. If the radio is off, select Turn Radio On to turn on the radio. Reauthenticate This option enables you to force your client adapter to try to reauthenticate using the username and password of the current profile. If your client adapter was unable to authenticate using the specified username and password and you have exhausted the retry limit (for example, LEAP tries only once to prevent you from being locked out of the system), the current profile is disabled until you change the username or password, reboot your computer, eject and reinsert the client adapter, or select the Reauthenticate option. Select Profile This option enables you to select the active profile for your client adapter. Note Because EAP-TLS, PEAP, and EAP-SIM authentication are enabled in the operating system, you cannot switch between these authentication types simply by switching profiles in ACM. You can select a profile in ACM that uses host-based EAP, but you must enable the specific authentication type in Windows
(provided Windows is using the Microsoft 802.1X supplicant). In addition, Windows can be set for only one authentication type at a time; therefore, if more than one profile in ACM uses host-based EAP and you want to use another authentication type, you must change authentication types in Windows after switching profiles in ACM. When you select Select Profile from the ACM pop-up menu, a profiles submenu appears (see Figure 8-5). Figure 8-5 Profiles Submenu From this menu, you can choose among the following options:
Use Other Configuration ApplicationEnables an application other than ACU to configure the client adapter. Examples of such applications include Windows XP and Boingo.
Use Auto Profile SelectionCauses the client adapters driver to automatically select a profile from the list of profiles that were set up in ACU to be included in auto profile selection. If the client adapter loses association for more than 10 seconds (or for more than the time specified by the LEAP authentication timeout value on the LEAP Settings screen if LEAP is enabled), the driver switches automatically to another profile that is included in auto profile selection. The adapter Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 8-8 OL-1394-06 Chapter 8 Using the Aironet Client Monitor (ACM) Pop-Up Menu will not switch profiles as long as it remains associated or reassociates within 10 seconds (or within the time specified by the LEAP authentication timeout value). To force the client adapter to associate to a different access point, you must select a new profile. Note This option is available only if two or more profiles are included in auto profile selection. Note Login scripts are not reliable if you use auto profile selection with LEAP. If you LEAP authenticate and achieve full network connectivity before or at the same time as you log into the computer, the login scripts will run. However, if you LEAP authenticate and achieve full network connectivity after you log into the computer, the login scripts will not run.
A specific profileWhen you select a profile from the list of available profiles, the client adapter attempts to establish a connection to an access point using the parameters that were configured for that profile. If the client adapter cannot associate to the access point or loses association while using the selected profile, the adapter does not attempt to associate using another profile. To associate, you must select a different profile or select Use Auto Profile Selection. Simply click the desired profile to select it. A check mark appears beside the profile, and the client adapter attempts to establish a connection using the selected profile. Show Connection Status When you select this option, the Connection Status screen appears (see Figure 8-6). Figure 8-6 Connection Status Screen OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 8-9 Pop-Up Menu Chapter 8 Using the Aironet Client Monitor (ACM) This screen provides information on the current status of your client adapter. Table 8-3 interprets each element of the Connection Status screen. Note You can also access the Connection Status screen by double-clicking the ACM icon. Table 8-3 Connection Status Screen Elements Status Element Active Profile Auto Profile Selection Other Configuration Application Connection Status Link Quality Enabled or Disabled Description The network configuration (or profile) that your client adapter is currently using. Indicates whether your client adapter is using auto profile selection. Value:
Indicates whether an application other than ACU is being used to configure your client adapter. Value:
The operational mode of your client adapter. Value:
Radio Off, Not Associated, Associated, Authenticating, Authenticated, or Authentication Failed Enabled or Disabled Connection Status Radio Off Not Associated Associated Authenticating Authenticated Authentication Failed Description The client adapters radio is turned off. The client adapter has not established a connection to an access point. The client adapter has established a connection to an access point. The client adapter is associated to an access point, and the authentication process has begun but not yet succeeded. The client adapter is associated to an access point, and the user is authenticated. The client adapter is associated to an access point, but the attempt to authenticate the user has failed. Note This status may appear very briefly or not all as the authentication failure may result in the client adapter becoming disassociated, in which case the status reads Not Associated. The client adapters ability to communicate with the access point, which is determined by the combined result of the adapters signal strength and signal quality. Value:
Excellent, Good, Fair, or Poor Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 8-10 OL-1394-06 Chapter 8 Using the Aironet Client Monitor (ACM) Pop-Up Menu Table 8-3 Connection Status Screen Elements (continued) Status Element SSID Access Point Name Access Point IP Address Link Speed Description The name of the network to which your client adapter is currently associated. Note Refer to the SSID1 parameter in Table 5-2 for information on setting the client adapters SSID. The name of the access point to which your client adapter is associated. It is shown only if the client adapter is in infrastructure mode, the access point was configured with a name, and Aironet Extensions are enabled (on access points running Cisco IOS release 12.2(4)JA or greater). The IP address of the access point to which your client adapter is associated. It is shown only if the client adapter is in infrastructure mode, the access point was configured with an IP address, and Aironet Extensions are enabled (on access points running Cisco IOS release 12.2(4)JA or greater). Note If Aironet Extensions are disabled, the IP address of the associated access point is shown as 0.0.0.0. The rate at which your client adapter is currently transmitting data packets. Value:
1, 2, 5.5, or 11 Mbps (2.4-GHz client adapters);
6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, or 54 Mbps (5-GHz client adapters) Client Adapter IP Address The IP address of your client adapter. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 8-11 Pop-Up Menu Chapter 8 Using the Aironet Client Monitor (ACM) Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 8-12 OL-1394-06 C H A P T E R 9 Routine Procedures This chapter provides procedures for common tasks related to the client adapter. The following topics are covered in this chapter:
Inserting and Removing a Client Adapter, page 9-2
Client Adapter Software Procedures, page 9-5
Restarting the Client Adapter, page 9-15
Turning Your Client Adapters Radio On or Off, page 9-15
Uninstalling the Microsoft Hot Fix, page 9-16 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 9-1 Inserting and Removing a Client Adapter Chapter 9 Routine Procedures Inserting and Removing a Client Adapter This section provides instructions for inserting and removing PC cards, PC-Cardbus cards, and PCI cards. Instructions are not provided for LM cards and mini PCI cards because they are pre-installed inside computing devices and are not meant to be installed or removed by the user. Caution These procedures and the physical connections they describe apply generally to conventional PC card slots, Cardbus slots, and PCI expansion slots. In cases of custom or nonconventional equipment, be alert to possible differences in PC card slot, Cardbus slot, and PCI expansion slot configurations. Inserting a Client Adapter Follow the instructions in one of the sections below to insert a PC card, PC-Cardbus card, or PCI card into a computing device. Inserting a PC Card or PC-Cardbus Card Step 1 Before you begin, examine the card. One end has a dual-row, 68-pin connector. The card is keyed so it can be inserted only one way into the PC card slot or Cardbus slot. Note The PC card slot or Cardbus slot is on the left or right side of the computer, depending on the model. Step 2 Perform one of the following:
Turn on your computer, let the operating system boot up completely, and follow the remaining steps in this section to insert the card.
Turn off your computer, follow the remaining steps in this section to insert the card, and reboot your computer. Caution Do not force the card into your computers PC card slot or Cardbus slot. Forcing it will damage both the card and the slot. If the card does not insert easily, remove the card and reinsert it. Step 3 Hold the card with the Cisco logo facing up and insert it into the PC card slot or Cardbus slot, applying just enough pressure to make sure it is fully seated (see Figure 9-1). Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 9-2 OL-1394-06 Chapter 9 Routine Procedures Inserting and Removing a Client Adapter Figure 9-1 Inserting a PC Card or PC-Cardbus Card into a Computing Device Note The profiles for PC-Cardbus cards are tied to the slot in which the card is inserted. Therefore, you must always insert your PC-Cardbus card into the same slot or create profiles for both slots. Inserting a PCI Card Step 1 Step 2 Turn off the PC and all its components. Remove the computer cover. Note On most Pentium PCs, PCI expansion slots are white. Refer to your PC documentation for slot identification. Step 3 Remove the screw from the top of the CPU back panel above an empty PCI expansion slot. This screw holds the metal bracket on the back panel. Caution Static electricity can damage your PCI card. Before removing the adapter from the anti-static packaging, discharge static by touching a metal part of a grounded PC. Step 4 Examine the PCI card. The antenna connector and the LEDs face out of your computer and are visible when you put the cover back on. The bottom edge of the card is the connector you will insert into an empty expansion slot in your computer. See Figure 9-2. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 9-3 Inserting and Removing a Client Adapter Chapter 9 Routine Procedures Figure 9-2 Inserting a PCI Card into a PC Antenna connector LEDs Card edge connector Standard 2 dBi dipole antenna 1 2 5 7 4 Step 5 Step 6 Tilt the card to allow the antenna connector and LEDs to slip through the opening in the CPU back panel. Press the card into the empty slot until the connector is firmly seated. Caution Do not force the card into the expansion slot as this could damage both the card and the slot. If the card does not insert easily, remove it and reinsert it. Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Reinstall the screw on the CPU back panel and replace the computer cover. Attach the 2-dBi antenna to the cards antenna connector until it is finger-tight. Do not overtighten. For optimal reception, position the antenna so it is straight up. Step 10 Boot up your PC. Removing a Client Adapter Follow the instructions in one of the sections below to remove a PC card, PC-Cardbus card, or PCI card from a computing device, when necessary. Removing a PC Card or PC-Cardbus Card To remove a PC card or PC-Cardbus card after it is successfully installed and configured (such as when your laptop is to be transported), completely shut down your computer and pull the card directly out of the PC card slot or Cardbus slot. When the card is reinserted and the computer is rebooted, your connection to the network should be re-established. Note If you need to remove your PC card or PC-Cardbus card but do not want to shut down your computer, double-click the Unplug or Eject Hardware icon in the Windows system tray, select the Cisco Aironet client adapter you want to remove under Hardware devices, click Stop, and click OK twice. Then pull the card directly out of the card slot. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 9-4 OL-1394-06 Chapter 9 Routine Procedures Removing a PCI Card Client Adapter Software Procedures Because PCI client adapters are installed inside desktop computers, which are not designed for portable use, you should have little reason to remove the adapter. However, instructions are provided below in case you ever need to remove your PCI card. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Completely shut down your computer. Disconnect the client adapters antenna. Remove the computer cover. Remove the screw from the top of the CPU back panel above the PCI expansion slot that holds your client adapter. Pull up firmly on the client adapter to release it from the slot and carefully tilt the adapter to allow it to clear the opening in the CPU back panel. Step 6 Reinstall the screw on the CPU back panel and replace the computer cover. Client Adapter Software Procedures This section provides instructions for the following procedures:
Finding the Install Wizard version, see below
Upgrading the client adapter software, page 9-6
Uninstalling the client adapter software, page 9-6
Finding the driver version, page 9-7
Firmware procedures, page 9-8
ACU procedures, page 9-12
ACM procedures, page 9-15 Finding the Install Wizard Version Follow the instructions in this section to find the version of the Install Wizard that is currently installed for your client adapter. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Open Windows Explorer. Find the Install Wizard files. Right-click the Setup.exe file. Click Properties. Click the Version tab. The version of the currently installed Install Wizard file is shown in the File version field. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 9-5 Client Adapter Software Procedures Chapter 9 Routine Procedures Upgrading the Client Adapter Software The same procedure that is used to initially install client adapter software can also be used to upgrade to a more recent version. Refer to Chapter 3 for instructions on upgrading your client adapters software. Note The client adapters firmware can also be upgraded through ACU. Refer to the Upgrading the Firmware section on page 9-8 for details. Uninstalling the Client Adapter Software This section provides instructions for uninstalling any Cisco Aironet client adapter drivers, utilities, and security modules that are installed on your computer. Only the client adapters firmware remains installed. This procedure is necessary if you want to remove any installed client adapter software components from your computer or downgrade to previous versions. Note If you want to downgrade to earlier versions of client adapter software, follow the steps below to uninstall the current software components. Then install the older software. Note When you uninstall the client adapter software, any existing profiles are removed. If you want to save your profiles for later use, follow the instructions in Chapter 4 to export your profiles before uninstalling the software components. Note This procedure does not uninstall the PC, LM, or PCI card driver that was bundled with Windows Me and XP. It uninstalls only drivers to which you have upgraded. When you follow the steps below to uninstall an upgraded driver and then eject and reinsert the card, Windows finds the original driver and reinstalls it automatically. Step 1 Perform one of the following:
If you want to remove the client adapter from your computer, shut down your computer, remove the client adapter, and reboot your computer. If you want to leave your client adapter inserted in your computer or if your client adapter is an LM or mini PCI card and cannot be removed, go to Step 2. Step 2 Step 3 Select Start > Run. Browse to the location of the Install Wizard software, select the Setup.exe file, and click Open and OK. The Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapter Installation Wizard screen appears (see Figure 9-3). Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 9-6 OL-1394-06 Chapter 9 Routine Procedures Client Adapter Software Procedures Figure 9-3 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapter Installation Wizard screen Select Uninstall All Components and click Next. Step 4 Step 5 When prompted to confirm your decision, click Yes. The process to uninstall the files begins. You are notified throughout the process as each component is uninstalled. Step 6 When the process completes, you are notified that the system is about to reboot. Close any open applications and click OK. Step 7 If you did not remove the client adapter from your computer, the Found New Hardware Wizard screen appears after your computer reboots. Click Cancel. Note The Found New Hardware Wizard screen does not appear on computers running Windows NT. Step 8 This procedure does not remove the Install Wizard file or its uncompressed files. If you want to remove them from your computer, find the files using Windows Explorer and delete them. Finding the Driver Version Follow the instructions in this section to find the version of the driver that is currently installed for your client adapter. Step 1 Step 2 Open ACU. Click the Status icon or select Status from the Commands drop-down menu. The Status screen displays the current version of your client adapters driver in the NDIS Driver Version field. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 9-7 Chapter 9 Routine Procedures Client Adapter Software Procedures Firmware Procedures This section provides instructions for the following procedures:
Finding the Firmware Version, see below
Upgrading the Firmware, see below
Preventing the Driver from Upgrading the Firmware, page 9-10 Finding the Firmware Version Follow the instructions in this section to find the version of firmware that is currently installed for your client adapter. Step 1 Step 2 Open ACU. Click the Status icon or select Status from the Commands drop-down menu. The Status screen displays the current version of your client adapters firmware in the Firmware Version field. Upgrading the Firmware Caution To minimize the risk of a power failure during the firmware flashing process, which could render your client adapter inoperable, Cisco recommends that your computer be plugged into AC power or have a fully charged battery at the start of flashing. If a power failure does occur, follow the instructions in the Technical Assistance Center section of the Preface to contact TAC for assistance. You can upgrade your client adapters firmware using either the Install Wizard or ACU. If you use the wizard, the firmware loads from the Install Wizard file and is installed along with other software components. If you use ACU, the firmware installs from an image (*.img) file that contains only firmware. Note To ensure compatibility between software components, Cisco recommends that you use the Install Wizard to upgrade the firmware along with the other software components. Using the Install Wizard To upgrade the firmware using the Install Wizard, follow the instructions in the Installing or Upgrading the Client Adapter Software section on page 3-2. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 9-8 OL-1394-06 Chapter 9 Routine Procedures Using ACU Client Adapter Software Procedures Note When you upgrade your client adapters firmware using ACU, the Automatically Load New Firmware When NDIS Driver Is Updated parameter on the Aironet Client Utility Preferences screen becomes disabled (or unchecked) automatically to prevent the newly loaded firmware from being overwritten by the driver. If you ever want to enable this parameter, you must recheck the check box. To upgrade the firmware using ACU, follow the steps below. Step 1 Step 2 Use the computers web browser to access the following URL:
http://www.cisco.com/public/sw-center/sw-wireless.shtml Select Option #2: Aironet Wireless Software Display Tables. Note You can download software from the Software Selector tool instead of the display tables. To do so, select Option #1: Aironet Wireless Software Selector, follow the instructions on the screen, and go to Step 7. Select Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters. Under Individual Files, find the client adapter firmware. Click the link that corresponds to your client adapters model number (such as 340 or 350 series). Select the latest firmware file for your specific client adapter type (such as CB or MPI). Note The firmware for PC, LM, and PCI cards is labeled PCMCIA-LMC-PCI, the firmware for mini PCI cards is labeled mini PCI or MPI, and the firmware for PC-Cardbus cards is labeled CB. Note If your wireless network uses EAP authentication, access points to which your client adapter will attempt to authenticate must use the following firmware versions or greater: 11.23T (340 and 350 series access points), 12.2(4)JA (1100 series access points), or 11.54T (1200 series access points). Read and accept the terms and conditions of the Software License Agreement. Select the firmware file again to download it. Save the file to a floppy disk or to your computers hard drive. Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Find the file using Windows Explorer, double-click it, and extract the image file to a folder. Note To extract the file, click Browse on the WinZip Self-Extractor screen, select the folder in which you want the file to be placed, and click OK and Unzip. After the file is extracted, click OK to close the screen. Step 11 Make sure the client adapter is installed in your computer and is operational. Step 12 Open ACU; click the Load Firmware icon or select Load New Firmware from the Commands drop-down menu. The Load New Firmware screen appears (see Figure 9-4). OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 9-9 Client Adapter Software Procedures Chapter 9 Routine Procedures Figure 9-4 Load New Firmware Screen Step 13 Find the location of the new firmware in the Look in box. Step 14 Click the firmware image file (*.img) so that it appears in the File name box at the bottom of the screen. Step 15 Click the Open button. A progress bar appears while the selected image is loaded into the client adapters Flash memory. Step 16 Click OK when the Firmware Upgrade Complete! message appears. The OK button cannot be selected until the process is complete or an error occurs. If an error occurs, refer to the Error Messages section in Chapter 10. Preventing the Driver from Upgrading the Firmware The Automatically Load New Firmware When NDIS Driver Is Updated parameter on the Aironet Client Utility Preferences screen affects the firmware that is bundled with the driver, not the firmware that is included in the Install Wizard. This parameter controls whether the driver (whenever it loads) installs the firmware with which it is bundled. (The driver loads each time you insert a client adapter or reboot your computer.) Note To complete this procedure, you must have used the Install Wizard to install ACU. Note The Automatically Load New Firmware When NDIS Driver Is Updated parameter is functionally equivalent to the Disable Firmware Checking parameter in the Install Wizard. The parameter that is set last is the one that governs how the driver behaves. Refer to Chapter 3 for additional information. Step 1 Step 2 Open ACU. Click the Preferences icon or select Preferences from the Options drop-down menu. The Aironet Client Utility Preferences screen appears (see Figure 9-5). Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 9-10 OL-1394-06 Chapter 9 Routine Procedures Client Adapter Software Procedures Figure 9-5 Aironet Client Utility Preferences Screen Step 3 If you want to prevent the driver (when it loads) from installing the firmware with which it is bundled, thereby allowing the client adapter to retain its current firmware version, make sure the Automatically Load New Firmware When NDIS Driver Is Updated check box is not checked. Note If you want the driver (when it loads) to install the firmware with which it is bundled if it is newer than the firmware that is currently installed in the client adapter, make sure the Automatically Load New Firmware When NDIS Driver Is Updated check box is checked. Note When you upgrade your client adapters firmware using ACU, the Automatically Load New Firmware When NDIS Driver Is Updated parameter becomes unchecked automatically to prevent the newly loaded firmware from being overwritten by the driver. If you want to enable this parameter, you must recheck the check box. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 9-11 Client Adapter Software Procedures Chapter 9 Routine Procedures Note The Automatically Load New Firmware When NDIS Driver Is Updated parameter is dependent on the radio type (and the Cardbus slot for PC-Cardbus cards). Therefore, if you insert a client adapter of a different card type (such as a 340 instead of a 350) or insert the same PC-Cardbus card into a different slot, whether or not the driver installs the firmware with which it is bundled depends on how this parameter (or the Disable Firmware Checking parameter) was last set for that card type or card slot. Step 4 Click OK. ACU Procedures This section provides instructions for the following procedures:
Opening ACU, below
Exiting ACU, page 9-13
Modifying ACU installation settings, page 9-13
Finding the version of ACU, page 9-13
Adding the ACU icon to or removing it from the desktop, page 9-14
Accessing online help, page 9-14 Opening ACU To open ACU, perform one of the following:
Double-click the Aironet Client Utility (ACU) icon on your desktop.
Select Aironet Client Utility (ACU) from the folder in the Windows Start Menu that you chose during installation [the default location is Start > Program Files > Cisco Systems > Aironet Client Utility (ACU)].
Double-click My Computer > Control Panel > Aironet Client Utility. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 9-12 OL-1394-06 Chapter 9 Routine Procedures Exiting ACU Client Adapter Software Procedures To exit ACU, select Exit from the Commands drop-down menu (see Figure 9-6). Figure 9-6 Commands Drop-Down Menu Modifying ACU Installation Settings If you need to change any of the settings that you selected during installation (for example, placing the ACU icon on the desktop or allowing a saved LEAP username and password), you must run the Install Wizard again and modify the parameter values. Refer to Chapter 3 for instructions. Finding the Version of ACU Follow the instructions in this section to find the version of ACU that is currently installed. Step 1 Step 2 Open ACU. Click the About icon or select the About Aironet Client Utility option from the Help drop-down menu. The About Aironet Client Utility screen appears (see Figure 9-7). OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 9-13 Client Adapter Software Procedures Chapter 9 Routine Procedures Figure 9-7 About Aironet Client Utility Screen Adding the ACU Icon to or Removing it from the Desktop By default, an ACU icon is added to your computers desktop when you install the Install Wizard.
If you wish to remove the ACU icon from the desktop, run the Install Wizard again and set the Place Icon on Desktop parameter to No or right-click the icon, click Delete, and click Yes to confirm your decision. If you want to add the ACU icon to the desktop, set the Place Icon on Desktop parameter to Yes in the Install Wizard. Accessing Online Help To access ACUs online help, open ACU. Then click the Help icon or select Contents from the Help drop-down menu. An overview of ACU appears. From the Overview of the Aironet Client Utility screen, you can access additional information.
To access information on specific menu options, click Contents. Double-click Aironet Client Utility Commands, the desired menu (such as Options Menu), and the desired topic (such as Preferences).
To access information on specific parameters, click Contents. Double-click Configurable Parameters, the client adapter, a parameter category (such as System Parameters), and the desired parameter (such as SSID).
To access information on specific diagnostic topics, click Contents. Double-click Run Time Diagnostic Information, a diagnostic category (such as Running a Linktest), and the desired topic
(such as Packet Size).
To search for a specific topic, click Index, select an index entry, and click Display.
To search for a specific word or phrase, click Contents or Index, click the Find tab, and follow the instructions in the Find Setup Wizard window. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 9-14 OL-1394-06 Chapter 9 Routine Procedures ACM Procedures Refer to Chapter 8 for instructions on using ACM. Restarting the Client Adapter Restarting the Client Adapter ACU enables you to reinitialize (or restart) the client adapter without having to reboot your computer or eject and reinsert the adapter. For instance, if your client adapter is experiencing poor throughput, you might want to restart the client adapter to try to force it to disassociate from the access point to which it is currently associated in the hope that it reassociates to an access point with a stronger signal. Note Restarting the client adapter may cause you to lose your wireless network connection. Follow the steps below to restart the client adapter. Step 1 Step 2 Open ACU. Select the Restart Card option from the Commands drop-down menu (see Figure 9-6). Step 3 When prompted to confirm your decision, click Yes. The driver stops the client adapters radio, writes the configuration (although no parameter settings have been changed), and restarts the radio. The status bar at the bottom of the ACU screen shows the client adapter losing association and then reassociating. Turning Your Client Adapters Radio On or Off Your client adapters radio can be turned on or off. Turning the radio off prevents the adapter from transmitting RF energy. You might want to turn off the client adapters radio in the following situations:
You are not transmitting data and want to conserve battery power.
You have EAP-SIM authentication set up to occur transparently (the SIM card is left in the reader and the PIN is stored in the computer), and you do not want to be billed for air time upon entering an area that enables the client to authenticate.
You are using a laptop on an airplane and want to prevent the adapters transmissions from potentially interfering with the operation of certain devices. When the radio is on, it periodically sends out probes even if it is not associated to an access point, as required by the 802.11 specification. Therefore, it is important to turn it off around devices that are susceptible to RF interference. Note Your client adapter is not associated while its radio is off. Note If your client adapters radio is turned off before your computer enters standby or hibernate mode or before you reboot the computer, the radio remains off when the computer resumes. You must turn the radio back on to resume operation. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 9-15 Uninstalling the Microsoft Hot Fix Chapter 9 Routine Procedures You can use ACU or ACM to turn the client adapters radio on or off. Follow the instructions below to use ACU or refer to the Turn Radio On/Off section on page 8-7 to use ACM. If your client adapters radio is on, open ACU and select Turn Radio Off from the Commands drop-down menu (see Figure 9-6) to turn off the radio. The status bar at the bottom of the ACU screen indicates that the radio is turned off. If your client adapters radio is off, open ACU and select Turn Radio On from the Commands drop-down menu (see Figure 9-6) to turn on the radio. Uninstalling the Microsoft Hot Fix When LEAP is selected during installation on a Windows 98 or 98 SE device, a Microsoft hot fix is also installed to fix two problems related to the use of LEAP. If you ever need to uninstall the hot fix, select Start > Run, enter C:\Windows\Inf\Qfe\W98.se\241052un.inf, and click OK. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 9-16 OL-1394-06 C H A P T E R 10 Troubleshooting This chapter provides information for diagnosing and correcting common problems that may be encountered when installing or operating the client adapter. The following topics are covered in this chapter:
Accessing the Latest Troubleshooting Information, page 10-2
Interpreting the Indicator LEDs, page 10-2
Troubleshooting the Client Adapter, page 10-3
Error Messages, page 10-13 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-1 Accessing the Latest Troubleshooting Information Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Accessing the Latest Troubleshooting Information This chapter provides basic troubleshooting tips for your client adapter. For more up-to-date and complex troubleshooting information, refer to the TAC web site at:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/support/index.html Select Wireless Troubleshooting Center under Tools & Utilities. Interpreting the Indicator LEDs Note Mini PCI cards do not have LEDs. The client adapter shows messages and error conditions through its two LEDs:
Link Integrity/Power LED (green)This LED lights when the client adapter is receiving power and blinks slowly when the adapter is linked with the network.
Link Activity LED (amber)This LED blinks quickly when the client adapter is receiving or transmitting data and blinks in a repeating pattern to indicate an error condition. Table 10-1 interprets the LED messages during normal operation. Table 10-2 interprets the LED error condition messages. Table 10-1 LED Normal Operating Messages Green LED Blinking quickly Amber LED Blinking quickly Blinking slowly Continuously on or blinking slowly Off On continuously Blinking quickly Blinking quickly Blinking quickly Blinking quickly Table 10-2 LED Error Condition Messages Green LED Off Amber LED Off Condition Power is on, self-test is OK, and client adapter is scanning for a network. Client adapter is associated to an access point. Client adapter is transmitting or receiving data while associated to an access point. Client adapter is in power save mode. Client adapter is in ad hoc mode. Condition/Recommended Action Client adapter is not receiving power, or an error has occurred. Off Off 1 blink at 2-second rate RAM failure. Refer to the Obtaining Technical Assistance section in the Preface for technical support information. A configuration error has occurred (for example, static WEP is enabled in ACU, but the client adapter has not been programmed with a valid WEP key). Recheck your client adapters configuration settings. 2-second pause, 2 fast blinks, 1-second pause, 1 blink Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-2 OL-1394-06 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting the Client Adapter Table 10-2 LED Error Condition Messages (continued) Green LED Off Off Off Off Off Amber LED 2 fast blinks, 2-second pause 3 fast blinks, 2-second pause 4 fast blinks, 2-second pause 5 fast blinks, 2-second pause 6 fast blinks, 2-second pause Condition/Recommended Action Flash boot block checksum failure. Refer to the Obtaining Technical Assistance section in the Preface for technical support information. Firmware checksum failure. Reload the firmware. MAC address error (error reading MAC chip). Reload the firmware. Physical layer (PHY) access error. Refer to the Obtaining Technical Assistance section in the Preface for technical support information. Incompatible firmware. Load the correct firmware version. Troubleshooting the Client Adapter This section provides troubleshooting tips should you encounter problems with your client adapter. Use Table 10-3 to quickly locate specific troubleshooting information. Table 10-3 Locating Troubleshooting Information Page Number 10-4 10-7 10-8 10-11 10-11 10-11 10-11 Troubleshooting Information Using the troubleshooting utility Client adapter recognition problems Resolving resource conflicts Problems associating to an access point Problems authenticating to an access point Problems connecting to the network Prioritizing network connections (Windows 2000 and XP only) Losing association upon resuming from suspend mode (Windows NT and mini PCI cards only) Parameters missing from Profile Manager screen 10-12 10-12 Windows Wireless Network Connection icon shows unavailable connection (Windows XP only) LEAP login screen does not appear before Windows login screen (Windows 98, 98 SE, and Me only) Microsoft hot fix (Windows 98 and 98 SE only) 10-13 10-12 10-13 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-3 Troubleshooting the Client Adapter Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Using the Troubleshooting Utility The Cisco Wireless LAN Adapter Troubleshooting Utility enables you to identify and resolve configuration and association problems with your client adapter. It is meant to be used only when the client adapter is in infrastructure mode as it assesses the connection between the adapter and an access point. Follow the instructions in one of the subsections below to use the utility to diagnose your client adapters operation, save a detailed report to a text file, or access online help. Diagnosing Your Client Adapters Operation Step 1 Perform one of the following to activate the troubleshooting utility:
Open ACU; select Troubleshooting from the Options drop-down menu.
Right-click the ACM icon; select Troubleshooting from the pop-up menu. The Cisco Wireless LAN Adapter Troubleshooting screen appears (see Figure 10-1). Figure 10-1 Cisco Wireless LAN Adapter Troubleshooting Screen Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-4 OL-1394-06 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting the Client Adapter Step 2 Click Start. The utility performs the following series of eight tests to check the operation of your client adapter and to pinpoint specific problems if they exist:
1. Checking driver installation 2. Checking client adapter insertion 3. Checking the client adapters radio (to see if it is turned on) 4. Checking the client adapters association to an access point 5. Checking authentication 6. Checking the receive interrupt 7. Checking network settings 8. Checking the client adapters connection to the access point The utility runs until it completes successfully or a problem is discovered. It then displays the results
(see Figure 10-2). Figure 10-2 Cisco Wireless LAN Adapter Troubleshooting Screen (with Test Results) OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-5 Troubleshooting the Client Adapter Chapter 10 Troubleshooting One of the following status messages appears for each test:
GOODThe test completed successfully.
ERRORThe test failed because the client adapter is not configured properly to establish a connection with an access point.
WARNINGThe test failed for one of the following reasons:
The utility is unable to access the clients IP address. Either an incorrect IP address was entered, or an IP address was not received from the DHCP server. Contact your system administrator. The utility is unable to access the access points IP address. Contact your system administrator. The exact cause cannot be determined. Contact your system administrator. Note You can click Stop at any time to stop the testing process, or you can click Restart once the testing process has stopped to run the test again. Note If auto profile selection is enabled but the client adapter is not associated or authenticated, the utility repeats the testing process continually so the client adapter can be tested with new profiles. Step 3 To view more detailed information, click Detailed Report. A report appears that explains the purpose of each test and the results for your client adapter. Note The report contains valuable information that, if necessary, could be used by TAC to analyze any problems. Follow the instructions in the next section if you want to save the report to a text file. Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 If a problem is discovered, the report provides some possible repair suggestions. Follow the repair instructions carefully and run the troubleshooting utility again. Click Close to exit the detailed report. Click Cancel to exit the troubleshooting utility. Saving the Detailed Report to a Text File Follow the steps below to save the detailed troubleshooting report to your computers hard drive. Step 1 Click Save on the detailed report screen. The Save As screen appears. A filename of the following format appears automatically in the File name field: TSyymmddhhmm, where yymmddhhmm represents the date and time that the troubleshooting utility was started. For example, TS0211211230 indicates that the utility was started on 11/21/02 at 12:30. Note You can change the filename by typing a new name in the File name field. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-6 OL-1394-06 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting the Client Adapter Step 2 Use the Save in box at the top of the screen to specify the location on your computers hard drive where the file will be saved. The default location is My Documents. Note If you specify a different location, the new location becomes the default location going forward. Step 3 Click Save. The file is saved as a text file in the location specified. Accessing Online Help Follow the steps below to access general troubleshooting information about your client adapter. Step 1 Step 2 Click Help on the Cisco Wireless LAN Adapter Troubleshooting screen. An overview of the troubleshooting utility appears. Click Help Topics at the top of the screen. From the Help Topics screen, you can access additional information.
To access information on specific topics, double-click Troubleshooting Tips on the Contents page, the desired topic (such as Radio LEDs), and the desired subtopic (such as LED Error Condition Messages).
To search for a specific topic, click the Index tab, select an index entry, and click Display.
To search for a specific word or phrase, click the Find tab, and follow the instructions in the Find Setup Wizard window. Step 3 Click Cancel to exit the Help Topics screen. Client Adapter Recognition Problems Note This section does not apply to mini PCI cards. If your client adapter is not being recognized by your computers PCMCIA adapter, check your computers BIOS and make sure that the PC card controller mode is set to PCIC compatible. Note A computers BIOS varies depending on the manufacturer. For support on BIOS-related issues, consult your computers manufacturer. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-7 Troubleshooting the Client Adapter Resolving Resource Conflicts Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Note This section does not apply to mini PCI cards. If you encounter problems while installing your client adapter on a computer running a Windows operating system, you may need to specify a different interrupt request (IRQ) or I/O range for the adapter. The default IRQ for the client adapter is IRQ 10, which may not work for all systems. Follow the steps for your specific operating system to obtain an available IRQ. During installation the adapters driver installation script scans for an unused I/O range. The installation can fail if the I/O range found by the driver installation script is occupied by another device but not reported by Windows. An I/O range might not be reported if a device is physically present in the system but not enabled under Windows. Follow the steps for your specific operating system to obtain an available I/O range. Resolving Resource Conflicts in Windows 98, 98 SE, and Me Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and System. Click the Device Manager tab. Double-click Network Adapters. Select the Cisco Systems Wireless LAN Adapter. Click the Properties button. In the General screen, the Device Status field indicates if a resource problem exists. If a problem is indicated, click the Resources tab. Uncheck the Use automatic settings check box. Under Resource Settings or Resource Type, click Input/Output Range. Look in the Conflicting Device list at the bottom of the screen. If it indicates that the range is being used by another device, click the Change Setting button. Step 10 Scroll through the ranges in the Value dialog box and select one that does not conflict with another device. The Conflict Information window at the bottom of the screen indicates if the range is already being used. Step 11 Click OK. Step 12 Under Resource Settings or Resource Type, click Interrupt Request. Step 13 Look in the Conflicting Device list at the bottom of the screen. If it indicates that the IRQ is being used by another device, click the Change Setting button. Step 14 Scroll through the IRQs in the Value dialog box and select one that does not conflict with another device. The Conflict Information window at the bottom of the screen indicates if the IRQ is already being used. Step 15 Click OK. Step 16 Reboot your computer. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-8 OL-1394-06 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting the Client Adapter Resolving Resource Conflicts in Windows NT Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Select Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Windows NT Diagnostics. Click the Resources tab. Click the IRQ button. The used IRQs are listed in numerical order along the left side of the Resources window. Write down the number of an IRQ that is not being used; you will need it for Step 11. Click the I/O Port button. The used I/O ranges are listed in numerical order along the left side of the Resources window under Address. Write down an I/O range that is not being used (for example, if range 0100-013F is followed by 0170-0177 in the list, then 0140-0169 is an available range); you will need it for Step 13. Double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and Network. Click the Adapters tab and select the Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Adapter. Click Properties. Select Interrupt under Property. Select the number of the unused interrupt from Step 4 in the Value drop-down box. Select IO Base Address under Property. Select a value that is within the unused range you determined in Step 6. For example, if your unused range is 0140-0169, you could select 0150. Step 14 Click OK. Resolving Resource Conflicts in Windows 2000 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and System. Click the Hardware tab and Device Manager. Double-click Network Adapters and the Cisco Systems Wireless LAN Adapter. In the General screen, the Device Status field indicates if a resource problem exists. If a problem is indicated, click the Resources tab. Uncheck the Use automatic settings check box. Under Resource Settings or Resource Type, click Input/Output Range. Look in the Conflicting Device list at the bottom of the screen. If it indicates that the range is being used by another device, click the Change Setting button. Scroll through the ranges in the Value dialog box and select one that does not conflict with another device. The Conflict Information window at the bottom of the screen indicates if the range is already being used. Click OK. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-9 Troubleshooting the Client Adapter Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Step 10 Under Resource Settings or Resource Type, click Interrupt Request. Step 11 Step 12 Look in the Conflicting Device list at the bottom of the screen. If it indicates that the IRQ is being used by another device, click the Change Setting button. Scroll through the IRQs in the Value dialog box and select one that does not conflict with another device. The Conflict Information window at the bottom of the screen indicates if the IRQ is already being used. Step 13 Click OK. Step 14 Reboot your computer. Resolving Resource Conflicts in Windows XP Note These instructions assume you are using Windows XPs classic view, not its category view. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and System. Click the Hardware tab and Device Manager. Under Network Adapters, double-click the Cisco Systems Wireless LAN Adapter. In the General screen, the Device Status field indicates if a resource problem exists. If a problem is indicated, click the Resources tab. Uncheck the Use automatic settings check box. Under Resource Settings, click I/O Range. Look in the Conflicting Device list at the bottom of the screen. If it indicates that the range is being used by another device, click the Change Setting button. Scroll through the ranges in the Value dialog box and select one that does not conflict with another device. The Conflict Information window at the bottom of the screen indicates if the range is already being used. Click OK. Step 9 Step 10 Under Resource Settings, click IRQ. Step 11 Step 12 Look in the Conflicting Device list at the bottom of the screen. If it indicates that the IRQ is being used by another device, click the Change Setting button. Scroll through the IRQs in the Value dialog box and select one that does not conflict with another device. The Conflict Information window at the bottom of the screen indicates if the IRQ is already being used. Step 13 Click OK. Step 14 Reboot your computer. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-10 OL-1394-06 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting the Client Adapter Problems Associating to an Access Point Follow the instructions below if your client adapter fails to associate to an access point.
If possible, move your workstation a few feet closer to an access point and try again.
Make sure that the client adapter is securely inserted in your computers client adapter slot.
If you are using a PCI client adapter, make sure that the antenna is securely attached.
Make sure that the access point is turned on and operating.
Check that all parameters are set properly for both the client adapter and the access point. These include the SSID, EAP authentication, WEP activation, network type, channel, etc.
Follow the instructions in the previous section to resolve any resource conflicts. If you are using Windows NT, you may also want to try disabling the Ethernet port.
If the client adapter still fails to establish contact, refer to the Obtaining Technical Assistance section in the Preface for technical support information. Problems Authenticating to an Access Point If your client adapter is a 40-bit card and LEAP or EAP is enabled, the adapter can associate but not authenticate to access points using 128-bit encryption. To authenticate to an access point using 128-bit encryption, you have two options:
Purchase a 128-bit client adapter. This is the most secure option.
Disable static WEP for the client adapter and configure the adapter and the access point to associate to mixed cells. This option presents a security risk because your data is not encrypted as it is sent over the RF network. Problems Connecting to the Network After you have installed the appropriate firmware, driver, client utilities, and security modules, contact your IS department if you have a problem connecting to the network. Proxy server, network protocols, and further authentication information might be needed to connect to the network. Prioritizing Network Connections (Windows 2000 and XP Only) If your computer is running Windows 2000 or XP and more than one network adapter is enabled (such as a Cisco Aironet client adapter and an Ethernet card), you can select which one to use by assigning a priority to your network connections. Note This procedure does not apply to Windows 98, 98 SE, NT, and Me because these operating systems allow only one network adapter to be enabled at a time. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-11 Troubleshooting the Client Adapter Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Follow the steps below to prioritize your network connections. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Right-click the My Network Places icon on your desktop. Click Properties. Select the Advanced menu option at the top of the screen. Select Advanced Settings. Your network connections are listed in the Connections box on the Adapters and Bindings tab. Use the arrows beside the Connections box to move the network connection that you want to use to the top. Click OK. Losing Association upon Resuming from Suspend Mode
(Windows NT and Mini PCI Cards Only) Because Windows NT does not support resuming of mini PCI cards, your client adapter loses its association to an access point upon resuming from suspend mode. If this occurs, restart your client adapter to reassociate. Parameters Missing from Profile Manager Screen If some parameters are unavailable on the Profile Manager screen, your system administrator may have used an administrative tool to deactivate these parameters. In this case, these parameters cannot be selected. Windows Wireless Network Connection Icon Shows Unavailable Connection
(Windows XP Only) If your computer is running Windows XP and you configured your client adapter using ACU, the Windows Wireless Network Connection icon in the Windows system tray may be marked with a red X and show an unavailable connection even though a wireless connection exists. This condition is caused by a conflict between ACU and Windows XPs wireless network settings. Simply ignore the Windows icon and use the ACM icon to check the status of your client adapters wireless connection. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-12 OL-1394-06 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Error Messages LEAP Login Screen Does Not Appear Before Windows Login Screen (Windows 98, 98 SE, and Me Only) If you are using Windows 98, 98 SE, or Me and your client adapter is configured to use LEAP authentication with an automatically prompted login, the LEAP login screen should appear before the Windows screen after you reboot. If the Windows screen appears first, follow the steps below. On the Windows desktop, right-click the My Network Places icon. Click Properties. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 On the Network - Configuration screen, click the arrow on the right side of the Primary Network Logon box. Select Cisco Aironet Wireless Logon and click OK. Step 4 Step 5 When prompted to restart your computer, click Yes. Microsoft Hot Fix (Windows 98 and 98 SE Only) When the LEAP security module is selected during installation on a Windows 98 or 98 SE device, a Microsoft hot fix is also installed to fix two problems related to the use of LEAP. You can obtain a description of this hot fix and the problems it resolves at the following Microsoft URL:
http://support.microsoft.com/support/kb/articles/Q247/8/05.asp Note Only the English version of the hot fix is installed. Foreign language versions of these operating systems require a hot fix specific to those languages. Contact Microsoft Product Support Services to obtain the hot fix for languages other than English. Without the hot fix installed, you may be prompted to enter your credentials at the Windows login prompt twice. To work around this problem, enter your login credentials again. Error Messages This section provides a list of error messages that may appear during the installation, configuration, or use of your client adapter. The error messages are divided into four sections (general, LEAP authentication, PEAP authentication, and EAP-SIM authentication). The messages are listed in alphabetical order within each section, and an explanation as well as a recommended user action are provided for each message. Table 10-4 enables you to quickly locate the error messages you need. Table 10-4 Locating Error Messages Error Message Category General LEAP authentication PEAP authentication EAP-SIM authentication Page Number 10-14 10-18 10-21 10-26 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-13 Error Messages General Error Messages Chapter 10 Troubleshooting This section lists general error messages that may appear at any time and are not related to authentication attempts. Error Message Bad Firmware Image File (filename) Explanation The selected firmware file is corrupt and will not be sent to the client adapter. Recommended Action Select a different firmware file and try to load it. Error Message Card Removed at xx:xx Explanation The client adapter was ejected from the computer. Recommended Action Reinsert the client adapter if you wish to resume wireless communications. Error Message An error occurred while trying to make the selected profile active. Explanation An error occurred when you selected a profile in ACM. Recommended Action Check the profiles configuration parameters in ACU or select a new profile. Error Message Error Reading filename Explanation A problem occurred while the computer was reading the firmware file from the disk. Recommended Action Re-copy the firmware file to a floppy disk or to your computers hard drive and try to load it again or select a different firmware file and try to load it. Error Message Error Writing to Flash Memory Explanation A problem occurred while the firmware was being flashed. Recommended Action Eject the client adapter and reinsert it. If the client adapter functions properly, the firmware was flashed successfully. If the client adapter does not function or functions improperly, your client adapter may need to be returned for service. Refer to the Technical Assistance Center section in the Preface for information on contacting TAC. Error Message Firmware Incompatible with Hardware Explanation The selected firmware file does not work with the client adapter. Recommended Action Select a different firmware file and try to load it. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-14 OL-1394-06 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Error Messages Error Message Firmware Upgrade Failed Explanation A problem occurred while the firmware was being flashed. Recommended Action Eject the client adapter and reinsert it. If the client adapter functions properly, the firmware was flashed successfully. If the client adapter does not function or functions improperly, your client adapter may need to be returned for service. Refer to the Technical Assistance Center section in the Preface for information on contacting TAC. Error Message The installation will complete and applications will be installed when a wireless LAN client adapter is inserted. If an adapter is already inserted, remove and reinsert the adapter or reboot the machine. Explanation The installation program was most likely run without a client adapter inserted in the computer. Recommended Action Insert a client adapter into your computers client adapter slot. The installation program will then complete. If a client adapter was already inserted in your computer, eject and reinsert the adapter or reboot your computer. Error Message LEAP support has not been installed on this computer. You will not be able to authenticate with this or any other profile configured to use LEAP. Explanation A LEAP profile was selected for use in ACM, but the LEAP security module was not selected during installation. Therefore, the client adapter will not be able to authenticate using this profile (or any other profile that is configured for LEAP). Recommended Action Run the installation program again and enable the LEAP security module. Error Message Maximum power save mode will be temporarily disabled while you are running this application!
Explanation The client adapter cannot be run in Max PSP mode while ACU is running. Recommended Action No user action is required. The client adapter automatically runs in Fast PSP mode while ACU is running. Error Message No Cisco Aironet client adapters have been installed on this computer. Explanation ACM started but found no installed client adapters. Recommended Action Follow the instructions in Chapter 3 to install a client adapter. Error Message No Wireless LAN Client Adapters Found Explanation A client adapter is not inserted in the computer. Recommended Action Insert a client adapter if you wish to start wireless communications. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-15 Error Messages Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Error Message No Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installed!
Explanation An attempt was made to start ACU without a client adapter being inserted in the computer. ACU cannot execute if a client adapter is not inserted because it needs to be able to read from and write to the adapter. Recommended Action Insert a client adapter and start ACU. Error Message Please close ACU in order to use it with the Wireless LAN Adapter you selected using the System Tray Icon. Explanation Only one instance of ACU can be running at a time. However, an attempt was made to activate ACU for a second client adapter when ACU was already running. Recommended Action Click OK, close ACU, and then activate ACU for the desired adapter. Error Message This program is already running. Explanation ACM started when another instance of ACM was already running. Recommended Action No action is required. The new instance of ACM exits. Error Message Reauthenticate Failed Explanation The Reauthenticate option was selected from the Commands drop-down menu in ACU, but the reauthentication attempt failed. Recommended Action Re-enter your username and password and try to authenticate again or select another EAP profile. Error Message Restarting the client adapter will cause you to lose your network connection. Are you sure you want to restart your client adapter?
Explanation The Restart Card option was selected from the Commands drop-down menu in ACU, which may cause you to lose your network connection. Recommended Action If you want to reinitialize your client adapter, click Yes. Otherwise, click No. Error Message Unable to Open filename Explanation The selected firmware file cannot be found. Recommended Action Re-copy the firmware file to a floppy disk or to your computers hard drive and try to load it again or select a different firmware file and try to load it. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-16 OL-1394-06 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Error Messages Error Message Wireless Connection Unavailable. (Windows XP only) Explanation ACU was used to configure the client adapter on Windows XP, but the Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings check box in Windows XP is checked. This message appears even if the client adapter is associated to an access point. Recommended Action Uncheck the Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings check box in Windows XP to force Windows to display the correct status. Error Message You cannot run a link test because your client adapter is not associated. Explanation An attempt was made to run a link test while the client adapter was not associated to an access point or other wireless device. Recommended Action Run the link test after the client adapter is associated to an access point or another wireless device. Error Message You cannot run a link test because your client adapters radio is turned off. Explanation An attempt was made to run a link test while the client adapters radio was off. Recommended Action Turn on the client adapters radio by selecting Radio On from the Commands drop-down menu in ACU; then run the link test. Error Message You must specify an IP address before running a link test. Explanation An attempt was made to run a link test although the IP address of the access point or other wireless device with which to test the RF link was not specified. Recommended Action In the Linktest screens IP Address of Access Point field, enter the IP address of the access point or other wireless device with which you want to test the RF link. Error Message You need to be an administrator or a user with administrative rights to install Aironet Client Utility. Please log on as a different user and try again. Explanation A non-administrative user attempted to install ACU. The ACU installation process terminates. Recommended Action Log on as a different user and attempt the installation process again. Error Message Your Wireless LAN Adapter is not inserted!
Explanation One of two conditions is present: 1) a client adapter is not inserted in your computer or 2) ACU was started with one variety of client adapter inserted (such as a PCM342), the adapter was subsequently ejected, and another variety was inserted (such as a PCM352). Recommended Action Perform one of the following: 1) insert a client adapter into your computer if one is not present or 2) shut down ACU and restart it. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-17 Error Messages Chapter 10 Troubleshooting LEAP Authentication Error Messages This section lists error messages that may occur during LEAP authentication. Error Message The client adapter doesnt support LEAP. Please make sure that you have installed the correct client adapter and updated your firmware. Explanation LEAP authentication failed because the client adapters firmware does not support LEAP. Recommended Action Make sure that you have installed the correct client adapter and are using the firmware included in the Install Wizard file. Error Message The client adapter doesnt support WEP, so LEAP cannot be run. Please make sure that you have installed the correct client adapter and purchased WEP support. Explanation LEAP authentication failed because the client adapters firmware does not support WEP. Recommended Action Make sure that you have installed the correct client adapter and are using the firmware included in the Install Wizard file. Error Message The combination of domain name and user name exceeds the maximum number of characters (32) that LEAP supports. Please uncheck Include Windows Logon Domain with User Name in ACU or use shorter names. Explanation The combination of characters entered for the username and domain name in the Windows login screen or the LEAP login screen exceeds the maximum number supported by LEAP, which is 32. Recommended Action Perform one of the following:
Uncheck the Include Windows Logon Domain with User Name check box in the LEAP Settings screen of ACU. Enter a set of credentials (username, password, and domain name) with fewer characters. Error Message The current profile is not configured for LEAP. Explanation The Manual LEAP Login option was selected in ACU, but the active profile is not configured for LEAP. The LEAP authentication process aborts. Recommended Action If you want the client adapter to LEAP authenticate, select a profile that is configured for LEAP. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-18 OL-1394-06 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Error Messages Error Message The LEAP password entered exceeds the maximum number of characters (32) that LEAP supports. Please use a shorter password. Explanation The password that was entered exceeds the maximum number of characters supported by LEAP, which is 32. Recommended Action Re-enter the password, making sure it contains fewer than 32 characters. Error Message The xxx profile was disabled because LEAP authentication failed during your last logoff. You can re-enable the profile by selecting the Reauthenticate option. Explanation A profile that was configured for LEAP failed an authentication attempt during the last logoff process and was disabled. Because error messages cannot be displayed during the logoff process, this message appears after the next logon. Recommended Action Select Reauthenticate from ACM or the Commands drop-down menu in ACU to re-enable the profile. Error Message The profile will be disabled until you select the Reauthenticate option, Windows restarts, or the card is ejected and reinserted. Are you sure?
Explanation The username and password for your current profile have expired or are no longer valid. When the LEAP login screen appeared, prompting you to enter your new username and password, you selected Cancel. The profile was disabled to prevent accidental authentication attempts in the future. Recommended Action Click No, enter your new username and password when the LEAP login screen reappears, and click OK. The client adapter should authenticate using your new credentials. If the profile uses saved credentials, edit the profile in ACU by changing the username and password on the LEAP Settings screen and save your changes. (If you click Yes, the profile is disabled until you select Reauthenticate from ACM or the Commands drop-down menu in ACU, reboot your system, or eject and reinsert the card.) Caution If your backend server is set to allow only a limited number of failed authentication attempts, your user account may be locked if you continue trying with an invalid set of user credentials. Error Message A recently installed program has disabled the Welcome screen and Fast User Switching. To restore these features, you must uninstall the program. The following file name might help you identify the program that made the change:
cswGina.dll. (Windows XP only) Explanation The LEAP security module was selected during installation on a Windows XP computer;
then the Change the way users log on or off option was selected under Windows XPs User Accounts. Recommended Action If the LEAP security module is selected during installation, you cannot use Windows XPs fast user switching feature. If you want to use fast user switching and do not want to use LEAP, you must run the installation program again and deselect the LEAP security module. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-19 Error Messages Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Error Message The saved user name and password entered for this profile are no longer valid and have failed the LEAP authentication process. Please enter a new user name and password. Remember to change them permanently in the profile using the ACU Profile Manager. Explanation The username and password for your current profile, which uses saved credentials, have expired or are no longer valid; therefore, your client adapter is unable to LEAP authenticate. Recommended Action When the LEAP login screen appears, enter your new username and password and click OK. The client adapter should authenticate using your new credentials. Then edit the profile in ACU by changing the username and password on the LEAP Settings screen and save your changes. Error Message To run LEAP successfully, you will have to apply Microsoft Q241052 Update for the language version of your operating system as documented on http://support.microsoft.com/support/kb/articles/Q247/8/05.asp. Please contact Microsoft Product Support Services to obtain the fix. Explanation When the LEAP security module is selected during installation on a Windows 98 or 98 SE device, a Microsoft hot fix is also installed to fix two problems related to the use of LEAP. However, only the English version of the hot fix is installed. Foreign language versions of these operating systems require a hot fix specific to those languages. Recommended Action Contact Microsoft Product Support Services to obtain the hot fix for languages other than English. Without the hot fix installed, you may be prompted to enter your credentials at the Windows login prompt twice. To work around this problem, enter your login credentials again. Error Message Unable to LEAP authenticate. Please make sure you have entered the correct user name and password and try again. Explanation LEAP authentication failed. Recommended Action Perform one of the following:
Re-enter the LEAP username and password or cancel the LEAP authentication. To start another LEAP authentication process, select Reauthenticate from ACM or the Commands drop-down menu in ACU, log off and log in again, or select Manual LEAP Login from the Commands drop-down menu in ACU. Error Message Unable to LEAP authenticate in the specified amount of time. The network infrastructure might be down. You may also want to increase the LEAP timeout value for this profile. Explanation The client adapter was unable to LEAP authenticate within the amount of time specified by the LEAP authentication timeout value. Recommended Action Increase the LEAP authentication timeout value on the LEAP Settings screen. Then re-enter the LEAP username and password. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-20 OL-1394-06 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Error Messages Error Message The user name and password entered are no longer valid and have failed the LEAP authentication process. Please enter a new user name and password. Explanation The username and password for your current profile have expired or are no longer valid;
therefore, your client adapter is unable to LEAP authenticate. Recommended Action When the LEAP login screen appears, enter your new username and password and click OK. The client adapter should authenticate using your new credentials. Error Message The user name entered is not valid or exceeds the maximum number of characters (32) that LEAP supports. Explanation The username that was entered is not valid or exceeds the maximum number of characters supported by LEAP, which is 32. Recommended Action Re-enter the username, making sure it contains fewer than 32 characters. PEAP Authentication Error Messages This section lists error messages that may occur during PEAP authentication. The messages are divided into six subsections based on the type of database that is used with PEAP. Use Table 10-5 to quickly locate the error messages for your database. Table 10-5 Locating PEAP Authentication Error Messages Error Message Category All PEAP-supported databases Windows NT or 2000 domain databases All OTP databases OTP databases using Secure Computing SofToken version 1.3 OTP databases using Secure Computing SofToken II version 2.0 OTP databases using RSA SecurID version 2.5 Page Number 10-21 10-22 10-23 10-24 10-25 10-26 For All PEAP-Supported Databases Error Message PEAP failed initialization. Please make sure that PEAP is installed correctly and Trusted Root Certificate Authority certificate is installed correctly. Explanation The PEAP authentication process failed during initialization, most likely because the specified root certificate is missing from the system. Recommended Action Make sure that PEAP and the Trusted Root Certificate Authority certificate are installed correctly. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-21 Error Messages Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Error Message You have connected to a server that is signed by Root Certification Authority xxx, which is different than the specified trusted CA. Do you want to accept this connection? Warning: Connecting to a server signed with untrusted CA might compromise your security. Explanation The client adapter has established a connection to a certificate server other than the specified trusted CA. Recommended Action If you want the client adapter to connect to this server even though it may present a security risk, click Yes. Otherwise, click No. Error Message You have connected to server xxx. Do you want to accept the connection?
Warning: Connecting to an unsecured server might compromise your security. Explanation The client adapter has established a connection to the server specified. Recommended Action If you want the client adapter to connect to this server even though it may present a security risk, click Yes. Otherwise, click No. For Windows NT or 2000 Domain Databases Error Message New Password and Confirm New Password entered do not match. Please try it again. Explanation You entered different values in the New Password and Confirm New Password fields on the Change Password screen. They must be identical. Recommended Action Re-enter your new password in both fields. Error Message The old password you supplied doesnt match what you entered previously. Please try it again. Explanation The password entered in the Old Password field on the Change Password screen does not match the password that was used previously. Recommended Action Re-enter your old password in the Old Password field. Error Message Your domain password has been successfully changed on the server. To synchronize any Windows password that might be locally cached, you must also manually change the password in Windows. Explanation You have successfully changed your domain password using the Static Password screen. However, if you also have a locally cached Windows password, you must manually change it to synchronize it with your domain password. Recommended Action Press Ctrl-Alt-Delete, select Change Password, and enter your old password once and your new password twice. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-22 OL-1394-06 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting For All OTP Databases Error Messages Error Message Failed to change your PIN. Error code xxx. Run Software Token program to fix it. Explanation Your attempt to change your PIN using the Change PIN screen failed due to a problem with the software token program. Recommended Action Run the software token program and then try to change your PIN again. Error Message Invalid PIN. Please try again. Explanation The PIN that you entered is invalid. Recommended Action Re-enter your PIN. Error Message New PIN and Confirm New PIN do not match. Please try them again. Explanation You entered different values in the New PIN and Confirm New PIN fields on the Change PIN screen. They must be identical. Recommended Action Re-enter your new PIN in both fields. Error Message New PIN is invalid. Please try it again. Explanation The PIN that you entered in the New PIN field on the Change PIN screen is invalid. Recommended Action Re-enter your new PIN. Error Message The old PIN you supplied is invalid. Please try it again. Explanation The old PIN that you entered on the Change PIN screen is invalid. Recommended Action Re-enter your old PIN. Error Message Please check either Support Hardware Token or Support Software Token. One of them must be selected. Explanation While the client adapter was being configured for PEAP authentication, the One Time Password option was selected on the Generic Token Card Properties screen, but neither the Support Hardware Token nor the Support Software Token option was selected. Recommended Action Check either the Support Hardware Token check box or the Support Software Token check box or both. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-23 Error Messages Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Error Message Your PIN has expired. Please change your PIN. Explanation The PIN that you have been using to authenticate has expired. Recommended Action Follow the instructions in the After Your PIN Expires (OTP Databases Only) section on page 6-19 to change your PIN. For OTP Databases Using Secure Computing SofToken Version 1.3 Error Message Could not find SofToken.exe in the program path specified. Please make sure SofToken is installed correctly and the correct program path is entered. Explanation SofToken.exe is not located at the path you entered on the Generic Token Card Properties screen. Recommended Action Make sure that SofToken is installed correctly; then re-enter the program path. Error Message Error getting data from SofToken server. Please make sure SofToken is installed correctly and the correct program path is entered. Explanation An error occurred while attempting to get data from the SofToken server. Recommended Action Make sure that SofToken is installed correctly and the correct program path is entered. Error Message Initialization of SofToken library failed. Please make sure SofToken is installed correctly and the correct program path is entered. Explanation An error occurred with the SofToken program. Recommended Action Make sure that SofToken is installed correctly and the correct program path is entered. Error Message The program path entered exceeds the maximum length allowed (255). Explanation The program path entered on the Generic Token Card Properties screen contains more characters than the field allows. Recommended Action Re-enter the path using a maximum of 255 characters. If necessary, move SofToken.exe to a directory with a shorter path. Error Message Program path must be specified for SofToken Version 1.3. Explanation Secure Computing SofToken Version 1.3 was selected from the Supported Type drop-down box on the Generic Token Card Properties screen, but the SofToken program path was not entered. Recommended Action Enter the path to the SofToken program in the SofToken Program Path field. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-24 OL-1394-06 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Error Messages Error Message SofToken is not set up to allow processing from SofToken calls. Calls have been disabled from the SofToken Manager, the SofToken program does not have any valid users yet, or the last person to use SofToken was not initialized correctly. Explanation The SofToken program is not set up to process SofToken API calls. Recommended Action Make sure that SofToken is configured to enable SofToken calls and verify that you are set up as a valid user. Error Message Unable to launch SofToken.exe. Please make sure SofToken is installed correctly and the correct program path is entered. Explanation An error occurred with the SofToken program. Recommended Action Make sure that SofToken is installed correctly and the correct program path is entered. Error Message Unable to load SofToken library. Please make sure that SofToken is installed correctly. Explanation An error occurred with the SofToken program. Recommended Action Make sure that SofToken is installed correctly and the correct program path is entered. For OTP Databases Using Secure Computing SofToken II Version 2.0 Error Message Error getting the OTP password for the user. Run SofToken II to ensure the user is set up correctly. Explanation An error occurred while attempting to obtain the OTP password for the user. Recommended Action Run the SofToken II program to make sure that the user is set up properly. Error Message Failed to load data from the OTP database for User ID: xxxx. Run SofToken II to ensure the user is set up correctly. Explanation An error occurred while attempting to load data from the OTP database for the specified user. Recommended Action Run the SofToken II program to make sure that the specified user is set up properly. Error Message Here is the hint you entered when you created your PIN: xxxx. Explanation You entered an invalid PIN. Recommended Action Use the hint to help you remember your PIN; then re-enter it. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-25 Error Messages Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Error Message Unable to load SofToken II library. Please make sure that SofToken II is installed correctly. Explanation An error occurred with the SofToken II program. Recommended Action Make sure that SofToken II is installed correctly. For OTP Databases Using RSA SecurID Version 2.5 Error Message Error getting password from RSA SecurID Software Token. Explanation An error occurred while attempting to obtain the user password from the RSA SecurID program. Recommended Action Run the RSA SecurID program to make sure that the user is set up properly. Error Message Unable to load RSA library. Please make sure that RSA SecurID Software Token is installed correctly. Explanation An error occurred with the RSA SecurID program. Recommended Action Make sure that RSA SecurID is installed correctly. Error Message Unable to open RSA Token service. Explanation An error occurred with the RSA SecurID program. Recommended Action Make sure that RSA SecurID is installed correctly. EAP-SIM Authentication Error Messages This section lists error messages that may occur during EAP-SIM authentication. Error Message Client_handleResponseIdentity error. Explanation When asked to perform an authentication, the EAP-SIM supplicant encountered an error retrieving your network username from the SIM card. This error may occur if an invalid SIM card
(such as one intended for mobile phone use) is inserted in the card reader or if Windows encounters a processing error. Note The eight-digit hexadecimal error code in the message may assist technical support in troubleshooting your problem. Recommended Action Make sure that you have a valid SIM card that was provided to you for wireless network access and that it is inserted properly. If the problem occurs several times in a row, reboot your computer. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-26 OL-1394-06 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Error Messages Error Message For the changes to take effect, please restart your WLAN card (or your computer) NOW. Explanation The changes you made on the SIM Authentication Properties screen can take effect only if you perform a complete reauthentication. Otherwise, your wireless network connection may appear to be stuck in the Validating identity state. Recommended Action Turn off your client adapters radio, wait a few seconds, and then turn the radio back on. Refer to the Turning Your Client Adapters Radio On or Off section on page 9-15 for instructions. Error Message GetUserPin returned error. Explanation Windows encountered an error while prompting for or retrieving the PIN. Note The eight-digit hexadecimal error code in the message may assist technical support in troubleshooting your problem. Recommended Action Wait until the system tries to authenticate the client adapter again
(approximately 30 to 60 seconds) and enter a valid PIN. Do not click Cancel or otherwise interfere with the normal operation of Windows. If the problem persists, reboot your computer. Error Message Maximum length of PIN is 8 characters. Explanation You tried to enter a PIN that is longer than eight characters. SIM card PINs are restricted to a maximum length of eight alphanumeric characters. Recommended Action Delete one or more characters from the PIN field or delete all of the characters you entered and retype the complete PIN. Error Message Network authentication aborted. Explanation When you were asked to enter a PIN, you clicked the Cancel button and cancelled the authentication process. The EAP-SIM supplicant will not attempt to authenticate to the network. Note The system will try to authenticate automatically within 30 to 60 seconds. Recommended Action If you want to authenticate to the network and establish a wireless network connection, enter the valid PIN for your SIM card. If you do not want to establish a connection, consider turning off or ejecting the client adapter; otherwise, the system will reprompt you every 30 to 60 seconds. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-27 Error Messages Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Error Message Network rejected user authentication. Explanation The service providers network has rejected your authentication attempt. This is most likely due to an expired or invalid SIM card or an invalidated account. However, it could also occur if the service provider at your current location does not allow access to the network for subscribers of your service provider. Recommended Action Make sure that your account is in good standing and that you have a valid SIM card. Switch to a SIM card that is valid at the current location and try again. Error Message Please check your smartcard reader and insert your SIM card. Explanation When asked to perform an authentication, the EAP-SIM supplicant could not get the smartcard reader to initialize within a reasonable time (that is, 90 seconds for the first try and 5 minutes for subsequent tries). Most likely, the reader is not plugged in correctly, or the computer no longer recognizes it. Note The eight-digit hexadecimal error code in the message may assist technical support in troubleshooting your problem. Recommended Action Follow the steps below. Install a smartcard reader if you have not done so. If a reader is installed, make sure that it is inserted completely into the PCMCIA slot (PCMCIA model) or that the connector cable is inserted properly into the serial or USB connector (serial/USB port model). Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Make sure that the system recognizes your reader. It should be listed under Smart card readers in Windows device manager. If your reader is not listed, eject and reinsert the reader (PCMCIA model) or disconnect and reconnect the cable (serial/USB port model). Step 4 If the computer still does not recognize your reader, reboot the computer with the reader installed. Error Message Please check your smartcard reader and SIM card, then try again. Explanation The EAP-SIM supplicant has detected a general smartcard-related error (that is, not one of the specific errors included in this section) and has aborted the authentication process. Note The eight-digit hexadecimal error code in the title may assist technical support in troubleshooting your problem. Recommended Action Follow the steps below. Step 1 Make sure that your smartcard reader is installed properly and that your SIM card is inserted properly. Step 2 Step 3 Follow the Recommended Action instructions for the Please check your smartcard reader and try again error message below. Follow the Recommended Action instructions for the Please insert your SIM card and try again error message on page 10-30. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-28 OL-1394-06 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Error Messages Step 4 If you are sure that the reader and card are both inserted properly, wait until the system tries to authenticate again. This should occur within 30 to 60 seconds. Caution Never remove your SIM card until the system has completed the authentication process. Step 5 If the problem persists, try restarting the client adapter or rebooting your computer. Error Message Please check your smartcard reader and try again. Explanation Windows could not detect a smartcard reader in the system. You may not have installed a reader, or this may happen after resuming Windows from suspend or hibernation. Recommended Action Follow the steps below. Install a smartcard reader if you have not done so. If a reader is installed, make sure that it is inserted completely into the PCMCIA slot (PCMCIA model) or that the connector cable is inserted properly into the serial or USB connector (serial/USB port model). Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Make sure that the system recognizes your reader. It should be listed under Smart card readers in Windows device manager. If your reader is not listed, eject and reinsert the reader (PCMCIA model) or disconnect and reconnect the cable (serial/USB port model). Step 4 If the computer still does not recognize your reader, reboot the computer with the reader installed. Error Message Please contact your service provider to unblock your card. Explanation You have exceeded your SIM cards retry limit by entering too many incorrect PINs in a row. Recommended Action Contact your service providers customer service center to get the card unblocked. The phone number may be printed on your SIM card. Error Message Please do not switch SIM cards after authenticating. Explanation The EAP-SIM supplicant has detected that the network username stored on the currently inserted SIM card differs from the username that was used in a previous authentication. Due to this mismatch, authentication may fail. Recommended Action If the currently inserted SIM card is recognized by the network, authentication may succeed or fail, depending on the network configuration. If your client adapter is authenticated, you may ignore this message. Otherwise, replace the SIM card currently inserted with the SIM card that was used for your first authentication and wait until the system tries to authenticate your client adapter again (approximately 30 to 60 seconds). You may also restart the client adapter or reboot your computer with the new SIM card to try again. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-29 Error Messages Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Error Message Please enter a PIN (1 to 8 characters). Explanation When you were prompted for a PIN, you clicked the OK button before entering the PIN. Recommended Action Enter the PIN required to access your SIM card. If you do not want to authenticate at this time or do not have your PIN available, click the Cancel button instead. Error Message Please insert your SIM card and try again. Explanation The system could not detect a SIM card in the smartcard reader. Recommended Action Make sure that your SIM card is inserted into the reader properly. It should be inserted into the reader all the way and not into the empty space in the PCMCIA slot. Try removing and reinserting the card. You should feel it latch into place and notice a slight resistance when attempting to remove it. Error Message SimOpenSession error. Explanation When asked to retrieve your network username, the EAP-SIM supplicant was unable to establish a connection to the SIM card. This can occur if a SIM card is not inserted in the reader, the SIM card is not inserted properly, or the wrong SIM card is inserted. Recommended Action Make sure that you are using a valid SIM card (that is, the SIM card provided to you for wireless network access, not a SIM card intended for mobile phone use). If that does not correct the error, make sure that your SIM card is inserted into the reader properly. It should be inserted into the reader all the way and not into the empty space in the PCMCIA slot. Try removing and reinserting the card. You should feel it latch into place and notice a slight resistance when attempting to remove it. Error Message Time-out waiting for smartcard reader initialization. Explanation When asked to perform an authentication, the EAP-SIM supplicant could not get the smartcard reader to initialize within a reasonable time (90 seconds for the first try and 5 minutes for subsequent tries). Most likely, the reader is not plugged in correctly, or the computer no longer recognizes it. Note The eight-digit hexadecimal error code in the message may assist technical support in troubleshooting your problem. Recommended Action Follow the steps below. Install a smartcard reader if you have not done so. If a reader is installed, make sure that it is inserted completely into the PCMCIA slot (PCMCIA model) or that the connector cable is inserted properly into the serial or USB connector (serial/USB port model). Step 1 Step 2 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-30 OL-1394-06 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Error Messages Step 3 Make sure that the system recognizes your reader. It should be listed under Smart card readers in Windows device manager. If your reader is not listed, eject and reinsert the reader (PCMCIA model) or disconnect and reconnect the cable (serial/USB port model). Step 4 If the computer still does not recognize your reader, reboot the computer with the reader installed. Error Message Wrong PIN entered (X tries left). Explanation The SIM card could not validate the PIN you have entered. You must have entered the wrong PIN. Recommended Action Make sure that you enter the correct PIN. If your PIN contains letters, enter them in the correct case as the PIN is case sensitive. Check that the Caps Lock key has not been pressed inadvertently. Also, make sure that you have inserted the correct SIM card. Note Most SIM cards limit the number of times in a row that you can enter an incorrect PIN. The error message indicates how many attempts you have left. Entering the correct PIN resets the limit to its original value. However, if the number of retries is exhausted, the SIM card locks up and becomes useless. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-31 Error Messages Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows 10-32 OL-1394-06 A P P E N D I X A Technical Specifications This appendix provides technical specifications for the Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters. The following topics are covered in this appendix:
Physical Specifications, page A-2
Radio Specifications, page A-3
Power Specifications, page A-6
Safety and Regulatory Compliance Specifications, page A-6 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows A-1 Appendix A Technical Specifications Table A-1 lists the technical specifications for the Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters. Note If a distinction is not made between radio or client adapter type, the specification applies to all Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters. Table A-1 Technical Specifications for Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Physical Specifications Size PC card and PC-Cardbus card LM card PCI card Mini PCI card Weight 4.5 in. L x 2.1 in. W x 0.2 in. H
(11.3 cm L x 5.4 cm W x 0.5 cm H) 3.4 in. L x 2.1 in. W x 0.2 in. H
(8.6 cm L x 5.4 cm W x 0.5 cm H) 5.8 in. L x 3.2 in. W x 0.5 in. H
(14.7 cm L x 8.1 cm W x 1.3 cm H) 2.3 in. L x 2.0 in. W x 0.2 in. H
(6.0 cm L x 5.1 cm W x 0.5 cm H) PC card and LM card PCI card Mini PCI card PC-Cardbus card 1.3 oz (0.037 kg) 4.6 oz (0.13 kg) 0.5 oz (0.014 kg) 1.5 oz (0.043 kg) Enclosure PC card and PC-Cardbus card LM card Connector PC card and LM card PCI card PC-Cardbus card Status indicators Operating temperature Extended Type II PC card Standard Type II PC card with RF connectors 68-pin PCMCIA PCI card edge 68-pin Cardbus Green and amber LEDs (except mini PCI card); see Chapter 10 340 series client adapters 350 series client adapters 5-GHz client adapters Storage temperature Humidity (non-operational) ESD 32oF to 158oF (0oC to 70oC) 22oF to 158oF (30oC to 70oC) 22oF to 158oF (30oC to 70oC) 40oF to 185oF (40oC to 85oC) 95% relative humidity 15 kV (human body model) Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows A-2 OL-1394-06 Appendix A Technical Specifications Table A-1 Technical Specifications for Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters (continued) Radio Specifications Type 2.4-GHz client adapters 5-GHz client adapters Direct-sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) IEEE 802.11b compliant Orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) IEEE 802.11a compliant Power output Note Note Refer to Appendix D for limitations on radiated power (EIRP) levels in the European community and other countries. If you are using an older version of a 340 or 350 series client adapter, your power level options may be different than those listed here. 340 series PC card 340 series LM card and PCI card 350 series client adapters PC-Cardbus card 30 mW (15 dBm) 1 mW (0 dBm) 30 mW (15 dBm) 15 mW (12 dBm) 5 mW (7 dBm) 1 mW (0 dBm) 100 mW (20 dBm) 50 mW (17 dBm) 30 mW (15 dBm) 20 mW (13 dBm) 5 mW (7 dBm) 1 mW (0 dBm) 20 mW (13 dBm) 10 mW (10 dBm) 5 mW (7 dBm) Operating frequency 2.4-GHz client adapters 5-GHz client adapters Note These values are based on the FCC peak measurement method as defined in FCC 15.407(a)(4). 2.400 to 2.497 GHz (depending on the regulatory domain in which the client adapter is used) 5.15 to 5.25 GHz in the UNII 1 band*
5.25 to 5.35 GHz in the UNII 2 band*
*Depending on the regulatory domain in which the client adapter is used Usable channels 2.4-GHz client adapters 5-GHz client adapters 2412 to 2484 MHz in 5-MHz increments 5170 to 5320 MHz in 20-MHz increments OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows A-3 Appendix A Technical Specifications Table A-1 Technical Specifications for Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters (continued) Interference rejection 2.4-GHz client adapters 5-GHz client adapters Data rates 2.4-GHz client adapters 5-GHz client adapters Modulation Receiver sensitivity 340 series client adapters 350 series client adapters 5-GHz client adapters 35 dB adjacent channel rejection 16 dB @ 6 Mbps adjacent channel rejection 15 dB @ 9 Mbps adjacent channel rejection 13 dB @ 12 Mbps adjacent channel rejection 11 dB @ 18 Mbps adjacent channel rejection 8 dB @ 24 Mbps adjacent channel rejection 4 dB @ 36 Mbps adjacent channel rejection 0 dB @ 48 Mbps adjacent channel rejection 1 dB @ 54 Mbps adjacent channel rejection 1, 2, 5.5, and 11 Mbps 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, and 54 Mbps Binary phase shift keying (BPSK) - 1 Mbps Quaternary phase shift keying (QPSK) - 2 Mbps Complementary code keying (CCK) - 5.5 and 11 Mbps Orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) - 6 to 54 Mbps 90 dBm @ 1 Mbps 88 dBm @ 2 Mbps 87 dBm @ 5.5 Mbps 83 dBm @ 11 Mbps 94 dBm @ 1 Mbps 91 dBm @ 2 Mbps 89 dBm @ 5.5 Mbps 85 dBm @ 11 Mbps 85 dBm @ 6 Mbps 84 dBm @ 9 Mbps 82 dBm @ 12 Mbps 80 dBm @ 18 Mbps 77 dBm @ 24 Mbps 73 dBm @ 36 Mbps 69 dBm @ 48 Mbps 68 dBm @ 54 Mbps Receiver delay spread (multipath) 2.4-GHz client adapters 500 ns @ 1 Mbps 400 ns @ 2 Mbps 300 ns @ 5.5 Mbps 140 ns @ 11 Mbps (350 series client adapters) 70 ns @ 11 Mbps (340 series client adapters) Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows A-4 OL-1394-06 Appendix A Technical Specifications Table A-1 Technical Specifications for Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters (continued) Range 340 series client adapters Outdoor 1500 ft (457.2 m) @ 1 Mbps 1200 ft (365.8 m) @ 2 Mbps 800 ft (243.8 m) @ 5.5 Mbps 400 ft (121.9 m) @ 11 Mbps Indoor 300 ft (91.4 m) @ 1 Mbps 225 ft (68.6 m) @ 2 Mbps 150 ft (45.7 m) @ 5.5 Mbps 100 ft (30.5 m) @ 11 Mbps Note The above range numbers assume the use of a snap-on antenna with the LM card. 350 series client adapters Outdoor 2000 ft (609.6 m) @ 1 Mbps 1500 ft (457.2 m) @ 2 Mbps 1000 ft (304.8 m) @ 5.5 Mbps 800 ft (243.8 m) @ 11 Mbps Indoor 350 ft (106.7 m) @ 1 Mbps 250 ft (76.2 m) @ 2 Mbps 200 ft (61 m) @ 5.5 Mbps 150 ft (45.7 m) @ 11 Mbps Note The above range numbers assume the use of a snap-on antenna with the LM card. 5-GHz client adapters Outdoor 1200 ft (365.8 m) @ 6 Mbps 700 ft (213.4 m) @ 18 Mbps 120 ft (36.6 m) @ 54 Mbps Indoor 200 ft (61.0 m) @ 6 Mbps 150 ft (45.7 m) @ 18 Mbps 70 ft (21.3 m) @ 54 Mbps Note The above range numbers assume that the client adapter is being used with a Cisco Aironet 1200 Series Access Point with a patch antenna. Different range characteristics are likely when using the client adapter with a non-Cisco access point or a Cisco Aironet 1200 Series Access Point with an omni-directional antenna. Antenna PC card LM card PCI card Mini PCI card PC-Cardbus card Integrated diversity antenna Two MMCX antenna connectors RP-TNC connector Ultra-miniature SMT U.FL antenna connectors Integrated patch antenna OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows A-5 Appendix A Technical Specifications Table A-1 Technical Specifications for Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters (continued) Power Specifications Operational voltage PC, LM, and PCI card Mini PCI card PC-Cardbus card 5.0 V ( 0.25 V) 3.0 to 3.6 V 3.3 V ( 0.33 V) Receive current steady state PC card and LM card PCI card Mini PCI card PC-Cardbus card Typically 250 mA Typically 350 mA Typically 330 mA Typically 580 mA Transmit current steady state 340 series PC card and LM card 340 series PCI card 350 series PC card and LM card 350 series PCI card 350 series mini PCI card PC-Cardbus card Sleep mode steady state Typically 350 mA @ 15 dBm Typically 450 mA @ 15 dBm Typically 450 mA @ 20 dBm Typically 550 mA @ 20 dBm Typically 570 mA @ 20 dBm Typically 520 mA Typically 15 mA Typically 110 mA 340 series PC card and LM card 340 series PCI card 350 series PC card, LM card, and mini PCI card 350 series PCI card PC-Cardbus card Typically 15 mA Typically 115 mA Typically 20 mA Safety and Regulatory Compliance Specifications Safety Designed to meet:
UL 1950 Third Ed.
CSA 22.2 No. 950-95
IEC 60950 Second Ed., including Amendments 1-4 with all deviations
EN 60950 Second Ed., including Amendments 1-4 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows A-6 OL-1394-06 Appendix A Technical Specifications Table A-1 Technical Specifications for Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters (continued) EMI and susceptibility Radio approvals RF exposure FCC Part 15.107 & 15.109 Class B ICES-003 Class B (Canada) EN 55022 B AS/NZS 3548 Class B VCCI Class B EN 55024 EN 301.489-1 and EN-301.489-17 FCC Part 15.247 (2.4-GHz client adapters) FCC Part 15.407 (5-GHz client adapters) Canada RSS-139-1 (2.4-GHz client adapters), RSS-210 Japan Telec 33B (2.4-GHz client adapters) Japan ARIB STD-T71 (5-GHz client adapters) EN 300.328 (2.4-GHz client adapters) EN 301.893 (5-GHz client adapters) OET-65C RSS-102 ANSI C95.1 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows A-7 Appendix A Technical Specifications Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows A-8 OL-1394-06 A P P E N D I X B Translated Safety Warnings This appendix provides translations of the safety warnings that appear in this publication. The following topics are covered in this appendix:
Explosive Device Proximity Warning, page B-2
Dipole Antenna Installation Warning, page B-3
Warning for Laptop Users, page B-4 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows B-1 Explosive Device Proximity Warning Appendix B Translated Safety Warnings Explosive Device Proximity Warning Warning Do not operate your wireless network device near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the device has been modified to be especially qualified for such use. Waarschuwing Gebruik dit draadloos netwerkapparaat alleen in de buurt van onbeschermde ontstekers of in een omgeving met explosieven indien het apparaat speciaal is aangepast om aan de eisen voor een dergelijk gebruik te voldoen. Varoitus l kyt johdotonta verkkolaitetta suojaamattomien rjytysnallien lheisyydess tai rjytysalueella, jos laitetta ei ole erityisesti muunnettu sopivaksi sellaiseen kyttn.oen. Attention Ne jamais utiliser un quipement de rseau sans fil proximit d'un dtonateur non blind ou dans un lieu prsentant des risques d'explosion, sauf si l'quipement a t modifi cet effet. Warnung Benutzen Sie Ihr drahtloses Netzwerkgert nicht in der Nhe ungeschtzter Sprengkapseln oder anderer explosiver Stoffe, es sei denn, Ihr Gert wurde eigens fr diesen Gebrauch modifiziert und bestimmt. Avvertenza Non utilizzare la periferica di rete senza fili in prossimit di un detonatore non protetto o di esplosivi a meno che la periferica non sia stata modificata a tale proposito. Advarsel Ikke bruk den trdlse nettverksenheten nrt inntil uisolerte fenghetter eller i et eksplosivt milj med mindre enheten er modifisert slik at den tler slik bruk. Aviso No opere o dispositivo de rede sem fios perto de cpsulas explosivas no protegidas ou num ambiente explosivo, a no ser que o dispositivo tenha sido modificado para se qualificar especialmente para essa utilizao. Advertencia!
No utilizar un aparato de la red sin cable cerca de un detonador que no est protegido ni tampoco en un entorno explosivo a menos que el aparato haya sido modificado con ese fin. Varning!
Anvnd inte den trdlsa ntverksenheten i nrheten av oskyddade tndhattar eller i en explosiv milj om inte enheten modifierats fr att kunna anvndas i sdana sammanhang. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows B-2 OL-1394-06 Appendix B Translated Safety Warnings Dipole Antenna Installation Warning Dipole Antenna Installation Warning Warning In order to comply with FCC radio frequency (RF) exposure limits, dipole antennas should be located at a minimum of 7.9 inches (20 cm) or more from the body of all persons. Waarschuwing Om te voldoen aan de FCC radiofrequentie (RF) blootstellingslimieten dienen dipoolantennes zich minstens 20 cm of meer van de lichamen van alle personen bevinden. Varoitus FCC:n antamien radiotaajuuksille altistumista koskevien rajoitusten mukaan dipoliantennien on sijaittava vhintn 20 cm:n pss kaikista henkilist. Attention Warnung Pour se conformer aux limites dexposition la frquence radio prconises par la FCC (Federal Communications Commission), les antennes diples doivent se situer un minimum de 20 cm de toute personne. Um die in den FCC-Richtlinien festgelegten Expositionshchstgrenzen fr Radiofrequenzen (RF) nicht zu berschreiten, sollten Dipolantennen mindestens 20 cm (7,9 Zoll) vom Krper aller Person entfernt aufgestellt werden. Avvertenza Per conformarsi ai limiti FCC di esposizione a radiofrequenza (RF), le antenne a dipolo devono stare ad una distanza minima di 20 cm dal corpo di ogni persona. Advarsel I henhold til eksponeringsgrensene for radiofrekvenser (RF), skal dipole antenner befinne seg p en avstand av minst 20 cm eller mer fra mennesker. Aviso Para estar de acordo com as normas FCC de limites de exposio para freqncia de rdio (RF), as antenas dipolo devem estar distantes no mnimo 20 cm (7,9 pol) do corpo de qualquer pessoa. Advertencia!
Para cumplir con los lmites de exposicin de radio frecuencia (RF) de la Comisin Federal de Comunicaciones (FCC) es preciso ubicar las antenas dipolo a un mnimo de 20 cm (7,9 pulgadas) o ms del cuerpo de las personas. Varning!
Fr att flja FCC-exponeringsgrnserna fr radiofrekvens (RF), br dipolsantenner placeras p minst 20 cm avstnd frn alla mnniskor. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows B-3 Warning for Laptop Users Appendix B Translated Safety Warnings Warning for Laptop Users Warning In order to comply with RF exposure limits established in the ANSI C95.1 standards, it is recommended when using a laptop with a PC card client adapter that the adapters integrated antenna is positioned more than 2 inches (5 cm) from your body or nearby persons during extended periods of transmitting or operating time. If the antenna is positioned less than 2 inches (5 cm) from the user, it is recommended that the user limit exposure time. Waarschuwing In het kader van een in de ANSI C95.1 norm vastgelegde limiet voor blootstelling aan straling veroorzaakt door radiofrequenties, dient u bij langdurig gebruik van een laptop met client adapter pc-kaart een afstand van meer dan 5 centimeter aan te houden tussen de gentegreerde antenne van de adapter en uzelf en enige andere personen. Als deze afstand niet kan worden aangehouden, dient u de tijd dat het apparaat gebruikt wordt te beperken. Varoitus Attention Warnung Avvertenza Advarsel ANSI C95.1 -standardin radiotaajuuksille asettamien altistumisrajojen mukaisesti on suositeltavaa, ett kytettess kannettavaa tietokonetta, jossa on PC-kortti-asiakas-adapteri, adapterin integroitu antenni on knnetty yli viisi cm pois vartalosta tai lhell olevista henkilist pitkaikaistenlhetys- tai kyttjaksojen aikana. Jos antenni on knnetty alle viisi 5 cm kyttjst, on suositeltavaa, ett kyttj rajoittaa altistumisaikaa. Afin de respecter les limitations en matire dexposition aux frquences radiolectriques dfinies par les normes ANSI C95.1, il est recommand aux utilisateurs dordinateurs portables dots dadaptateurs client pour carte PC ou aux personnes se trouvant proximit de se placer plus de 5 cm de lantenne de ladaptateur lors de longues priodes de transmission ou de fonctionnement. Si lutilisateur se trouve moins de 5 cm de lantenne, il est prfrable de limiter le temps dexposition. In bereinstimmung mit den in den Sicherheitsstandards ANSI C95.1 verzeichneten Hchstwerten fr den Kontakt mit Radiofrequenz (RF) wird fr die Benutzung eines Laptops mit PC-Adapterkarten fr Clients empfohlen, bei lngerer Inbetriebnahme oder Datenbertragung die integrierte Antenne des Adapters mindestens 5 cm vom Benutzer und anderen sich in der Nhe aufhaltenden Personen entfernt aufzustellen. Befindet sich die Antenne weniger als 5 cm vom Benutzer entfernt, sollte die Benutzungsdauer des Gerts eingeschrnkt werden. In conformit con i limiti sullesposizione a frequenze radio stabiliti nelle direttive ANSI C95.1, quando si utilizza un computer portatile con una scheda PC dotata di adattatore client consigliabile mantenere lantenna integrata delladattatore a pi di 5 cm di distanza durante periodi di esposizione prolungati. Se lantenna posizionata a meno di 5 cm di distanza dallutente, consigliabile limitare i tempi di esposizione alle frequenze. Du m overholde begrensningene for RF-eksponering som er fastsatt i ANSI C95.1-standardene. Derfor anbefaler vi, nr du bruker en brbar PC med et klientkort i PC-format, at kortets innebygde antenne plasseres mer enn 5 cm fra deg eller personer i nrheten under lengre perioder med overfring eller bruk. Hvis antennen er plassert mindre enn 5 cm fra brukeren, anbefaler vi at brukeren begrenser eksponeringstiden. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows B-4 OL-1394-06 Appendix B Translated Safety Warnings Warning for Laptop Users Aviso Para estar em conformidade com os limites de exposio RF estabelecidos nas normas ANSI C95.1 recomenda-se que, aquando da utilizao de um laptop com um adaptador de cliente PC card, a antena integrada do adaptador esteja posicionada a mais de 5 cm do seu corpo ou de pessoas na vizinhana durante longos perodos de tempo de transmisso ou operao. Se a antena estiver posicionada a menos de 5 cm do utilizador, recomenda-se que o utilizador limite o tempo de exposio. Advertencia!
Para cumplir los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencia (RF) que se establecen en la norma ANSI C95.1, al utilizar un equipo porttil con un adaptador cliente de tarjeta PC, site la antena del adaptador al menos a 2 pulgadas(5 cm) del usuario o de las personas adyacentes durante periodos largos de transmisin o funcionamiento. Si la distancia es inferior a 2 pulgadas (5 cm), se recomienda limitar el tiempo de exposicin. Varning!
Fr att flja de regler fr radiosndare som utfrdats enligt ANSI-standarden C95.1, rekommenderar vi att PC Card-adapterns inbyggda antenn befinner sig minst 5 cm frn dig sjlv och andra personer nr du anvnder en brbar dator med PC Card-adapter under en lngre tid. Om antennen befinner sig mindre n 5 cm frn anvndaren, rekommenderar vi inte anvndning under lngre tid. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows B-5 Warning for Laptop Users Appendix B Translated Safety Warnings Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows B-6 OL-1394-06 A P P E N D I X C Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information This appendix provides declarations of conformity and regulatory information for the Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters. The following topics are covered in this appendix:
Manufacturers Federal Communication Commission Declaration of Conformity Statement, page C-2
Department of Communications Canada, page C-3
European Community, Switzerland, Norway, Iceland, and Liechtenstein, page C-4
Declaration of Conformity for RF Exposure, page C-6
Guidelines for Operating Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters in Japan, page C-6 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows C-1 Manufacturers Federal Communication Commission Declaration of Conformity Statement Appendix C Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information Manufacturers Federal Communication Commission Declaration of Conformity Statement Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Models: AIR-PCM341, AIR-PCM342, AIR-LMC341, AIR-LMC342, AIR-PCI341, AIR-PCI342, AIR-PCM351, AIR-PCM352, AIR-LMC351, AIR-LMC352, AIR-PCI351, AIR-PCI352, AIR-PCM350-A-K9, AIR-PCM350-40-A-K9, AIR-LMC350-A-K9, AIR-LMC350-40-A-K9, AIR-PCI350-A-K9, AIR-PCI350-10-A-K9, AIR-MPI350-xx-A-K9 (where xx is the OEM code), AIR-CB20A-A-K9, AIR-CB20A-A-K9-4 FCC Certification Number:
LDK102038 (AIR-PCM34x), LDK102035 (AIR-LMC34x and AIR-PCI34x), LDK102040 (AIR-xxx35x), LDK102042 (AIR-MPI350), LDK102044 (AIR-CB20A) Manufacturer:
Cisco Systems, Inc. 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose, CA 95134-1706 USA This device complies with Part 15 rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential environment. This equipment generates, uses, and radiates radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to correct the interference by one of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician. Caution The Part 15 radio device operates on a non-interference basis with other devices operating at this frequency when using integrated antennas or those listed in Table C-1. Any changes or modification to the product not expressly approved by Cisco could void the users authority to operate this device. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows C-2 OL-1394-06 Appendix C Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information Department of Communications Canada Caution Within the 5.15-to-5.25-GHz band, UNII devices are restricted to indoor operations to reduce any potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite Systems (MSS) operations. Table C-1 2.4-GHz Antennas Cisco Part Number AIR-ANT3338 AIR-ANT1949 AIR-ANT4121 AIR-ANT3549 AIR-ANT2012 AIR-ANT1729 AIR-ANT2506 AIR-ANT3213 AIR-ANT1728 AIR-ANT3195 AIR-ANT4941 AIR-ANT5959 Model Parabolic dish Yagi Omni-directional Patch Spatial diversity Patch Omni-directional Omni-directional Omni-directional Patch Dipole Omni-directional Gain 21 13.5 12.0 8.5 6.5 6.0 5.1 5.0 5.0 3.0 2.2 2.0 Note AIR-ANT3338 is approved for use only with LM cards. Department of Communications Canada Canadian Compliance Statement This Class B Digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Cet appareil numerique de la classe B respecte les exigences du Reglement sur le material broilleur du Canada. This device complies with Class B Limits of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows C-3 European Community, Switzerland, Norway, Iceland, and Liechtenstein Appendix C Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information Cisco Aironet 2.4-GHz 11-Mbps client adapters are certified to the requirements of RSS-139-1 and RSS-210 for 2.4-GHz spread spectrum devices, and Cisco Aironet 5-GHz 54-Mbps client adapters are certified to the requirements of RSS-210 for 5-GHz devices. The use of these devices in a system operating either partially or completely outdoors may require the user to obtain a license for the system according to the Canadian regulations. For further information, contact your local Industry Canada office. European Community, Switzerland, Norway, Iceland, and Liechtenstein Declaration of Conformity with Regard to the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC English:
Deutsch:
Dansk:
Espaol:
Franais:
slenska:
Italiano:
This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Dieses Gert entspricht den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den weiteren entsprecheneden Vorgaben der Richtlinie 1999/5/EU. Dette udstyr er i overensstemmelse med de vsentlige krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i Directiv 1999/5/EF. Este equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales asi como con otras disposiciones de la Directive 1999/5/EC.
1999/5/E. Cet appareil est conforme aux exigencies essentialles et aux autres dispositions pertinantes de la Direc-
tive 1999/5/EC. essi bnaur samrmist lgbonum krfum og rum kvum tilskipunar 1999/5/ESB. Questo apparato conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed agli altri principi sanciti dalla Direttiva 1999/5/EC. Nederlands:
Deze apparatuur voldoet aan de belangrijkste eisen en andere voorzieningen van richtlijn 1999/5/EC. Norsk:
Dette utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i EU-directiv 1999/5/EC. Portugus:
Este equipamento satisfaz os requisitos essenciais e outras provises da Directiva 1999/5/EC. Suomalainen:
Svenska:
Tm laite tytt direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleelliset vaatimukset ja on siin asetettujen muidenkin ehtojen mukainen. Denna utrustning r i verensstmmelse med de vsentliga kraven och andra relevanta bestmmelser i Direktiv 1999/5/EC. The Declaration of Conformity related to this product can be found at the following URL:
http://www.ciscofax.com. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows C-4 OL-1394-06 Appendix C Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information European Community, Switzerland, Norway, Iceland, and Liechtenstein 2.4-GHz Client Adapters For the 340 series, the following standards were applied:
Radio: ETS 300.328
EMC: ETS 300.826
Safety: EN 60950 The following CE mark is affixed to the 340 series equipment:
5 2 3 9 4 For the 350 series, the following standards were applied:
Radio: EN 300.328-1, EN 300.328-2
EMC: EN 301 489-1, EN 301 489-17
Safety: EN 60950 The following CE mark is affixed to the 350 series equipment (except for the 350 series mini PCI card, or AIR-MPI350):
0650 1 9 0 3 5 The above CE mark is required as of April 8, 2000 but might change in the future. The following CE mark is affixed to the 350 series mini PCI card (AIR-MPI350):
Note Note This equipment is intended to be used in all EU and EFTA countries. Outdoor use may be restricted to certain frequencies and/or may require a license for operation. For more details, contact your customer service representative. Combinations of power levels and antennas resulting in a radiated power level above 100 mW equivalent isotropic radiated power (EIRP) are considered as not compliant with the above mentioned directive and are not allowed for use within the European community and other countries that have adopted the European R&TTE directive 1999/5/EC or the CEPT recommendation Rec 70.03 or both. For more details on legal combinations of power levels and antennas, refer to the Maximum Power Levels and Antenna Gains section on page D-4. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows C-5 Declaration of Conformity for RF Exposure 5-GHz Client Adapters Appendix C Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information For the 5-GHz client adapters, the following standards were applied:
Radio: EN 301.893
EMC: EN 301.489-1, EN 301.489-17
Safety: EN 60950 The following CE mark is affixed to the 5-GHz equipment:
5 2 3 9 4 Declaration of Conformity for RF Exposure The radio module has been evaluated under FCC Bulletin OET 65C and found compliant to the requirements as set forth in CFR 47 Sections 2.1091, 2.1093, and 15.247 (b) (4) addressing RF Exposure from radio frequency devices. Guidelines for Operating Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters in Japan This section provides guidelines for avoiding interference when operating Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters in Japan. These guidelines are provided in both Japanese and English. Japanese Translation 03-5549-6500 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows C-6 8 6 7 3 4 OL-1394-06 Appendix C Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information Guidelines for Operating Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters in Japan English Translation This equipment operates in the same frequency bandwidth as industrial, scientific, and medical devices such as microwave ovens and mobile object identification (RF-ID) systems (licensed premises radio stations and unlicensed specified low-power radio stations) used in factory production lines. 1. Before using this equipment, make sure that no premises radio stations or specified low-power radio stations of RF-ID are used in the vicinity. 2. 3. If this equipment causes RF interference to a premises radio station of RF-ID, promptly change the frequency or stop using the device; contact the number below and ask for recommendations on avoiding radio interference, such as setting partitions. If this equipment causes RF interference to a specified low-power radio station of RF-ID, contact the number below. Contact Number: 03-5549-6500 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows C-7 Guidelines for Operating Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters in Japan Appendix C Declarations of Conformity and Regulatory Information Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows C-8 OL-1394-06 A P P E N D I X D Channels, Power Levels, and Antenna Gains This appendix lists the IEEE 802.11a and IEEE 802.11b channels supported by the world's regulatory domains as well as the maximum power levels and antenna gains allowed per domain. The following topics are covered in this appendix:
Channels, page D-2
Maximum Power Levels and Antenna Gains, page D-4 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows D-1 Appendix D Channels, Power Levels, and Antenna Gains Channels Channels IEEE 802.11a The channel identifiers, channel center frequencies, and regulatory domains of each IEEE 802.11a 20-MHz-wide channel are shown in Table D-1. Table D-1 Channels for IEEE 802.11a Regulatory Domains Channel Identifier 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 52 56 60 64 149 153 157 161 Frequency
(in MHz) 5170 5180 5190 5200 5210 5220 5230 5240 5260 5280 5300 5320 5745 5765 5785 5805 Americas (-A) Japan (-J) Singapore (-S) Taiwan (-T) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Note All channel sets are restricted to indoor usage except the Americas (-A), which allows for indoor and outdoor use on channels 52 through 64 in the United States. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows D-2 OL-1394-06 Appendix D Channels, Power Levels, and Antenna Gains Channels IEEE 802.11b The channel identifiers, channel center frequencies, and regulatory domains of each IEEE 802.11b 22-MHz-wide channel are shown in Table D-2. Table D-2 Channels for IEEE 802.11b Channel Identifier 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Frequency
(in MHz) 2412 2417 2422 2427 2432 2437 2442 2447 2452 2457 2462 2467 2472 2484 Regulatory Domains Americas (-A) EMEA (-E) Israel (-I) Japan (-J) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Note Mexico is included in the Americas regulatory domain; however, channels 1 through 8 are for indoor use only while channels 9 through 11 can be used indoors and outdoors. Users are responsible for ensuring that the channel set configuration is in compliance with the regulatory standards of Mexico. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows D-3 Maximum Power Levels and Antenna Gains Appendix D Channels, Power Levels, and Antenna Gains Maximum Power Levels and Antenna Gains IEEE 802.11a IEEE 802.11b An improper combination of power level and antenna gain can result in equivalent isotropic radiated power (EIRP) above the amount allowed per regulatory domain. Table D-3 indicates the maximum power levels and antenna gains allowed for each IEEE 802.11a regulatory domain. Table D-3 Maximum Power Levels Per Antenna Gain for IEEE 802.11a Regulatory Domain Americas (-A)
(160 mW EIRP maximum on channels 34-48, 800 mW EIRP maximum on channels 52-64) Japan (-J)
(10 mW/MHz EIRP maximum) Singapore (-S)
(100 mW EIRP maximum) Taiwan (-T)
(800 mW EIRP maximum) Maximum Power Level (mW) with 6-dBi Antenna Gain 20 20 20 20 An improper combination of power level and antenna gain can result in equivalent isotropic radiated power (EIRP) above the amount allowed per regulatory domain. Table D-4 indicates the maximum power levels and antenna gains allowed for each IEEE 802.11b regulatory domain. Table D-4 Maximum Power Levels Per Antenna Gain for IEEE 802.11b Regulatory Domain Americas (-A)
(4 W EIRP maximum) Antenna Gain (dBi) Maximum Power Level (mW) 0 2.2 5.2 6 8.5 12 13.5 21 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 20 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows D-4 OL-1394-06 Appendix D Channels, Power Levels, and Antenna Gains Maximum Power Levels and Antenna Gains Table D-4 Maximum Power Levels Per Antenna Gain for IEEE 802.11b (continued) Regulatory Domain EMEA (-E)
(100 mW EIRP maximum) Israel (-I)
(100 mW EIRP maximum) Japan (-J)
(10 mW/MHz EIRP maximum) Antenna Gain (dBi) Maximum Power Level (mW) 0 2.2 5.2 6 8.5 12 13.5 21 0 2.2 5.2 6 8.5 12 13.5 21 0 2.2 5.2 6 8.5 12 13.5 21 100 50 30 30 5 5 5 1 100 50 30 30 5 5 5 1 50 30 30 30 n/a n/a 5 n/a OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows D-5 Maximum Power Levels and Antenna Gains Appendix D Channels, Power Levels, and Antenna Gains Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows D-6 OL-1394-06 A P P E N D I X E Configuring the Client Adapter through Windows XP This appendix explains how to configure and use the client adapter with Windows XP. The following topics are covered in this appendix:
Overview, page E-2
Configuring the Client Adapter, page E-4
Associating to an Access Point Using Windows XP, page E-16
Viewing the Current Status of Your Client Adapter, page E-17 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows E-1 Overview Overview Appendix E Configuring the Client Adapter through Windows XP This appendix provides instructions for minimally configuring the client adapter through Windows XP
(instead of through ACU) as well as for enabling one of the four security options that are available for use with this operating system. The Overview of Security Features section below describes each of these options so that you can make an informed decision before you begin the configuration process. In addition, the appendix also provides basic information on using Windows XP to specify the networks to which the client adapter associates and to view the current status of your client adapter. Note If you require more information about configuring or using your client adapter with Windows XP, refer to Microsofts documentation for Windows XP. Overview of Security Features Static WEP Keys When you use your client adapter with Windows XP, you can protect your data as it is transmitted through your wireless network by encrypting it through the use of wired equivalent privacy (WEP) encryption keys. With WEP encryption, the transmitting device encrypts each packet with a WEP key, and the receiving device uses that same key to decrypt each packet. The WEP keys used to encrypt and decrypt transmitted data can be statically associated with your adapter or dynamically created as part of the EAP authentication process. The information in the Static WEP Keys and EAP (with Dynamic WEP Keys) sections below can help you to decide which type of WEP keys you want to use. Dynamic WEP keys with EAP offer a higher degree of security than static WEP keys. WEP keys, whether static or dynamic, are either 40 or 128 bits in length. 128-bit WEP keys offer a greater level of security than 40-bit WEP keys. Each device within your wireless network can be assigned up to four static WEP keys. If a device receives a packet that is not encrypted with the appropriate key (as the WEP keys of all devices that are to communicate with each other must match), the device discards the packet and never delivers it to the intended receiver. Static WEP keys are write-only and temporary; therefore, they cannot be read back from the client adapter, and they are lost when power to the adapter is removed or the Windows device is rebooted. Although the keys are temporary, you do not need to re-enter them each time the client adapter is inserted or the Windows device is rebooted. This is because the keys are stored (in an encrypted format for security reasons) in the registry of the Windows device. When the driver loads and reads the client adapters registry parameters, it also finds the static WEP keys, unencrypts them, and stores them in volatile memory on the adapter. EAP (with Dynamic WEP Keys) The new standard for wireless LAN security, as defined by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), is called 802.1X for 802.11, or simply 802.1X. An access point that supports 802.1X and its protocol, Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP), acts as the interface between a wireless client and an authentication server, such as a Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) server, to which the access point communicates over the wired network. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows E-2 OL-1394-06 Appendix E Configuring the Client Adapter through Windows XP Overview Three 802.1X authentication types are available when configuring your client adapter through Windows XP:
EAP-TLSThis authentication type is enabled or disabled through the operating system and uses a dynamic session-based WEP key, which is derived from the client adapter and RADIUS server, to encrypt data. RADIUS servers that support EAP-TLS include Cisco Secure ACS version 3.0 or greater and Cisco Access Registrar version 1.8 or greater. Note EAP-TLS requires the use of a certificate. Refer to Microsofts documentation for information on downloading and installing the certificate.
Protected EAP (or PEAP)PEAP authentication is designed to support One-Time Password
(OTP), Windows NT or 2000 domain, and LDAP user databases over a wireless LAN. It is based on EAP-TLS authentication but uses a password or PIN instead of a client certificate for authentication. PEAP is enabled or disabled through the operating system and uses a dynamic session-based WEP key, which is derived from the client adapter and RADIUS server, to encrypt data. If your network uses an OTP user database, PEAP requires you to enter either a hardware token password or a software token PIN to start the EAP authentication process and gain access to the network. If your network uses a Windows NT or 2000 domain user database or an LDAP user database (such as NDS), PEAP requires you to enter your username, password, and domain name in order to start the authentication process. RADIUS servers that support PEAP authentication include Cisco Secure ACS version 3.1 or greater. Note To use PEAP authentication, you must install the PEAP security module during installation or Service Pack 1 for Windows XP. This Service Pack includes Microsofts PEAP supplicant, which supports a Windows username and password only and does not interoperate with Ciscos PEAP supplicant. To use Ciscos PEAP supplicant, install ACU after Service Pack 1 for Windows XP. Otherwise, Ciscos PEAP supplicant is overwritten by Microsofts PEAP supplicant.
EAP-SIMEAP-SIM authentication is designed for use in public wireless LANs and requires clients equipped with PCSC-compliant smartcard readers. The EAP-SIM supplicant included in the Install Wizard file supports only Gemplus SIM+ cards; however, an updated supplicant is available that supports standard GSM-SIM cards as well as more recent versions of the EAP-SIM protocol. The new supplicant is available for download from the ftpeng FTP server at the following URL:
ftp://ftpeng.cisco.com/ftp/pwlan/eapsim/CiscoEapSim.dll Please note that the above requirements are necessary but not sufficient to successfully perform EAP-SIM authentication. Typically, you are also required to enter into a service contract with a WLAN service provider, who must support EAP-SIM authentication in its network. Also, while your PCSC smartcard reader may be able to read standard GSM-SIM cards or chips, EAP-SIM authentication usually requires your GSM cell phone account to be provisioned for WLAN service by your service provider. EAP-SIM is enabled or disabled through the operating system and uses a dynamic session-based WEP key, which is derived from the client adapter and RADIUS server, to encrypt data. EAP-SIM requires you to enter a user verification code, or PIN, for communication with the SIM card. You can choose to have the PIN stored in your computer or to be prompted to enter it after a reboot or prior to every authentication attempt. RADIUS servers that support EAP-SIM include Cisco Access Registrar version 3.0 or greater. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows E-3 Configuring the Client Adapter Appendix E Configuring the Client Adapter through Windows XP When you enable Require EAP on your access point and configure your client adapter for EAP-TLS, PEAP, or EAP-SIM using Windows XP, authentication to the network occurs in the following sequence:
1. The client adapter associates to an access point and begins the authentication process. Note The client does not gain full access to the network until authentication between the client and the RADIUS server is successful. 2. Communicating through the access point, the client and RADIUS server complete the authentication process, with the password (PEAP), certificate (EAP-TLS), or internal key stored on the SIM card and in the service providers Authentication Center (EAP-SIM) being the shared secret for authentication. The password or internal key is never transmitted during the process. 3. If authentication is successful, the client and RADIUS server derive a dynamic, session-based WEP key that is unique to the client. 4. The RADIUS server transmits the key to the access point using a secure channel on the wired LAN. 5. For the length of a session, or time period, the access point and the client use this key to encrypt or decrypt all unicast packets (and broadcast packets if the access point is set up to do so) that travel between them. Note Refer to the IEEE 802.11 Standard for more information on 802.1X authentication and to the following URL for additional information on RADIUS servers:
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/software/ios120/12cgcr/secur_c/scprt2/scrad.htm Configuring the Client Adapter Follow the steps below to configure your client adapter using Windows XP. Note If you installed ACU but intend to use Windows XP to configure the client adapter, open ACU and make sure the Use Another Application to Configure My Wireless Settings option is selected on the Select Profile screen. Note These instructions assume you are using Windows XPs classic view rather than its category view. Step 1 Make sure the client adapters firmware and driver have been installed and the client adapter is inserted in the Windows XP device. Double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and Network Connections. Right-click Wireless Network Connection. Click Properties. The Wireless Network Connection Properties screen appears. Select the Wireless Networks tab. The following screen appears (see Figure E-1). Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows E-4 OL-1394-06 Appendix E Configuring the Client Adapter through Windows XP Configuring the Client Adapter Figure E-1 Wireless Network Connection Properties Screen (Wireless Networks Tab) Step 6 Make sure that the Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings check box is checked. Step 7 Select the SSID of the access point to which you want the client adapter to associate from the list of available networks and click Configure. If the SSID of the access point you want to use is not listed or you are planning to operate the client adapter in an ad hoc network (a computer-to-computer network without access points), click Add. Note The Allow Broadcast SSID to Associate option on the access point must be enabled for the SSID to appear in the list of available networks. The Wireless Network Properties screen appears (see Figure E-2). OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows E-5 Configuring the Client Adapter Appendix E Configuring the Client Adapter through Windows XP Figure E-2 Wireless Network Properties Screen Step 8 Perform one of the following:
If you selected an SSID from the list of available networks, make sure the SSID appears in the Network name (SSID) field. If you clicked Add, enter the case-sensitive SSID of the access point or the ad hoc network to which you want the client adapter to associate in the Network name (SSID) field. Check the Data encryption (WEP enabled) check box if you are planning to use static or dynamic WEP. Step 9 Step 10 Check the Network Authentication (Shared mode) check box if you want to use shared key, rather than open, authentication with the access point. Open authentication enables your client adapter, regardless of its WEP settings, to authenticate and attempt to communicate with an access point. Shared key authentication enables your client adapter to communicate only with access points that have the same WEP key. Cisco recommends that shared key authentication not be used because it presents a security risk. Note If you are planning to use EAP-TLS authentication, do not check this check box. EAP-TLS does not work with shared key authentication because shared key authentication requires the use of a WEP key, and a WEP key is not set for EAP-TLS until after the completion of EAP authentication. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows E-6 OL-1394-06 Appendix E Configuring the Client Adapter through Windows XP Configuring the Client Adapter Step 11 Follow the steps below to enter up to four WEP keys, if you are planning to use static WEP. Note If you are planning to use EAP-TLS, PEAP, or EAP-SIM authentication, which uses dynamic WEP, go to Step 12. a. Obtain the WEP key for the access point (in an infrastructure network) or other clients (in an ad hoc network) from your system administrator and enter it in the Network key field. In order to communicate, the client adapter must use the same WEP key as the access point or other clients. b. Select one of the following WEP key formats:
ASCII charactersSpecifies that the WEP key will be entered in ASCII text, which includes alpha characters, numbers, and punctuation marks. Hexadecimal digitsSpecifies that the WEP key will be entered in hexadecimal characters, which include 0-9, A-F, and a-f. Note ASCII text WEP keys are not supported on Cisco Aironet 1200 Series Access Points, so you must select the Hexadecimal digits option if you are planning to use your client adapter with these access points. c. Select one of the following WEP key lengths:
104 bits (13 characters/26 digits)You can select this option (or the 40 bits option) if your client adapter supports 128-bit WEP. 40 bits (5 characters/10 digits)You must select this option if your client adapter supports only 40-bit WEP. d. In the Key index (advanced) field, select the number of the WEP key you are creating (0, 1, 2, or 3). Note The WEP key must be assigned to the same number on both the client adapter and the access point (in an infrastructure network) or other clients (in an ad hoc network). e. Repeat the previous steps if you want to enter another WEP key. Step 12 Check the The key is provided for me automatically check box if you are planning to use EAP-TLS, PEAP, or EAP-SIM, which uses dynamic WEP keys. Step 13 Check the This is a computer-to-computer (ad hoc mode) network; wireless access points are not used check box if you are planning to operate the client adapter in an ad hoc network. Step 14 Click OK to save your settings and to add this SSID to the list of preferred networks (see Figure E-1). The client adapter automatically attempts to associate to the network(s) in the order in which they are listed. Step 15 Perform one of the following if you are planning to use EAP authentication:
If you are planning to use EAP-TLS authentication, follow the instructions in the Enabling EAP-TLS Authentication section below. If you are planning to use PEAP authentication, follow the instructions in the Enabling PEAP Authentication section on page E-10. If you are planning to use EAP-SIM authentication, follow the instructions in the Enabling EAP-SIM Authentication section on page E-14. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows E-7 Configuring the Client Adapter Appendix E Configuring the Client Adapter through Windows XP Enabling EAP-TLS Authentication Follow the steps below to prepare the client adapter to use EAP-TLS authentication, provided you have completed the initial configuration. Step 1 Click the Authentication tab on the Wireless Network Connection Properties screen. The following screen appears (see Figure E-3). Note In Service Pack 1 for Windows XP, the Authentication tab has moved from its previous location. To access it, click the Wireless Networks tab, select the network that you are configuring in the Preferred network list, and click Properties. Figure E-3 Wireless Network Connection Properties Screen (Authentication Tab) Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Check the Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1X check box. For EAP type, select Smart Card or other Certificate. Click Properties. The Smart Card or other Certificate Properties screen appears (see Figure E-4). Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows E-8 OL-1394-06 Appendix E Configuring the Client Adapter through Windows XP Configuring the Client Adapter Figure E-4 Smart Card or other Certificate Properties Screen Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Select the Use a certificate on this computer option. Check the Validate server certificate check box if server certificate validation is required. If you want to specify the name of the server to connect to, check the Connect only if server name ends with check box and enter the appropriate server name suffix in the field below. Note If you enter a server name and the client adapter connects to a server that does not match the name you entered, you are prompted to accept or cancel the connection during the authentication process. Note If you leave this field blank, the server name is not verified, and a connection is established as long as the certificate is valid. Step 8 Make sure that the name of the certificate authority from which the server certificate was downloaded appears in the Trusted root certificate authority field. Note If you leave this field blank, you are prompted to accept a connection to the root certification authority during the authentication process. Step 9 Click OK twice to save your settings. The configuration is complete. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows E-9 Configuring the Client Adapter Appendix E Configuring the Client Adapter through Windows XP Step 10 If a pop-up message appears above the system tray informing you that you need to accept a certificate to begin the EAP authentication process, click the message and follow the instructions provided to accept the certificate. Note You should not be prompted to accept a certificate for future authentication attempts. After you accept one, the same certificate is used subsequently. Step 11 Step 12 If a message appears indicating the root certification authority for the servers certificate, and it is the correct certification authority, click OK to accept the connection. Otherwise, click Cancel. If a message appears indicating the server to which your client adapter is connected, and it is the correct server to connect to, click OK to accept the connection. Otherwise, click Cancel. The client adapter should now EAP authenticate. Note Whenever the computer reboots and you enter your Windows username and password, the EAP authentication process begins automatically and the client adapter should EAP authenticate. Step 13 To verify authentication, double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and Network Connections. The status appears to the right of your Wireless Network Connection. Click View and Refresh to obtain the current status. If the client adapter is authenticated, the status reads Authentication succeeded. Enabling PEAP Authentication Follow the steps below to prepare the client adapter to use PEAP authentication, provided you have completed the initial configuration. Step 1 Click the Authentication tab on the Wireless Network Connection Properties screen. The following screen appears (see Figure E-5). Note In Service Pack 1 for Windows XP, the Authentication tab has moved from its previous location. To access it, click the Wireless Networks tab, select the network that you are configuring in the Preferred network list, and click Properties. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows E-10 OL-1394-06 Appendix E Configuring the Client Adapter through Windows XP Configuring the Client Adapter Figure E-5 Wireless Network Connection Properties Screen (Authentication Tab) Step 2 Step 3 Check the Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1X check box. For EAP type, select PEAP. Click Properties. The PEAP Properties screen appears (see Figure E-6). Figure E-6 PEAP Properties Screen OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows E-11 Configuring the Client Adapter Appendix E Configuring the Client Adapter through Windows XP Step 4 Step 5 Check the Validate server certificate check box if server certificate validation is required
(recommended). If you want to specify the name of the server to connect to, check the Connect only if server name ends with check box and enter the appropriate server name suffix in the field below. Note If you enter a server name and the client adapter connects to a server that does not match the name you entered, you are prompted to accept or cancel the connection during the authentication process. Note If you leave this field blank, the server name is not verified, and a connection is established as long as the certificate is valid. Step 6 Make sure that the name of the certificate authority from which the server certificate was downloaded appears in the Trusted root certificate authority (CA) field. If necessary, click the arrow on the drop-down menu and select the appropriate name. Note If you leave this field blank, you are prompted to accept a connection to the root certification authority during the authentication process. Step 7 Step 8 Check the Connect only if server is signed by specified trusted root CA check box if you want to ensure that the certificate server uses the trusted root certificate specified in the field above. This prevents the client from establishing connections to rogue access points. Currently Generic Token Card is the only second phase EAP type available. Click Properties. The Generic Token Card Properties screen appears (see Figure E-7). Figure E-7 Generic Token Card Properties Screen Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows E-12 OL-1394-06 Appendix E Configuring the Client Adapter through Windows XP Configuring the Client Adapter Step 9 Select either the Static Password (Windows NT/2000, LDAP) or the One Time Password option, depending on your user database. Step 10 Perform one of the following:
If you selected the Static Password (Windows NT/2000, LDAP) option in Step 9, go to Step 11. If you selected the One Time Password option in Step 9, check one or both of the following check boxes to specify the type of tokens that will be supported for one-time passwords:
Support Hardware TokenA hardware token device obtains the one-time password. You must use your hardware token device to obtain the one-time password and enter the password when prompted for your user credentials. Support Software TokenThe PEAP supplicant works with a software token program to retrieve the one-time password. You have to enter only the PIN, not the one-time password. If you check this check box, you must also select from the Supported Type drop-down box the software token software that is installed on the client (such as Secure Computing SofToken Version 1.3, Secure Computing SofToken II 2.0, or RSA SecurID Software Token v 2.5), and if Secure Computing SofToken Version 1.3 is selected, you must find the software program path using the Browse button. Note The SofToken Program Path field is unavailable if a software token program other than Secure Computing SofToken Version 1.3 is selected. Step 11 Click OK three times to save your settings. The configuration is complete. Step 12 Refer to the Using PEAP section on page 6-16 for instructions on authenticating using PEAP. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows E-13 Configuring the Client Adapter Appendix E Configuring the Client Adapter through Windows XP Enabling EAP-SIM Authentication Follow the steps below to prepare the client adapter to use EAP-SIM authentication, provided you have completed the initial configuration. Step 1 Click the Authentication tab on the Wireless Network Connection Properties screen. The following screen appears (see Figure E-8). Note In Service Pack 1 for Windows XP, the Authentication tab has moved from its previous location. To access it, click the Wireless Networks tab, select the network that you are configuring in the Preferred network list, and click Properties. Figure E-8 Wireless Network Connection Properties Screen (Authentication Tab) Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Check the Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1X check box. For EAP type, select SIM Authentication. Click Properties. The SIM Authentication Properties screen appears (see Figure E-9). Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows E-14 OL-1394-06 Appendix E Configuring the Client Adapter through Windows XP Configuring the Client Adapter Figure E-9 SIM Authentication Properties Screen Step 5 To access any resources (data or commands) on the SIM, the EAP-SIM supplicant must provide a valid PIN to the SIM card, which must match the PIN stored on the SIM. Select one of the following options to specify how the EAP-SIM supplicant should handle the SIM cards PIN:
Ask for my PIN once after I turn my computer on (recommended)The software does not permanently store the PIN. It prompts you for the PIN once, on the first authentication of every session, where a session is defined as the time between power-up and shutdown or reboot.
Ask for my PIN every time the network asks for authenticationThe software never stores the PIN; it prompts you for the PIN every time an EAP-SIM authentication is performed. This option is not recommended if your client will be roaming between access points or if session timeouts are implemented (such as for accounting and security purposes).
Let me give my PIN to the computer now and never ask me again; PIN will be encrypted and stored on computer (not recommended)You need to enter the PIN only once, in the Enter PIN edit box below this option. The software stores the PIN in the registry and retrieves it from there when required. If you select this option, you must enter the PIN now. The PIN is validated when an authentication attempt is made. Note This option is not recommended because it enables others to use the SIM without knowing the PIN. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows E-15 Associating to an Access Point Using Windows XP Appendix E Configuring the Client Adapter through Windows XP Step 6 Click OK twice to save your settings. The configuration is complete. If you chose to store the PIN in the computers registry, the EAP authentication process begins automatically, and the client adapter should EAP authenticate and use the saved PIN to access the SIM card. Note If the stored PIN is wrong and therefore rejected by the SIM, the EAP-SIM supplicant temporarily changes the prompt mode to the default setting (Ask for my PIN once after I turn my computer on) in order to prevent the SIM from locking up. Unless changed manually, this setting stays in effect until your computer is powered off. Change your stored PIN on the SIM Authentication Properties screen. If you chose to be prompted for the PIN after a power-up or reboot or at every authentication request, a pop-up message appears above the Windows system tray informing you that you need to enter your credentials to access the network. Click the message, enter your PIN, and click OK. The client adapter should now EAP authenticate. To verify authentication, double-click My Computer, Control Panel, and Network Connections. The status appears to the right of your Wireless Network Connection. Click View and Refresh to obtain the current status. If the client adapter is authenticated, the status reads Authentication succeeded. Step 7 Note ACU and the Windows Wireless Network Connection icon in the Windows XP system tray may indicate a connection status when authentication is still in the pending state or the authentication server fails to respond. Associating to an Access Point Using Windows XP Windows XP causes the client adapters driver to automatically attempt to associate to the first network in the list of preferred networks (see Figure E-1). If the adapter fails to associate or loses association, it automatically switches to the next network in the list of preferred networks.The adapter does not switch networks as long as it remains associated to the access point. To force the client adapter to associate to a different access point, you must select a different network from the list of available networks (and click Configure and OK). Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows E-16 OL-1394-06 Appendix E Configuring the Client Adapter through Windows XP Viewing the Current Status of Your Client Adapter Viewing the Current Status of Your Client Adapter To view the status of your client adapter, click the icon of the two connected computers in the Windows system tray. The Wireless Network Connection Status screen appears (see Figure E-10). Figure E-10 Wireless Network Connection Status Screen OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows E-17 Viewing the Current Status of Your Client Adapter Appendix E Configuring the Client Adapter through Windows XP Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows E-18 OL-1394-06 A P P E N D I X F Performing a Site Survey This appendix explains how ACUs site survey tool can be used when conducting a site survey. The following topics are covered in this appendix:
Overview, page F-2
Specifying Signal Strength Units, page F-3
Using Passive Mode, page F-3
Using Active Mode, page F-7
Forcing the Client Adapter to Reassociate, page F-13 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows F-1 Overview Overview Appendix F Performing a Site Survey Note This appendix applies only to people who are responsible for conducting a site survey to determine the best placement of infrastructure devices within a wireless network. ACUs site survey tool can assist you in conducting a site survey. The tool operates at the RF level and is used to determine the best placement and coverage (overlap) for your networks infrastructure devices. During a site survey, the current status of the network is read from the client adapter and displayed four times per second so you can accurately gauge network performance. The feedback that you receive can help you to eliminate areas of low RF signal levels that can result in a loss of connection between the client adapter and its associated access point (or other infrastructure device). The site survey tool can be operated in two modes:
Passive ModeThis is the default site survey mode. It does not initiate any RF network traffic; it simply listens to the traffic that the client adapter hears and displays the results. Follow the instructions in the Using Passive Mode section on page F-3 to activate the passive mode.
Active ModeThis mode causes the client adapter to actively send or receive low-level RF packets to or from its associated access point and provides information on the success rate. It also enables you to set parameters governing how the site survey is performed (such as the data rate). Follow the instructions in the Using Active Mode section on page F-7 to activate the active mode. Guidelines Keep the following guidelines in mind when preparing to perform a site survey:
Perform the site survey when the RF link is functioning with all other systems and noise sources operational.
Execute the site survey entirely from the mobile station.
When using the active mode, conduct the site survey with all variables set to operational values. Additional Information Also consider the following operating and environmental conditions when performing a site survey:
Data ratesSensitivity and range are inversely proportional to data bit rates. Therefore, the maximum radio range is achieved at the lowest workable data rate, and a decrease in receiver threshold sensitivity occurs as the radio data increases.
Antenna type and placementProper antenna configuration is a critical factor in maximizing radio range. As a general rule, range increases in proportion to antenna height.
Physical environmentClear or open areas provide better radio range than closed or filled areas. Also, the less cluttered the work environment, the greater the range. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows F-2 OL-1394-06 Appendix F Performing a Site Survey Specifying Signal Strength Units
ObstructionsA physical obstruction such as metal shelving or a steel pillar can hinder the performance of wireless devices. Avoid placing these devices in a location where a metal barrier is between the sending and receiving antennas.
Building materialsRadio penetration is greatly influenced by the building material used in construction. For example, drywall construction allows greater range than concrete blocks, and metal or steel construction is a barrier to radio signals. Note Refer to the documentation for your infrastructure device for additional information on factors affecting placement. Specifying Signal Strength Units Follow the steps below to specify how signal strength units are displayed on the site survey screens. Open ACU. Click the Preferences icon or select Preferences from the Options drop-down menu. The Aironet Client Utility Preferences screen appears. Under Signal Strength Display Units, select one of the following options:
PercentDisplays the signal strength as a percentage.
dBmDisplays the signal strength in decibels with respect to milliwatts. Click OK to save your changes. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Using Passive Mode Step 1 Open ACU; then click the Site Survey icon or select Site Survey from the Commands drop-down menu. The Site Survey - Passive Mode screen appears, provided a client adapter is installed in your computer and is running. Figure F-1 shows the Site Survey - Passive Mode screen with the signal strength values displayed as percentages, and Figure F-2 shows the top of the same screen with the signal strength values displayed in dBm. Note The name of the current profile appears in parentheses at the top of the screen. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows F-3 Using Passive Mode Appendix F Performing a Site Survey Figure F-1 Site Survey - Passive Mode Screen (with Signal Strength as a Percentage) Figure F-2 Top of Site Survey - Passive Mode Screen (with Signal Strength in dBm) Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows F-4 OL-1394-06 Appendix F Performing a Site Survey Using Passive Mode Table F-1 interprets the information that is displayed on the Site Survey - Passive Mode screen. Table F-1 Site Survey Passive Mode Statistics Statistic Signal Strength Signal Quality
(2.4-GHz client adapters) Noise Level
(2.4-GHz client adapters) Beacons Received
(5-GHz client adapters) Description The signal strength for all received packets. The higher the value and the more green the bar graph is, the stronger the signal. The histogram below the bar graph provides a visual interpretation of the current signal strength. Differences in signal strength are indicated by the following colors: green (strongest), yellow (middle of the range), and red (weakest). Range:
The signal quality for all received packets. The higher the value and the more green the bar graph is, the clearer the signal. 0 to 100% or 95 to 45 dBm The histogram below the bar graph provides a visual interpretation of the current signal quality. Differences in signal quality are indicated by the following colors: green (highest quality), yellow (average), and red (lowest quality). Range:
0 to 100%
Note This setting appears only for 2.4-GHz client adapters and only if you selected signal strength to be displayed as a percentage. See the Specifying Signal Strength Units section on page F-3 for information. The level of background radio frequency energy in the 2.4-GHz band. The lower the value and the more green the bar graph is, the less background noise present. The histogram below the bar graph provides a visual interpretation of the current level of background noise. Differences in background noise level are indicated by the following colors: green (low noise), yellow (middle of the range), and red (high noise). Range:
100 to 45 dBm Note This setting appears only for 2.4-GHz client adapters and only if you selected signal strength to be displayed in dBm. See the Specifying Signal Strength Units section on page F-3 for information. The percentage of beacon packets received versus those expected to be received. The higher the value and the more green the bar graph is, the clearer the signal. Example: The access point sends out 10 beacons per second, so you would expect the client adapter to receive 50 beacon packets in 5 seconds. If it receives only 40 packets, the percentage of beacons received would be 80%. Range:
0 to 100%
Note This setting appears only for 5-GHz client adapters. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows F-5 Using Passive Mode Appendix F Performing a Site Survey Table F-1 Site Survey Passive Mode Statistics (continued) Statistic Link Speed Overall Link Quality Signal to Noise Ratio
(2.4-GHz client adapters) Associated Access Point Access Point IP Address Description In passive mode, the site survey tool monitors transmitted network traffic, and the data rate reflects the rate at which the packets are being transmitted. The Link Speed histogram provides a visual interpretation of the current rate at which your client adapter is transmitting packets. Differences in link speed are indicated by the following colors:
green (fastest), yellow (middle of the range), and red (slowest). Value:
1, 2, 5.5, or 11 Mbps (2.4-GHz client adapters);
6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, or 54 Mbps (5-GHz client adapters) The client adapters ability to communicate with the access point. Value: Not Associated, Poor, Fair, Good, or Excellent Note This setting appears for 2.4-GHz client adapters (but only if you selected signal strength to be displayed as a percentage) and for 5-GHz client adapters. See the Specifying Signal Strength Units section on page F-3 for information. The difference between the signal strength and the noise level. The higher the value, the better the client adapters ability to communicate with the access point. Range:
0 to 90 dB Note This setting appears only for 2.4-GHz client adapters and only if you selected signal strength to be displayed in dBm. See the Specifying Signal Strength Units section on page F-3 for information. The access point to which your client adapter is associated. It is shown only if the client adapter is in infrastructure mode, the access point was configured with a name, and Aironet Extensions are enabled (on access points running Cisco IOS release 12.2(4)JA or greater). The IP address of the access point to which your client adapter is associated. It is shown only if the client adapter is in infrastructure mode, the access point was configured with an IP address, and Aironet Extensions are enabled (on access points running Cisco IOS release 12.2(4)JA or greater). Note If Aironet Extensions are disabled, the IP address of the associated access point is shown as 0.0.0.0. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows F-6 OL-1394-06 Appendix F Performing a Site Survey Using Active Mode Table F-1 Site Survey Passive Mode Statistics (continued) Statistic Channel (Frequency) Description The frequency that your client adapter is currently using as the channel for communications. Value: Dependent on client adapter radio and regulatory domain Step 2 If you want to activate the site survey active mode, go to the Using Active Mode section on page F-7. Otherwise, click OK or Cancel to exit the site survey application. Using Active Mode Follow the steps below to activate the site survey active mode and obtain current information about your client adapters ability to transmit and receive RF packets. Step 1 From the Site Survey - Passive Mode screen (see Figure F-1), click the Setup button. The Site Survey Active Mode Setup screen appears (see Figure F-3). Figure F-3 Site Survey Active Mode Setup Screen OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows F-7 Using Active Mode Appendix F Performing a Site Survey Table F-2 lists and describes the parameters that affect how the site survey is performed. Follow the instructions in the table to set any parameters. Table F-2 Site Survey Active Mode Parameters Parameter Destination MAC Address Continuous Link Test Destination Is Another Cisco/Aironet Device Description The MAC address of the access point (in infrastructure mode) or other clients (in ad hoc mode) that are used in the test. Default: The MAC address of the access point (in infrastructure mode) to which your client adapter is associated Note During the test, the client adapter does not roam to other access points so that the size of a single cell can be determined. Checking this check box causes the test to run until you click OK or Stop. The test loops repeatedly for the number of packets specified in the Number of Packets field. Default: Unchecked Checking this check box indicates that the device you named in the Destination MAC Address field is a Cisco Aironet access point (in infrastructure mode) or client (in ad hoc mode). In this case, packets sent to the client from the Cisco Aironet device contain additional information, such as lost to source, lost to target, and percent retries, and this information is displayed in the Site Survey - Active screen. Number of Packets Packet Size Data Retries 1 to 999 If the device specified in the Destination MAC Address field is not a Cisco Aironet device, do not check this check box. In this case, the test sends out loopback packets, which originate from and return to the client adapter. Default: Checked The number of packets that are sent during the test. Range:
Default: 100 The size of the packets that are sent during the test. Select a size that is typical during normal system use. Range:
Default: 512 The number of times a transmission is retried if an acknowledgment
(Ack) is not returned by the destination device. Default: None 30 to 1450 Retry Value None Default Retries Description No retries will occur. The firmwares default value for retries
(16 for 2.4-GHz client adapters; 32 for 5-GHz client adapters) will be used. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows F-8 OL-1394-06 Appendix F Performing a Site Survey Using Active Mode Table F-2 Site Survey Active Mode Parameters (continued) Parameter Data Rate Delay Between Packets Percent Success Threshold Packet Tx Type Description The bit rate at which packets are transmitted. Rate shifting does not occur during the test because the echo test built into the radio firmware does not support it. Value:
1, 2, 5.5, or 11 Mbps (2.4-GHz client adapters);
6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, or 54 Mbps (5-GHz client adapters) Default: 11 Mbps (2.4-GHz client adapters);
54 Mbps (5-GHz client adapters) 1 to 2048 ms The delay (in milliseconds) between successive transmissions. Range:
Default: 50 ms The percentage of packets that are not lost. This parameter controls the red line on the Percent Successful histogram. Percentages greater than or equal to this value are displayed as green bars; percentages below this value are displayed as yellow bars. Range:
Default: 75 The packet type that is transmitted during the test. Default: Unicast 0 to 100%
Packet Type Unicast Multicast Description When unicast packets are used, the system expects to receive an acknowledgment from the destination, and retries can occur. When multicast packets are used, no packet retries occur during the test. Step 2 Step 3 After setting any parameters, click OK to save the settings. The Site Survey - Passive Mode screen appears (see Figure F-1). Click the Start button to run the site survey test. The Site Survey - Active Mode screen appears. Figure F-4 shows the Site Survey - Active Mode screen with the signal strength values displayed as percentages, and Figure F-5 shows the top of the same screen with the signal strength values displayed in dBm. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows F-9 Using Active Mode Appendix F Performing a Site Survey Figure F-4 Site Survey - Active Mode Screen (with Signal Strength as a Percentage) Figure F-5 Top of Site Survey - Active Mode Screen (with Signal Strength in dBm) Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows F-10 OL-1394-06 Appendix F Performing a Site Survey Using Active Mode Table F-3 interprets the information that is displayed on the Site Survey - Active Mode screen while the site survey test is running. Table F-3 Site Survey Active Mode Statistics Statistic Signal Strength Signal Quality
(2.4-GHz client adapters) Noise Level
(2.4-GHz client adapters) Beacons Received
(5-GHz client adapters) Description The signal strength for all received packets. The higher the value and the more green the bar graph is, the stronger the signal. The histogram below the bar graph provides a visual interpretation of the current signal strength. Differences in signal strength are indicated by the following colors: green (strongest), yellow (middle of the range), and red (weakest). Range:
The signal quality for all received packets. The higher the value and the more green the bar graph is, the clearer the signal. 0 to 100% or 95 to 45 dBm The histogram below the bar graph provides a visual interpretation of the current signal quality. Differences in signal quality are indicated by the following colors: green (highest quality), yellow (average), and red (lowest quality). Range:
0 to 100%
Note This setting appears only for 2.4-GHz client adapters and only if you selected signal strength to be displayed as a percentage. See the Specifying Signal Strength Units section on page F-3 for information. The level of background radio frequency energy in the 2.4-GHz band. The lower the value and the more green the bar graph is, the less background noise present. The histogram below the bar graph provides a visual interpretation of the current level of background noise. Differences in background noise level are indicated by the following colors: green (low noise), yellow (middle of the range), and red (high noise). Range:
100 to 45 dBm Note This setting appears only for 2.4-GHz client adapters and only if you selected signal strength to be displayed in dBm. See the Specifying Signal Strength Units section on page F-3 for information. The percentage of beacon packets received versus those expected to be received. The higher the value and the more green the bar graph is, the clearer the signal. Example: The access point sends out 10 beacons per second, so you would expect the client adapter to receive 50 beacon packets in 5 seconds. If it receives only 40 packets, the percentage of beacons received would be 80%. Range:
0 to 100%
Note This setting appears only for 5-GHz client adapters. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows F-11 Using Active Mode Appendix F Performing a Site Survey Table F-3 Site Survey Active Mode Statistics (continued) Statistic Link Speed Overall Link Quality Signal to Noise Ratio
(2.4-GHz client adapters) Associated Access Point Access Point IP Address Channel (Frequency) Description The rate at which your client adapter is transmitting packets to or from its associated access point. The Link Speed histogram provides a visual interpretation of the current rate at which your client adapter is transmitting packets. Differences in link speed are indicated by the following colors:
green (fastest), yellow (middle of the range), and red (slowest). Value:
1, 2, 5.5, or 11 Mbps (2.4-GHz client adapters);
6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, or 54 Mbps (5-GHz client adapters) The client adapters ability to communicate with the access point. Value: Not Associated, Poor, Fair, Good, or Excellent Note This setting appears for 2.4-GHz client adapters (but only if you selected signal strength to be displayed as a percentage) and for 5-GHz client adapters. See the Specifying Signal Strength Units section on page F-3 for information. The difference between the signal strength and the noise level. The higher the value, the better the client adapters ability to communicate with the access point. Range:
0 to 90 dB Note This setting appears only for 2.4-GHz client adapters and only if you selected signal strength to be displayed in dBm. See the Specifying Signal Strength Units section on page F-3 for information. The access point to which your client adapter is associated. It is shown only if the client adapter is in infrastructure mode, the access point was configured with a name, and Aironet Extensions are enabled (on access points running Cisco IOS release 12.2(4)JA or greater). The IP address of the access point to which your client adapter is associated. It is shown only if the client adapter is in infrastructure mode, the access point was configured with an IP address, and Aironet Extensions are enabled (on access points running Cisco IOS release 12.2(4)JA or greater). Note If Aironet Extensions are disabled, the IP address of the associated access point is shown as 0.0.0.0. The frequency that your client adapter is currently using as the channel for communications. Value: Dependent on client adapter radio and regulatory domain Percent Complete The percentage of packets that have been transmitted based on the number specified in the Number of Packets field. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows F-12 OL-1394-06 Appendix F Performing a Site Survey Forcing the Client Adapter to Reassociate Table F-3 Site Survey Active Mode Statistics (continued) Statistic Percent Successful Lost to Target Lost to Source Description The percentage of packets that were transmitted successfully. The Percent Successful histogram provides a visual interpretation of the percentage of packets that are not lost. The value you set for the Percent Success Threshold is indicated by the red line. Percentages greater than or equal to this value are displayed as green bars; percentages below this value are displayed as yellow bars. Note Refer to the Percent Success Threshold parameter in Table F-2 for more information. The number of packets that were not transmitted successfully to the access point. The number of packets that were not received successfully from the access point. Step 4 When you click the Stop button or when the Percent Complete reaches 100%, the active mode changes back to the passive mode. Click OK or Cancel to exit the site survey application. Step 5 Forcing the Client Adapter to Reassociate The client adapter will attempt to maintain its association to an access point for as long as it can. Therefore if you are on a fringe area while conducting a site survey, you may want to reinitialize (or restart) the client adapter in an attempt to force it to disassociate from the access point to which it is currently associated and reassociate to another access point. Note Restarting the client adapter may cause you to lose your wireless network connection. Follow the steps below to attempt to force the client adapter to disassociate from its current access point and reassociate to another during a site survey. Click the Restart Card button on the bottom of the Site Survey screen. Step 1 Step 2 When prompted to confirm your decision, click Yes. The driver stops the client adapters radio, writes the configuration (although no parameter settings have been changed), and restarts the radio. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows F-13 Forcing the Client Adapter to Reassociate Appendix F Performing a Site Survey Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows F-14 OL-1394-06 G L O S S A R Y 802.1X 802.11 802.11a 802.11b A access point Also called 802.1X for 802.11. 802.1X is the new standard for wireless LAN security, as defined by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). An access point that supports 802.1X and its protocol, Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP), acts as the interface between a wireless client and an authentication server, such as a Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) server, to which the access point communicates over the wired network. The IEEE standard that specifies carrier sense media access control and physical layer specifications for 1- and 2-megabit-per-second (Mbps) 2.4-GHz wireless LANs. The IEEE standard that governs the deployment of 5-GHz OFDM systems. It specifies the implementation of the physical layer for wireless UNII bands (see UNII, UNII 1, and UNII 2) and provides four channels per 100 MHz of bandwidth. The IEEE standard that specifies carrier sense media access control and physical layer specifications for 5.5- and 11-Mbps 2.4-GHz wireless LANs. A wireless LAN data transceiver that uses radio waves to connect a wired network with wireless stations. ad hoc network A wireless network composed of stations without access points. alphanumeric A set of characters that contains both letters and numbers. associated A station is configured properly to allow it to wirelessly communicate with an access point. B bandwidth BPSK Specifies the amount of the frequency spectrum that is usable for data transfer. It identifies the maximum data rate that a signal can attain on the medium without encountering significant power loss. Binary phase shift keying. A modulation technique used by IEEE 802.11-compliant wireless LANs for transmission at 1 Mbps. broadcast key rotation A security feature for use with dynamic WEP keys. If your client adapter uses LEAP, EAP-TLS, PEAP, or EAP-SIM authentication and you enable this feature, the access point changes the dynamic broadcast WEP key that it provides at the interval you select. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows GL-1 Glossary C CCK client CSMA Complementary code keying. A modulation technique used by IEEE 802.11b-compliant wireless LANs for transmission at 5.5 and 11 Mbps. A radio device that uses the services of an access point to communicate wirelessly with other devices on a local area network. Carrier sense multiple access. A wireless LAN media access method specified by the IEEE 802.11 specification. cyclic redundancy check (CRC) A method of checking for errors in a received packet. D data rates dBi DHCP dipole DSSS The range of data transmission rates supported by a device. Data rates are measured in megabits per second (Mbps). A ratio of decibels to an isotropic antenna that is commonly used to measure antenna gain. The greater the dBi value, the higher the gain and the more acute the angle of coverage. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol available with many operating systems that automatically issues IP addresses within a specified range to devices on the network. The device retains the assigned address for a specific administrator-defined period. A type of low-gain (2.2-dBi) antenna consisting of two (often internal) elements. Direct-sequence spread spectrum. A type of spread spectrum radio transmission that spreads its signal continuously over a wide frequency band. duplicate packets Packets that were received twice because an acknowledgement got lost and the sender retransmitted the packet. E EAP Ethernet Extensible Authentication Protocol. EAP is the protocol for the optional IEEE 802.1X wireless LAN security feature. An access point that supports 802.1X and EAP acts as the interface between a wireless client and an authentication server, such as a Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) server, to which the access point communicates over the wired network. The most widely used wired local area network. Ethernet uses carrier sense multiple access (CSMA) to allow computers to share a network and operates at 10, 100, or 1000 megabits per second (Mbps), depending on the physical layer used. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows GL-2 OL-1394-06 Glossary F file server firmware A repository for files so that a local area network can share files, mail, and programs. Software that is programmed on a memory chip and kept in a computers semi-permanent memory. fragmentation threshold The size at which packets are fragmented and transmitted a piece at a time instead of all at once. The setting must be within the range of 64 to 2312 bytes. full duplex A means of communication whereby each node receives and transmits simultaneously (two-way). See also half duplex. G gateway GHz H half duplex A device that connects two otherwise incompatible networks together. Gigahertz. One billion cycles per second. A unit of measure for frequency. A means of communication whereby each node receives and transmits in turn (one-way). See also full duplex. hexadecimal A set of characters consisting of ten numbers and six letters (0-9, A-F, and a-f). I IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. A professional society serving electrical engineers through its publications, conferences, and standards development activities. The body responsible for the Ethernet 802.3 and wireless LAN 802.11 specifications. infrastructure The wired Ethernet network. infrastructure device A device (such as an access point, bridge, or base station) that connects client adapters to a wired LAN. IP address The Internet Protocol (IP) address of a station. IP subnet mask The number used to identify the IP subnetwork, indicating whether the IP address can be recognized on the LAN or if it must be reached through a gateway. IPX Internetwork Packet Exchange. The NetWare network layer protocol used for transferring data from servers to workstations. isotropic An antenna that emits its signal in a spherical pattern. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows GL-3 Glossary L LEAP M MAC address MIC LEAP, or EAP-Cisco Wireless, is the 802.1X authentication type that is available for use with operating systems that do not have EAP support. Support for LEAP is provided in the client adapters firmware and the Cisco software that supports it, rather than in the operating system. With LEAP, a username and password are used by the client adapter to perform mutual authentication with the RADIUS server through an access point. The Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique serial number assigned to a networking device by the manufacturer. Message integrity check. MIC prevents bit-flip attacks on encrypted packets. During a bit-flip attack, an intruder intercepts an encrypted message, alters it slightly, and retransmits it, and the receiver accepts the retransmitted message as legitimate. The client adapters driver must support MIC functionality, and MIC must be enabled on the access point. modulation Any of several techniques for combining user information with a transmitters carrier signal. multicast packets Packets transmitted to multiple stations. multipath The echoes created as a radio signal bounces off of physical objects. O OFDM Orthogonal frequency division multiplexing. A multicarrier modulation method for broadband wireless communications. overrun packets Packets that were discarded because the access point had a temporary overload of packets to handle. P packet Q QPSK GL-4 A basic message unit for communication across a network. A packet usually includes routing information, data, and sometimes error detection information. Quadruple phase shift keying. A modulation technique used by IEEE 802.11-compliant wireless LANs for transmission at 2 Mbps. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows OL-1394-06 Glossary R radio channel The frequency at which a radio operates. range A linear measure of the distance that a transmitter can send a signal. receiver sensitivity A measurement of the weakest signal a receiver can receive and still correctly translate it into data. RF roaming RP-TNC Radio frequency. A generic term for radio-based technology. A feature of some access points that allows users to move through a facility while maintaining an unbroken connection to the LAN. A connector type unique to Cisco Aironet radios and antennas. Part 15.203 of the FCC rules covering spread spectrum devices limits the types of antennas that may be used with transmission equipment. In compliance with this rule, Cisco Aironet, like all other wireless LAN providers, equips its radios and antennas with a unique connector to prevent attachment of non-approved antennas to radios. RTS threshold The packet size at which an access point issues a request to send (RTS) before sending the packet. S spread spectrum SSID T TKIP A radio transmission technology that spreads the user information over a much wider bandwidth than otherwise required in order to gain benefits such as improved interference tolerance and unlicensed operation. Service set identifier. A unique identifier that stations must use to be able to communicate with an access point. The SSID can be any alphanumeric entry up to a maximum of 32 characters. Temporal Key Integrity Protocol. Also referred to as WEP key hashing. A security feature that defends against an attack on WEP in which the intruder uses the initialization vector (IV) in encrypted packets to calculate the WEP key. TKIP removes the predictability that an intruder relies on to determine the WEP key by exploiting IVs. transmit power The power level of radio transmission. U unicast packets Packets transmitted in point-to-point communication. UNII Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure. An FCC regulatory domain for 5-GHz wireless devices. UNII bands are 100 MHz wide and divided into four channels when using 802.11a OFDM modulation. OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows GL-5 Glossary UNII 1 UNII 2 W WEP A UNII band dedicated to in-building wireless LAN applications. UNII 1 is located at 5.15 to 5.25 GHz and allows for a maximum transmit power of 40 mW (or 16 dBm) with an antenna up to 6 dBi. UNII 1 regulations require a nonremovable, integrated antenna. A UNII band dedicated to in-building wireless LAN applications. UNII 2 is located at 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and allows for a maximum transmit power of 200 mW (or 23 dBm) with an antenna up to 6 dBi. UNII 2 regulations allow for an auxiliary, user-installable antenna. Wired equivalent privacy. An optional security mechanism defined within the 802.11 standard designed to protect your data as it is transmitted through your wireless network by encrypting it through the use of encryption keys. workstation A computing device with an installed client adapter. Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows GL-6 OL-1394-06 Numerics 802.1X authentication types in ACU 5-22 to 5-24 in Windows XP E-3 defined 5-22, E-2 A About Aironet Client Utility ACU menu option screen 9-13 9-13 About icon access point 9-13 7-9, 8-11 1-10 currently associated to in wireless infrastructure IP address current in link test in site survey active mode in site survey passive mode 7-9, 8-11 7-19 MAC address 7-10 7-21 current in link test in site survey active mode specifying mismatches name 5-16 7-13 F-12 F-6 F-8 I N D E X 1-8 problems associating to authenticating to 10-11 10-11 role in wireless network security settings 5-27 to 5-28 Access Point Authentication parameter access points, reporting those that fail LEAP 5-29 authentication 5-26, 5-28 Ack packets number received number transmitted 7-15 7-15 ACM See Aironet Client Monitor (ACM) ACU See Aironet Client Utility (ACU) ad hoc network E-5 defined 5-17 to 5-20 parameters selecting in ACU 5-6 selecting in Windows XP E-7 wireless LAN configuration 1-9 Advanced (Ad Hoc) screen Advanced (Infrastructure) screen advanced ad hoc parameters 5-17 5-14 described setting 5-2, 5-17 5-17 to 5-20 advanced infrastructure parameters described setting 5-2, 5-14 5-14 to 5-16 7-9, 8-11 7-21 current in link test in site survey active mode in site survey passive mode F-12 F-6 aged packets Aironet Client Monitor (ACM) 7-14, 7-16 About screen accessing help 8-5 8-5 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows IN-1 Index 1-6 8-2 8-6 8-5 described exiting finding version icon overview 8-2 pop-up menu selecting the active profile setting preferences specifying pop-up menu options 8-7 specifying when it runs Tool Tip window 8-3 to 8-4 using 8-5 to 8-11 8-1 to 8-11 8-6 to 8-7 8-8 to 8-9 8-7 Aironet Client Monitor parameter (Install Wizard) 3-7, 3-17 Aironet Client Monitor Preferences screen Aironet Client Utility (ACU) 8-6 9-13 9-14 1-6 to 1-8 About icon accessing help described diagnostic tools overview 7-2 setting parameters 7-4 to 7-22 using 9-13 exiting feature comparison to Windows XP 3-22 to 3-23 finding version icon 7-3 to 7-4 9-13 9-14 adding to desktop deleting from desktop parameter to place on desktop using to open ACU 9-12 9-14 Aironet Client Utility parameter (Install Wizard) Aironet Client Utility Preferences screen Aironet Client Utility screen Allow Association to Mixed Cells parameter Allow Non-Administrator Users to Save Profiles to the 4-10, 7-3, 9-11 1-6 to 1-7 5-21 3-6, 3-16 Registry parameter 4-11 Allow Non-Administrator Users to Save Settings to the Registry parameter (Install Wizard) 3-7, 3-17 Allow Saved LEAP User Name and Password parameter
(Install Wizard) 3-9, 3-19 antenna C-3 2.4-GHz options described gains 1-4 IEEE 802.11a D-4 IEEE 802.11b D-4 to D-5 mode currently being used placement specifications A-5 F-2 7-8 Antenna Mode (Receive) parameter 5-18 ad hoc mode infrastructure mode 5-15 Antenna Mode (Transmit) parameter 5-18 ad hoc mode infrastructure mode Apply button, function association rejections time-outs 7-14 7-14 5-15 1-8 3-7, 3-17 audience of document authentication xii 9-13 9-12 installation program settings, modifying launching from ACM 8-6 opening overview 1-6 to 1-7 Properties screens, overview 5-2 screens, buttons described selecting among several installed client adapters 1-8 5-24, E-4 process rejections time-outs type, status of 7-13 7-14 7-7 Automatically Load New Firmware When NDIS Driver Is Updated parameter 9-11 Automatically Prompt for LEAP User Name and Password 3-24 option 5-33 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows IN-2 OL-1394-06 auto profile selection 4-4 to 4-6 4-6 including a profile in prioritizing profiles removing a profile from 4-5 restrictions using 4-7, 8-8 4-5 Auto Profile Selection Management screen Auto Start parameter for ACM (Install Wizard) 4-5 3-7, 3-17 B beacon packets number received number transmitted 7-12 7-15 beacon period, status of Beacon Period parameter beacons received 7-10 5-20 7-11, 7-22 current in site survey active mode in site survey passive mode F-11 F-5 boot block firmware, current version of broadcast key rotation 7-6 described setting on client and access point 5-25 5-28 broadcast packets number received number transmitted 7-12 7-15 broadcast SSIDs bytes 5-4, E-5 number received number transmitted 7-12 7-15 Index 2-4 Card and Socket Services carrier/correlation (Car/Cor) caution, defined Certificate Properties screen - Windows 98, 98 SE, NT, 5-12 xiii and Me 5-37 Change Password screen 6-19 Change PIN screen channel 6-18 7-9 current determining if clear in site survey active mode in site survey passive mode 5-12 F-12 F-7 Channel parameter channels, supported by regulatory domains 5-10 IEEE 802.11a D-2 IEEE 802.11b D-3 channel set, for which client adapter is configured Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Adapter Setup screen (Install 7-8 Wizard) 3-20 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapter Installation Wizard screen 3-3, 3-13, 9-7 Cisco Wireless LAN Adapter Troubleshooting screen 10-4, 10-5 Clear Channel Assessment parameter client name Client Name parameter client utilities 7-8 5-4 5-12 See Aironet Client Utility (ACU) and Aironet Client Monitor (ACM) 1-7 clock, setting to display seconds 7-15 collisions, multiple/single Commands drop-down menu configuring client adapter 6-11, 6-12, 9-13 C CAM See Constantly Awake Mode (CAM) Canadian compliance statement Cancel button, function 1-8 C-3 to C-4 deciding between ACU and Windows XP 3-22 to 3-23 in ACU 5-1 to 5-43 in Windows XP E-4 to E-16 Connection Status screen (ACM) Constantly Awake Mode (CAM) 9-14 Contents ACU menu option 8-9 5-5 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows IN-3 domain name 7-8 including in Windows login specifying for saved user name and password 5-33 5-33 Index Continuous Link Test parameter in RF link test in site survey active mode 7-19 F-8 xiii to xiv conventions of document CRC error 7-13 in packet in PLCP header 7-13 CTS packets number received number transmitted 7-15 7-15 Custom Installation screen (Install Wizard) 3-4, 3-14 D data rate for which client adapter is configured mismatches specifications A-4 when performing a site survey 7-13 F-2 Data Rate parameter 5-8 in RF network in site survey active mode Data Retries parameter 5-13 in RF network in site survey active mode F-9 F-8 dBm signal strength units in site survey signal strength units on Status and Linktest screens F-3 7-4 declarations of conformity European community, Switzerland, Norway, Iceland, and Liechtenstein C-4 to C-6 FCC C-2 to C-3 RF exposure C-6 1-8 Defaults button, function default values, displaying Delay Between Packets parameter Destination Is Another Cisco/Aironet Device 1-8 F-9 parameter F-8 Destination MAC Address parameter diagnosing client adapter operation dipole antenna Disable Firmware Checking parameter (Install 1-4, B-3 10-4 to 10-6 F-8 Wizard) 3-6, 3-16 1-7 1-4 5-15, 5-18 Display Seconds on Clock parameter diversity antenna diversity mode document audience conventions organization xii purpose software versions covered xiii to xiv xii to xiii xii xii driver current version 1-5 described finding version 7-6 9-7 Drivers parameter (Install Wizard) duplicate packets, number received dynamic WEP keys, overview 5-22 to 5-24, E-2 to E-4 3-6, 3-16 7-12 E EAP authentication E-4 described overview 5-22 to 5-25, 6-2, E-2 to E-4 using 6-1 to 6-21 EAP-Cisco Wireless See LEAP authentication EAP-SIM authentication authenticating if the PIN is stored on the computer authenticating if you are prompted for the PIN 6-20 described disabling 5-24 to 5-25, E-3, E-4 5-42 to 5-43 6-21 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows IN-4 OL-1394-06 Index preventing from being installed with driver upgrading 9-8 to 9-10 9-10 to 9-12 3-6, 3-16 F-13 Firmware parameter (Install Wizard) forcing client adapter to reassociate fragmented packets Fragment Threshold parameter frequencies D-2, D-3 frequency 5-13 5-13 7-9 currently being used in site survey active mode in site survey passive mode setting 5-10 F-12 F-7 G Generic Token Card Properties screen 5-40, E-12 hardware components of client adapter Help 1-3 to 1-4 button, function drop-down menu icon 9-14 1-8 9-14 history of RF performance, displayed host-based EAP authentication 7-4 5-23 to 5-25 5-42 to 5-43 5-34 to 5-42 described disabling enabling requirements 5-34 Host Based EAP option host devices 2-4 5-35 I 10-8 I/O range Include Windows Logon Domain with User Name parameter 5-33 infrastructure device, defined 1-3 5-27 H enabling in Windows XP E-14 to E-16 through ACU 5-34 to 5-42 10-26 to 10-31 error messages RADIUS servers supported setting on client and access point 5-24, E-3 EAP-SIM parameter (Install Wizard) EAP-TLS authentication 5-28 3-9, 3-19 authenticating after a reboot/logon authenticating after profile selection/card 6-15 insertion 6-15 5-23 to 5-25, E-3, E-4 5-42 to 5-43 described disabling enabling in Windows XP E-8 to E-10 through ACU 5-34 to 5-38 RADIUS servers supported setting on client and access point 5-23, E-3 5-12 EIRP, maximum 1-4, D-4 to D-5 energy detect (ED) Enter PIN screen error messages errors 10-13 to 10-31 6-20 MAC CRC 7-13 overrun PLCP 7-13 7-13 F Fast PSP 5-5 fast secure roaming described setting on client and access point 5-26 5-28 FCC declaration of conformity statement safety compliance statement 2-2 C-2 to C-3 firmware current version finding version 7-6 9-8 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows IN-5 Index infrastructure network 5-14 to 5-16 parameters selecting in ACU 5-6 wireless LAN configuration 1-10 9-2 to 9-4 inserting client adapter Installable Drivers screen (Install Wizard) Installation Path parameter for ACM (Install Wizard) for ACU (Install Wizard) 3-7, 3-17 3-6, 3-16 3-14 installing client adapter software on Windows 98, 98 SE, 2000, Me, or XP 3-2 to 3-11 on Windows NT 3-12 to 3-22 Install Wizard file 1-5 9-5 3-2 to 3-22 described finding version installing 3-2 name interference 10-8 interrupt request (IRQ) introduction to client adapters IP address 2-6 1-2 to 1-3 7-19 of access point in link test of access point in site survey active mode of access point in site survey passive mode of associated access point of client adapter 7-8, 8-4, 8-11 7-9, 8-11 J Japan, guidelines for operating client adapters C-6 to C-7 L LEAP authentication authenticating after a reboot/logon with automatically prompted login with manually prompted login 6-11 to 6-13 6-7 to 6-8 with saved username and password with Windows username and password 6-4 to 6-5 authenticating after profile selection/card insertion 6-14 with automatically prompted login with manually prompted login with saved username and password with Windows username and password 6-6 6-9 to 6-11 6-13 6-3 to 6-4 authenticating after your LEAP credentials expire with automatically prompted login with manually prompted login with saved username and password with Windows username and password 6-13 6-9 6-14 6-5 5-31 to 5-34 10-18 to 10-21 5-22 to 5-23, 5-24 5-42 described disabling enabling error messages overview 6-2 to 6-3 RADIUS servers supported requirements setting on client and access point stages of 5-31 6-3 5-22 5-27 LEAP Authentication Timeout Value parameter LEAP login screen 5-33 appearing before Windows login screen displayed 6-6, 6-7, 6-10, 6-12 10-13 5-31 LEAP option LEAP parameter (Install Wizard) 5-23, 5-31 LEAP security module 5-32 LEAP Settings screen LEDs 3-9, 3-19 1-4 described interpreting using to verify installation 10-2 to 10-3 link quality in link test in site survey active mode 7-22 3-22 F-12 LEAP Authentication Status screen F-12 F-6 displayed minimizing 6-2 6-3 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows IN-6 OL-1394-06 Index Max Power Savings See Max PSP Max PSP 5-5 Menu Options (Defaults) parameter for ACM (Install Wizard) 3-8, 3-18 message integrity check (MIC) 5-25, 7-7 described setting on client and access point statistics status of 7-14 7-7 5-28 1-10 microcellular network Microsoft 802.1X supplicant Microsoft hot fix 5-34 described uninstalling 10-13 9-16 Microsoft TCP/IP Properties screen (Install Wizard) mini PCI card 3-21 1-4, 5-15, 5-18 antenna described losing association upon resuming from suspend 1-2 mode 10-12 multicast packets in site survey active mode number received number transmitted 7-12 7-15 F-9 N network 1-8 to 1-10 configurations prioritizing connections problems connecting to security parameters 10-11 to 10-12 10-11 described setting 5-2, 5-20 5-20 to 5-43 type, current 7-9 network login screen Network Security screen Network Security Type parameter 5-20 6-8 5-29, 5-31, 5-35, 5-42 in site survey passive mode overall link speed 7-11, 8-4, 8-10 F-6 7-8, 8-4, 8-11 currently being used in link test in site survey active mode in site survey passive mode 7-21 F-12 F-6 Link Status Meter 7-16 7-16 ACU menu option icon screen viewing 7-16 7-16 to 7-17 Linktest 7-18 ACU menu option 7-18, 7-20 screen statistics 7-21 7-18 Link Test icon LM card antenna described 1-2 1-4, 5-15, 5-18 Load Firmware icon Load New Firmware ACU menu option screen 9-9 1-5, 9-9 1-5, 9-9 long radio headers, using 5-9 M MAC address 5-16 7-21 of access point, specifying of access point in link test of access point in site survey active mode of associated access point of client adapter MAC CRC errors Manual LEAP Login ACU menu option Manually Prompt for LEAP User Name and Password 7-8 7-13 6-10, 6-11 7-10 F-8 option 5-33 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows IN-7 Index Network Type parameter noise level 5-6 7-10 current in link test in site survey active mode in site survey passive mode 7-22 RTS 5-16, 5-19, 7-15 site survey active mode statistics site survey passive mode statistics statistics unicast with MIC 7-14 7-12 to 7-16 7-12, 7-15 F-11 to F-13 F-5 to F-7 F-11 F-5 No Network Connection Unless User Is Logged In parameter xiii 5-33 note, defined Number of Packets parameter in link test in site survey active mode 7-19 F-8 O 1-8 OK button, function One Time Password screen online help 6-17 for ACM 8-5 for ACU 9-14 for troubleshooting utility 10-7 5-29, E-6 open authentication Options drop-down menu organization of document overrun errors 7-13 1-7, 4-10, 7-3, 9-10, F-3 xii to xiii P 5-20, 7-10, 7-12, 7-15 7-12, 7-15 2-3 7-15 7-14, 7-16 package contents packets Ack aged beacon broadcast CTS 7-15 duplicate fragmented linktest statistics multicast 7-12 5-13 7-21 7-12, 7-15, F-9 Packet Size parameter Packet Tx Type parameter PC card 7-19, F-8 F-9 1-4, 5-15, 5-18 1-2 9-2 to 9-3 antenna described inserting removing 9-4 PC-Cardbus card 1-4 1-2 antenna described 9-2 to 9-3 inserting profiles tied to slot removing 9-4 4-3 PCI card antenna described inserting removing 1-4, 5-15, 5-18 1-2 9-3 to 9-4 9-5 PEAP authentication authenticating after profile selection/card 6-16 to 6-18 insertion/reboot/logon authenticating after your password expires (Windows NT or 2000 domain databases) 6-18 authenticating after your PIN expires (OTP databases) 6-19 5-23 to 5-25, E-3, E-4 5-42 to 5-43 described disabling enabling in Windows XP E-10 to E-13 through ACU 5-34 to 5-41 10-21 to 10-26 error messages RADIUS servers supported setting on client and access point 5-23, E-3 5-27 PEAP parameter (Install Wizard) 3-10, 3-19 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows IN-8 OL-1394-06 5-39, E-11 profile manager Index PEAP Properties screen peer-to-peer network percent 1-9, 5-6 signal strength units in site survey signal strength units on Status and Linktest screens F-3 7-4 Percent Successful histogram, in site survey active mode F-9, F-13 Percent Success Threshold parameter physical specifications A-2 Place Icon on Desktop parameter (Install Wizard) F-9 3-7, 3-17 PLCP CRC errors format errors length errors 7-13 7-13 7-13 power level 7-8 current maximum D-4 to D-5 power levels, available power save mode, currently being used Power Save Mode parameter power specifications A-6 Preferences 5-5 7-9 7-9 ACU menu option icon 1-7, 4-10, 7-3, 9-10, F-3 1-7, 4-10, 7-3, 9-10, F-3 product model numbers profile 1-3 8-3, 8-10 7-6 active current default displayed in ACU title bar 7-6 1-7 Profile Manager 4-2 ACU menu option icon screen 4-2 displayed parameters missing 4-2 4-3, 10-12 4-3 4-4 to 4-6 auto profile selection feature creating a new profile 4-8 deleting a profile 4-7 editing a profile exporting a profile granting or denying access to non-administrative 4-9 users 4-10 to 4-11 4-9 importing a profile 4-2 to 4-3 opening overview 4-2 parameters missing renaming a profile selecting the active profile setting a profile to default values 4-3, 10-12 4-8 4-6 to 4-7 4-8 Profiles Submenu (ACM) Program Feature Overrides parameter for ACM (Install 8-8 Wizard) 3-8, 3-18 Program Folder parameter for ACM (Install Wizard) for ACU (Install Wizard) 3-7, 3-17 3-6, 3-16 Protected EAP See PEAP authentication purpose of document xii R radio 1-3 described specifications A-3 to A-5 turning on or off 8-7, 9-15 to 9-16 RADIUS servers additional information defined supported 5-22, E-2 5-22 to 5-24, E-3 5-25, E-4 5-8, 5-11 range Reauthenticate ACM menu option ACU menu option 8-8 6-21 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows IN-9 Index 6-21 7-12 to 7-14 reauthentication process receive statistics regulatory domains 5-10, 7-8 IEEE 802.11a D-2 IEEE 802.11b D-3 C-2 to C-7 information specifications A-6 to A-7 xv related publications removing client adapter 7-12, 7-14 Reset button resource conflicts, resolving 9-4 to 9-5 10-9 to 10-10 in Windows 2000 in Windows 98, 98 SE, and Me in Windows NT 10-9 in Windows XP 10-10 10-8 Restart Card 9-15 ACU menu option button, in site survey restarting client adapter RF link test F-13 9-15, F-13 7-18 prerequisites running stopping 7-17 to 7-22 7-22 RF network parameters 5-2, 5-7 described setting 5-7 to 5-13 RF Network screen RF obstructions roaming RTS packets 1-10 5-7 2-6, F-3 5-19 advanced ad hoc parameters advanced infrastructure parameters number retransmitted number transmitted 7-15 7-15 RTS Retry Limit parameter 5-19 ad hoc mode infrastructure mode 5-16 RTS Threshold parameter 5-19 ad hoc mode infrastructure mode 5-16 S safety information specifications A-6 to A-7 2-2 to 2-3 saved username and password described entering 5-32 5-33 Screen Update Timer parameter seamless roaming security features 1-10 7-4 overview 5-21 to 5-25 synchronizing 5-27 to 5-28 Select A Wireless LAN Adapter Card screen Select Profile 3-24 8-8 to 8-9 4-4 ACM menu option ACU menu option icon screen 4-4 4-4 7-6 sensitivity A-4, F-2 serial number of client adapter server-based authentication, status of Setup button, in site survey shared key authentication short radio headers 5-29, E-6 F-7 7-7 7-6 status of using 5-9 Show History parameter signal quality 7-4 5-16 7-10 7-21 current in link test in site survey active mode in site survey passive mode on Link Status Meter screen F-11 F-5 7-17 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows IN-10 OL-1394-06 signal strength software Index 7-10 7-4, F-3 as a percentage current in dBm 7-4, F-3 7-21 in link test in site survey active mode in site survey passive mode on Link Status Meter screen F-11 F-5 7-17 Signal Strength Display Units parameter signal to noise ratio 7-4 7-11 current in link test in site survey active mode in site survey passive mode 7-22 F-12 F-6 SIM Authentication Properties screen site requirements 5-41, E-15 for client devices for infrastructure devices 2-6 2-5 Site Survey F-10 Active Mode screen Active Mode Setup screen ACU menu option icon Passive Mode screen F-3 F-4 F-3 F-7 site survey active mode F-8 to F-9 F-9 F-11 to F-13 overview F-2 setting parameters starting statistics using exiting guidelines passive mode F-7 to F-13 F-7, F-13 F-2 overview F-2 statistics using F-3 to F-7 F-5 to F-7 specifying signal strength units F-3 Smart Card or other Certificate Properties screen 5-37, E-9 installing on Windows 98, 98 SE, 2000, Me, or XP 3-2 to 3-11 installing on Windows NT 3-12 to 3-22 procedures uninstalling verifying installation 9-5 to 9-15 9-6 to 9-7 3-22 software components custom installation parameters described 1-5 to 1-8 3-6 to 3-10, 3-16 to 3-19 software versions covered in document specifications xii physical A-2 power A-6 radio A-3 to A-5 regulatory compliance A-6 to A-7 safety A-6 to A-7 Specified Access Point 1- 4 parameters spread spectrum 1-3 SSID 5-16 7-9, 8-3, 8-11 current mismatches 7-13 5-4 5-4 SSID1 parameter SSID2 parameter SSID3 parameter Start After Install parameter for ACM (Install 5-4 Wizard) 3-7, 3-17 Start button function in RF link test in site survey 1-8 7-19 F-9 6-16 Static Password screen static WEP disabling procedures with open authentication, setting on client and access 5-29 to 5-31 5-31 point 5-27 with shared key authentication, setting on client and access point 5-27 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows IN-11 Index static WEP keys 5-29 to 5-30 entering guidelines for entering in ACU 5-30 in Windows XP E-7 5-30 overview 5-22, E-2 overwriting selecting transmit key size of Statistics 5-29 System Parameters screen system requirements 2-4 to 2-5 5-3 5-30 T Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) 5-25 described setting on client and access point temporary username and password 5-28 7-11 7-11 ACU menu option icon screen statistics 7-12 7-11 to 7-16 7-21 client adapter, viewing link test receive site survey 7-12 to 7-14 active mode passive mode F-11 to F-13 F-5 to F-7 transmit 7-15 to 7-16 Status 7-4, 9-7, 9-8 ACU menu option icon screen 7-4, 9-7, 9-8 7-5 status of client adapter in ACM Connection Status screen in ACM Tool Tip window 8-4 in ACU status bar in ACU Status screen in link test in Windows XP E-17 7-4 to 7-11 7-21 1-7 Stop button function in site survey active mode 1-8 F-13 system parameters described setting 5-2, 5-3 5-3 to 5-6 5-32 automatically prompt for described manually prompt for selecting options using Windows credentials 5-5, 5-8, 5-9, 5-13 5-33 5-33 5-33 5-33 5-11 5-30 throughput transmit key Transmit Power parameter transmit statistics Troubleshooting ACU menu option troubleshooting information, accessing troubleshooting utility 10-7 7-15 to 7-16 accessing help activating from ACM 8-6 saving detailed report to text file using 10-4 to 10-7 10-4 10-2 10-6 to 10-7 8-9 to 8-11 Turn Radio Off ACM menu option ACU menu option 8-8 9-16 Turn Radio On ACM menu option ACU menu option 8-8 9-16 U unicast packets in site survey active mode number received number transmitted 7-12 7-15 F-9 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows IN-12 OL-1394-06 Index WEP Key Entry Method parameter WEP key hashing Windows login screen Windows Wireless Network Connection icon, shows 5-25 5-29 6-4 unavailable connection 10-12 Windows XP E-4 to E-16 E-14 to E-16 E-8 to E-10 configuring client adapter through enabling EAP-SIM authentication enabling EAP-TLS authentication enabling PEAP authentication feature comparison to ACU 3-22 to 3-23 3-9 inability to use fast user switching making a configuration decision security features viewing status of client adapter E-2 to E-4 E-17 E-10 to E-13 3-22 to 3-23 wireless infrastructure Wireless Network Connection Properties screen 1-10
(Authentication Tab) - Windows E-14 5-36, E-8, E-11, Wireless Network Connection Properties screen (Wireless Networks Tab) - Windows E-5 Wireless Network Connection Status screen - Windows XP E-17 Wireless Network Properties screen - Windows XP E-6 workstation 1-3 defined in wireless infrastructure 1-10 World Mode parameter 5-9 uninstalling client adapter software unpacking the client adapter Unplug or Eject Hardware icon (Windows) upgrading client adapter software 2-3 9-6 to 9-7 9-4 on Windows 98, 98 SE, 2000, Me, or XP 3-2 to 3-11 on Windows NT 3-12 to 3-22 9-8 to 9-10 upgrading firmware up time statistic status of 7-14 7-10 Use Another Application to Configure My Wireless Settings option 4-7 4-7, 8-8 Use Auto Profile Selection option Use Other Configuration Application (ACM) Use Saved User Name and Password option Use Selected Profile option Use Short Radio Headers parameter Use Temporary User Name and Password option Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings 5-32 5-32 4-6 8-8 5-9 parameter - Windows XP E-5 Use Windows User Name and Password option 5-33 W Wake Duration parameter warning 5-19 xiii to xiv defined dipole antenna explosive device proximity 2-3, B-4 to B-5 laptop users 2-3, B-3 2-3, B-2 WEP designation in product model numbers keys 1-3 5-25 5-21, E-2 5-22, E-2 additional security features defined size of types of parameter status of 5-21, E-2 5-29 7-7 OL-1394-06 Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows IN-13 Index Cisco Aironet Wireless LAN Client Adapters Installation and Configuration Guide for Windows IN-14 OL-1394-06
1 2 | updated Manual | Users Manual | 1.30 MiB |
ix104 U S E R S H A N D B O O K iX104 USER'S HANDBOOK Xplore Technologies has made every effort to ensure the accuracy and completeness of this document; however, because ongoing development efforts are made to continually improve the capabilities of our products, we cannot guarantee the accuracy of the contents of this document. We disclaim liability for errors, omissions, or future changes herein. Xplore and the Xplore logo are registered trademarks of Xplore Technologies Corp.; iX104 is a trademark of Xplore Technologies Corp. Kensington and MicroSaver are registered trademarks of the Kensington Technology Group. Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Professional, and Windows XP Tablet PC Edition are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. PCMCIA and CardBus are registered trademarks of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association. Intel, Pentium, and SpeedStep are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. Wi-Fi is a trademark of the Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance
(WECA). FireWire is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. ISODAMP is a registered trademark of Aearo Company. All other brands, product names, company names, trademarks and service marks used herein are property of their respective companies. Copyright 2003 Xplore Technologies Corp. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be copied, reproduced, or translated, without the prior written consent of Xplore Technologies. No part of this publication may be stored or transmitted in any electronic form without the prior consent of Xplore Technologies. Any unauthorized use is a violation of copyright laws. PN: 95-01016 Edition: Second, July 2003 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to FCC Part 15 Responsible Party Name: Xplore Technologies Corp. Address: 14000 Summit Drive, Suite 900, Austin, Texas 78728 Telephone: 512.336.7797 Declares that product: Model Series: iX104 Complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules 4 iX104 Users Handbook This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and, (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance may void the users authority to operate this equipment. For more information about FCC rules and their applicability to the iX104, see Appendix E, Agency Notices. Warranty Information The iX104 and iX104-TPC are backed by a standard 12-month International Limited Warranty. An extended International Limited Warranty is available. Check the service kit included with your computer for warranty terms and conditions. iX104 Users Handbook 5 Important safety information Before you use the iX104 or the iX104 dock, read these safety instructions and the operation instructions in this handbook. Failure to observe all these instructions voids the Limited Warranty and may lead to suspension or denial of services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Follow any special regulations governing the use of the computer and, if radio-enabled, always switch it off in areas where radio devices are forbidden or when the radio device can cause interference or danger. Always follow any safety laws and regulations pertaining to the use of cell phones and two-way radios, because these laws and regulations typically apply to the use of the wireless-enabled iX104. Observe all restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas), chemical plants, and wherever blasting operations are in progress or in any area in which restrictions on radio transmissions are imposed. Switch off the iX104 when in an aircraft. The iX104 is not FAA-approved for use on aircraft. The effect of the use of the iX104 in aircraft is unknown. Using the iX104 in an aircraft may affect aircraft instrumentation, communication, and performance; may disrupt the network; and may be illegal. Operating the wireless-enabled iX104 may interfere with the functioning of inadequately protected medical devices such as pacemakers. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device if you have any questions. Radio signals from your iX104 will not affect the operation of most modern equipment, but certain electronic equipment, including automotive systems, may not be shielded against radio signals from your iX104. Check with the manufacturer of your motor vehicle or the manufacturers representative to determine whether using the iX104 will present any safety issues. Avoid using the iX104 in any environment that requires your full attention, such as when driving a vehicle. If you need to use your iX104 while driving, have a passenger use it for you or find a safe location to halt your vehicle. 6 iX104 Users Handbook
WARNING Use only battery types specified in this handbook. Using any other type of battery can be dangerous and can disable the iX104. WARNING Do not use any dock or any other accessory or attachment that is not manufactured or supplied by Xplore or an authorized Xplore accessories supplier. Use of any accessory or attachment that is not supplied or approved for use with the iX104 by Xplore is not permitted because it may cause hazards. Operate the iX104 only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. (See page 53 for more information about the battery and power supply.) Route power supply cords so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them. Pay particular attention to cords at plugs and convenience receptacles, and at the point where cords exit from the computer or its dock. Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles because this can cause fire or electric shock. Unplug the iX104 and refer the iX104 and dock for service to qualified service personnel if any of the following conditions occur:
The power supply cord or plug is damaged. The iX104 or dock does not operate normally when you follow the instructions in this book. The iX104 or dock exhibits a distinct change in performance. Adjust only controls for which there are instructions in this book. An improper adjustment of other controls can result in damage and may require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the iX104 or dock to normal operation. CAUTION Avoid prolonged physical contact with the exposed metal surfaces on the front and back of the computer. While the computer may not feel hot to the touch, if you maintain physical contact with the computer for a long time (for example, if you rest the computer on your lap for a long time), your skin may suffer low-
heat injury. In addition, be careful when you remove a PC card that has been used for a long time, because the card may be hot. iX104 Users Handbook 7 8 iX104 Users Handbook Contents Welcome 13 Who this handbook is for . 14 About your computer . 15 Package contents . 16 Optional accessories. 16 Contacting Xplore . 18 1 Getting Started 19 Getting to know your iX104 . 19 Features and controls . 19 Front view . 19 Back view . 20 Top view . 22 Bottom view . 23 Right side view . 24 Left side view . 25 LED indicators . 26 Quick-start guide . 28 Application, Windows, and hot keys . 28 Navigation keys . 31 Navigation controls with the tablet in portrait mode . 31 Navigation controls with the tablet in landscape mode . 32 iX104 Users Handbook 9 Contents 2 Using the iX104 33 Turning on the computer . 33 Turning off the computer . 34 Using the Reset switch. 35 Suspending and resuming operation . 36 Suspending operation. 37 Resuming operation . 38 Using the pen. 39 Using the pen to perform mouse functions . 40 Changing the pen double-click speed . 41 Positioning the pen and pen tether . 42 Using the joystick (the navigation control key) . 43 Changing the screen orientation . 44 Adjusting the screen brightness. 45 Disabling automatic backlight control . 45 Docking the iX104 . 46 Connecting devices . 47 Connecting FireWire devices. 47 Connecting to a local area network . 48 Connecting USB-compatible devices . 48 Connecting an external microphone . 49 Adjusting microphone volume . 49 Connecting a headphone or speakers . 50 Adjusting headphone or speaker volume . 50 Connecting a monitor or projection panel . 51 Activating the monitor or projection panel. 51 Connecting an XPL snap-on expansion module . 52 10 iX104 Users Handbook Contents Using the battery . 53 Charging the battery pack . 53 If you do not have an external battery charger . 53 If you have an external battery charger . 54 Removing and installing the battery . 55 Removing the battery . 55 Installing the battery . 57 Discarding a battery . 57 Using power options . 58 Changing the computers power schemes . 58 Changing battery alarm settings . 59 Checking battery power status . 59 Selecting power settings . 60 Enabling Hibernation mode . 60 Tips for conserving battery power . 61 Programming hot keys . 62 Programming hot keys to start applications, open documents, or go to a Web site . 63 Programming hot keys to perform pre-defined functions . 67 Programming hot keys to perform other key functions . 69 3 Maintaining the iX104 73 Caring for the computer . 73 Checking power cords and connectors. 73 Protecting the computer from damage . 73 Preventing the computer from overheating . 74 Storing the computer . 75 Caring for the display screen . 75 Protecting the display screen . 75 iX104 Users Handbook 11 Contents Calibrating the pen . 77 Calibrating the pen for an iX104 touch screen . 78 Calibrating the pen for an iX104-TPC active screen . 79 When to replace the pen . 80 A B Troubleshooting Using BIOS and AOS Functions 81 85 Enabling manual LCD backlight control . 87 C Glossary D E Hardware Specifications Agency Notices Index 89 93 101 107 12 iX104 Users Handbook Welcome Welcome to the Xplore Technologies iX104, the rugged pen tablet designed, tested, and manufactured to meet the environmental and physical real-world challenges faced by todays mobile workers. The iX104 not only works the way you do, but can also take the abuses of everyday wear and tear. The iX104 design is based on years of experience in rugged mobile applications. Advanced technology, innovative design, and a rugged case are just a few highlights of your iX104 system. Equally important is Xplores commitment to ensuring that you are treated with the same respect and honesty you offer to your customers and peers every day. iX104 Users Handbook 13 Welcome Who this handbook is for This handbook provides instructions for using the Xplore Technologies iX104 Pen Tablet (iX104) and iX104 Pen Tablet PC
(iX104-TPC). This handbook assumes that you have basic experience using computers and Microsoft Windows. 14 iX104 Users Handbook Welcome About your computer The iX104 and the iX104-TPC are high-performance, pen-based computers that support Microsoft Windows XP Professional Tablet PC Edition, Windows XP Professional, and Windows 2000 Professional operating systems. The iX104 has a touch screen that you control by using your finger, the pen included with the iX104, or any suitable pointing device. The iX104-TPC has an active screen that you control by using the special, enhanced pen included with the iX104-TPC. Note In this handbook, all information applies to both the iX104 and iX104-TPC unless otherwise noted. The iX104 and iX104-TPC have been engineered and tested to meet Military Standards for Environmental Extremes (MIL STD 810F). Your computer includes the following features that make it exceptionally rugged and durable:
Durable, long-lasting, dense magnesium enclosure Interior and exterior multi-layer magnesium frames and cavities ISODAMP shock absorbing materials in patented bumpering system and gasket protection mechanisms Shock-isolated hard disk Integrated, protected wireless LAN and WAN antennas for dual mode operation Locked in place memory, cables, and connectors Proprietary thermal management system iX104 Users Handbook 15 Welcome Package contents Check to make sure your iX104 package includes the following items:
Quick Start Guide Battery pack Power cord AC adapter Pen Pen tether iX104 pen tablet or iX104-TPC pen tablet PC Warranty information kit This handbook Optional accessories Your package also includes any optional accessories you ordered. Optional accessories Docking options iX104 office dock iX104 vehicle dock Carrying cases Ballistic nylon hands-free carry case Ballistic nylon portfolio case 16 iX104 Users Handbook Welcome Optional accessories (continued) Storage options External USB floppy disk drive External USB CD-ROM drive Memory 512 MB SODIMM, 133 MHz 40 GB 2.5-inch rugged hard disk Power options AC adapter with U.S. cord Main battery pack (4500 mAh) Extended life battery pack (9000 mAh) Auto adapter (cigarette lighter adapter) Additional accessories USB non-rugged mini keyboard (83-key) USB rugged, backlit mini keyboard (83-key) Screen protectors (2-pack) Passive stylus (for use with the iX104) Active stylus (for use with the iX104-TPC) Pen tether Hand straps iX104 Users Handbook 17 Welcome Contacting Xplore If you purchased your iX104 from an authorized Xplore dealer, contact the dealer for service and support. If you purchased your iX104 directly from Xplore, use any of the following methods to contact Xplore for service and support:
Toll free Fax E-mail Web site 1-866-296-8541, extension 222 1-512-336-7791 support@xploretech.com http://www.xploretech.com Before you contact Xplore, have the following information ready so that the customer support representative can quickly provide a solution:
The serial number is on the back of the computer. See page 20. Product name: iX104 Product serial number Purchase date Conditions under which the problem occurred Any error messages that were displayed Type of device connected, if any 18 iX104 Users Handbook 1 Getting Started This chapter gives you an overview of your iX104 and includes a quick-start guide to iX104 keys. Getting to know your iX104 For more information about each component, see Chapter 2. This section shows the locations of some of your computers important components. Features and controls Front view built-in microphone Reset switch speaker ambient light sensor speaker iX104 Users Handbook 19 Chapter 1. Getting Started Getting to know your iX104 Built-in microphone Enables you to input mono audio. Includes noise cancellation. Reset switch Enables you to turn off the computer when using the Power On/Off key is not effective. (See page 35.) Speakers Enable you to listen to stereo audio files. Sealed to provide protection from the environment. Ambient light sensor Automatically controls the amount of backlight sent to the screen. Provides optimum brightness for the lighting conditions in which you are working. Back view convection air flow cover antenna covers compliance and serial number label removable battery pack battery release latch pen pen holder Convection air flow cover Magnesium cover over the thermal transfer bay that manages heat movement out of the computer. 20 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 1. Getting Started Getting to know your iX104 Antenna covers For optional wireless LAN and WAN models, protect and secure the radio antennas (accessible by authorized service personnel only). Pen The main device you use to enter data and control applications
(instead of a mouse or a keyboard). Also called the stylus. See Using the pen on page 39. Pen holder Provides a place to secure the pen when you are not using it. Battery release latch Provides access to the battery. Removable battery pack Battery that runs the computer when battery power is required. Compliance and serial number label Includes regulatory compliance numbers and the computers unique serial number. iX104 Users Handbook 21 Chapter 1. Getting Started Getting to know your iX104 Top view Power On/Off/
Suspend/Resume key Kensington lock slot air flow vents XPL expansion port Power On/Off/Suspend/Resume key Press the key to turn the computer on or off, or to suspend or resume operation. Air flow vents Helps prevent the computer from overheating by forcing heat away from the computer. (Do not block the vents.) XPL expansion port A USB port (compliant with USB Standard Revision 1.1) that enables you to connect an XPL snap-on expansion module for devices such as cameras, radios, and fingerprint scanners. Kensington lock slot Connector for the optional Kensington MicroSaver-compatible security cable. Contact your reseller for information about the XPL expansion module and the Kensington security cable. 22 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 1. Getting Started Getting to know your iX104 Bottom view USB port microphone connector LAN connector power connector headphone connector FireWire
(IEEE 1394) connector external monitor connector The optional Office and Vehicle Docks include additional USB ports. See Optional accessories on page 16. The connectors on the bottom of the computer are located behind the outer doors. Power connector For the optional AC adapter or auto adapter. (See Optional accessories on page 16.) USB 2.0 port For Universal Serial Bus devices (compliant with USB Standard Revision 2.0). Headphone connector For stereo headphones or speakers. Microphone connector For an external microphone. Firewire connector For FireWire (IEEE 1394) devices such as digital video cameras. LAN connector For connecting a standard RJ-45 connector to the computers internal local area network (LAN) card. External monitor connector For an external monitor or projection panel. iX104 Users Handbook 23 Chapter 1. Getting Started Getting to know your iX104 Right side view XPL expansion port bumpers Contact your reseller for information about the XPL expansion module and the Kensington security cable. Bumpers Fabricated from rugged material. Raised to help protect the computer from damage. XPL expansion port A USB port (compliant with USB Standard Revision 1.1) that enables you to connect an XPL snap-on expansion module for devices such as cameras, radios, and fingerprint scanners. 24 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 1. Getting Started Getting to know your iX104 Left side view docking connector for the optional Xplore Tablet Dock guide pin receptacles See Optional accessories on page 16. Docking connector Enables you to connect the optional Xplore Tablet Dock. Guide pin receptacles Help assure secure connection of the optional Xplore Tablet Dock. iX104 Users Handbook 25 Chapter 1. Getting Started Getting to know your iX104 LED indicators The LED indicator lights show the status of system functions such as power and battery levels. Status LED Brightness LED The following table defines the various LED states. Table 1 Status LED indicator Mode/State LED State Meaning On state green, continuous The computer is on, ready for use, and functioning normally. The battery is fully charged. Charging green, blinking The AC adapter is plugged in and the battery is charging. Off state off (no light) The computer is off. Suspend mode yellow, continuous The computer is on and is in Suspend or Hibernation mode. Thermal control yellow, blinking The computer is on and is in Warm-up mode, with the LCD and backlight off. After the system has warmed to a safe level, the LCD and backlight turn on. 26 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 1. Getting Started Getting to know your iX104 Table 1 Status LED indicator (continued) Mode/State LED State Meaning On state red, blinking On state red, continuous The computer is powered on, running under battery power, and the charge level in the battery is at a minimum warning level. Plug the computer into an AC/DC power source or install a charged battery. The computer is on, running under battery power, and the charge level in the battery has reached a critical level. Plug the computer into an AC/DC power source or install a charged battery. The computer has encountered a fault and is preventing normal operation. (Contact your help desk.) Table 2 Brightness LED indicator Mode/State LED State Meaning Auto state yellow, continuous Automatic backlight control is active. Manual off Manual backlight control is enabled. The backlight is under your manual control. iX104 Users Handbook 27 Chapter 1. Getting Started Quick-start guide Quick-start guide This section is a quick guide to using the main features of your computer. (See Chapter 2 for detailed information.) Application, Windows, and hot keys Ctrl-Alt-Delete
(Secure Attention Sequence) key Screen Rotation key Function key Windows Toggle
(Alt-Tab) key Hot key 1 Hot key 2 Hot key 3 Windows Start Menu
(Ctrl-Esc) and Windows toggle key Enter key 28 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 1. Getting Started Quick-start guide Table 3 Main keys Press this key... To perform this function Log on after resuming operation from power management, powering on, or locking. After logging on, launch Windows Task Manager. Rotate screen orientation between portrait
(vertical) and landscape (horizontal). Use in combination with another key to perform various functions. (See page 30.) Toggle between programs and/or windows
(the same as pressing Alt-Tab on a keyboard). Perform the same functions as the Enter key on a keyboard. Open the Windows Start menu. Open Help, or perform a different function that you program this key to perform. Open Internet Explorer, or perform a different function that you program this key to perform. Open your email application, or perform a different function that you program this key to perform. iX104 Users Handbook 29 Chapter 1. Getting Started Quick-start guide Table 4 Function mode keys Press these keys... To perform this function Dim the brightness of the LCD backlight. Increase the brightness of the LCD backlight. Send video display to a monitor or projection panel connected to the computer (and back to the computer again). (This key combination is not programmable.) Default function: Select the input device. You can program this key combination to perform a different function. Default function: Open the pen calibration program. You can program this key combination to perform a different function. Perform the same functions as the Esc key on a keyboard. 30 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 1. Getting Started Quick-start guide Navigation keys The following illustrations and tables provide a quick reference for using the navigation keys. Navigation controls with the tablet in portrait mode scroll up joystick scroll left scroll right scroll down Press the Function key... and move the joystick in this direction... to perform this function Page Up Page Down Shift+Tab Tab iX104 Users Handbook 31 Chapter 1. Getting Started Quick-start guide Navigation controls with the tablet in landscape mode scroll up joystick scroll left scroll right scroll down Press the Function key... and move the joystick in this direction... to perform this function Page Up Page Down Shift+Tab Tab 32 iX104 Users Handbook 2 Using the iX104 This chapter contains detailed instructions for using your computer. Turning on the computer 1. Make sure the computer is off. When the computer is off, the Status LED is off. 2. Make sure the battery is charged or that the computer is plugged in to an external power source. 3. Press the Power On/Off/Suspend/Resume button. Power On/Off/
Suspend/Resume button iX104 Users Handbook 33 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Turning off the computer Turning off the computer When the computer is in Suspend mode, the Status LED is continuously yellow. 1. If the computer is in Suspend mode, press the Power On/Off/
Suspend/Resume button to resume operation. (See page 37 for information about Suspend mode.) Power On/Off/
Suspend/Resume button 2. Make sure the battery is charged or that the computer is plugged in to an external power source. 3. Save your work and close all programs. 4. From the Windows Start menu, click Turn Off Computer. 5. The Turn off computer dialog box opens. 6. Click Turn Off. 34 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Turning off the computer Using the Reset switch If the computer does not seem to be accepting input and you cannot turn it off by using the method described in Turning off the computer, press the Reset switch. (Use a ball point pen or similar instrument to press the switch). Reset switch Note Use the Reset switch only if you cannot turn off the computer by any other means, because you may lose unsaved data. iX104 Users Handbook 35 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Suspending and resuming operation Suspending and resuming operation To conserve battery power when you do not want to turn off the computer or when you need to install a charged battery pack, put the computer into Suspend mode. (You can suspend operation without closing any programs or Windows.) When you suspend operation:
Programs that are running stop (but do not close). Active data is saved. The system enters one of the following low-power modes:
Suspend-to-RAM mode The Status LED light is continuously yellow. Active data is saved in RAM and most other components are turned off. Although the computer uses very little power when in Suspend-to-RAM mode, eventually the batterys power does run out. If you will not be using the computer for an extended period of time, turn the computer off instead of using Suspend-to-RAM mode.
Hibernation mode Active data is saved on the hard disk and power usage is reduced to the same level as when the computer is turned off. In Hibernation mode, there is no danger of losing data if battery power is lost. Note For more information, see Using power options on page 58. 36 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Suspending and resuming operation Notes If you have set your computer to turn power off (in the Power Options utility in Windows Control Panel), you cannot suspend operation. To change power settings, see Using power options on page 58. If the Suspend action of the Power On/Off/Suspend/Resume button has been disabled to prevent accidental interruption, pressing the button does not suspend the computer. You must use a software application to suspend the computer. For more information, contact your help desk or your iX104 dealer. If your computer is connected to a network, the network may automatically log you off after a period of inactivity while system operation is suspended. Contact your help desk or system administrator to learn your log-off time limit. Suspending operation Use one of the following methods to suspend operation:
Method 1 Press the Power On/Off/Suspend/Resume button. Power On/Off/
Suspend/Resume button Method 2 1. From the Windows Start menu, press Turn Off Computer. 2. The Turn off computer dialog box opens. iX104 Users Handbook 37 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Suspending and resuming operation 3. Press Stand By. When operation is suspended, the Status LED displays a continuous yellow light. Status LED Resuming operation To resume operation when the computer is in Suspend mode, press the Power On/Off/Suspend/Resume button. Note Press the button only once. Power On/Off/
Suspend/Resume button 38 iX104 Users Handbook Using the pen Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the pen After a minute or two, the computer resumes normal operation. When the Status LED displays a continuous green light, you can begin using the computer. Note Resuming operation from Hibernation mode takes a little longer than from Suspend-to-RAM mode. You can use the pen to select items and to navigate through programs. If your computer is an iX104-TPC (active screen):
Use the special multi-function pen provided with the computer. If your computer is an iX104 (touch screen):
Use the pen provided with the computer, another similar pointing device, or your finger.
WARNING Do not use items such as a ball point pen or a screwdriver that can damage the computer. Damage caused by using an item not provided with the computer is not covered by the iX104 warranty. Note Before you use the pen the first time, or if the action you are trying to perform does not occur when you use the pen, calibrate the pen as described in Calibrating the pen on page 77. iX104 Users Handbook 39 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the pen Using the pen to perform mouse functions To perform this function... Do this Select an object
(left button click). Perform a double-click. Perform a right-click. right-click icon right-click button Move or drag an object. Tap the pen tip once on the object. Quickly tap the pen tip twice on the object. If your computer is an iX104
(touch screen):
In the Windows taskbar, press the right-click icon; then click the object. If your computer is an iX104-TPC
(active screen):
Hold the pen directly on the object until the right-click icon appears. or Press the right-click button on the pen while you click the object. Place the pen tip on the object; then continue to hold the pen tip against the screen as you move the pen. 40 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the pen Changing the pen double-click speed The pen double-click speed is in sync with the mouse double-click speed. To change the speed:
1. Click the Windows Start button. 2. Click the Settings option. 3. Click the Control Panel option. 4. In the Control Panel window:
If your computer is an iX104 (touch screen):
Click the Pointer Devices icon. If your computer is an iX104-TPC (active screen):
Click the Tablet and Pen Settings icon. 5. Click the Windows tab. 6. Follow the instructions that appear in the Windows tab. iX104 Users Handbook 41 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the pen Positioning the pen and pen tether The pen tether helps prevent the loss of your pen. The following illustration shows how to position the pen and pen tether. pen pen tether 42 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the joystick (the navigation control key) Using the joystick (the navigation control key) joystick
(navigation control key) Press the joystick to perform the same functions as pressing Enter on a keyboard. Push the joystick up, down, left or right to move a highlighted item accordingly (the same as pressing the arrow keys on a keyboard). Use the Fn key in combination with the joystick to perform other functions, such as Page Up and Tab. Note See page 31 and page 32 for diagrams of how to use the joystick and other navigation control buttons. iX104 Users Handbook 43 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Changing the screen orientation Changing the screen orientation To rotate the screen orientation from portrait (vertical) to landscape
(horizontal) mode or from landscape to portrait mode, press the screen rotation key. 44 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Adjusting the screen brightness Adjusting the screen brightness To dim the brightness of the LCD backlight:
Press the Function key and the Windows toggle key. To increase the brightness of the LCD backlight:
Press the Function key and the Windows Start key. Disabling automatic backlight control When the ambient light sensor is enabled, the computer automatically controls the amount of backlight sent to the screen to provide optimum brightness for the lighting conditions in which you are working. When the ambient light sensor is enabled, the Brightness LED glows continuously yellow. When the ambient light sensor is disabled and the backlight is under manual control, the Brightness LED is off. Brightness LED To disable automatic backlight control, see Enabling manual LCD backlight control on page 87. iX104 Users Handbook 45 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Docking the iX104 Docking the iX104 If you have the optional Xplore Tablet Dock (see Optional accessories on page 16), connect it to the iX104 at the docking port. docking port guide pin receptacles 46 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Connecting devices Connecting devices Refer to the following subsections for information about connecting external devices to your computer. Note If the device you want to use does not appear to be working with your computer, the device may need to be enabled in the computers configuration program. Contact your local help desk or Xplore reseller. Connecting FireWire devices Connect a FireWire device (such as a digital camera, a digital video camera, or a CD-ROM or DVD drive) to the Firewire (IEEE 1394) connector on the computer. FireWire
(IEEE 1394) connector iX104 Users Handbook 47 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Connecting devices Connecting to a local area network Connect a local area network (LAN) cables RJ-45 connector to the internal LAN interface card. (See your network system administrator for more information.) LAN connector Connecting USB-compatible devices Connect any USB-compatible device to the computers USB port. Devices must be in compliance with USB Standard Revision 2.0. USB port 48 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Connecting devices Connecting an external microphone microphone connector Adjusting microphone volume If necessary, adjust the volume of the microphone as follows:
1. Press the Windows Start key. 2. Click the Control Panel option. 3. In the Control Panel window, double-click the Sounds and Audio Properties icon. In the Sounds and Audio Properties window, click the Audio tab. In the Sound recording area, click the Volume button. 4. 5. 6. Adjust the volume. 7. Click OK. iX104 Users Handbook 49 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Connecting devices Connecting a headphone or speakers headphone/speakers connector Adjusting headphone or speaker volume 1. Click the audio icon in the Status area of the Windows taskbar. The volume control area opens. If the Mute check box is checked, uncheck it. 2. 3. Move the slider bar up or down to increase or decrease the volume. 50 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Connecting devices Connecting a monitor or projection panel Monitor/projection panel connector Activating the monitor or projection panel To change the video output to the monitor or projection panel:
Press the Fn-P1 key combination. To change the video output back to the computer screen:
Press the Fn-P1 key combination again. iX104 Users Handbook 51 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Connecting devices Connecting an XPL snap-on expansion module Top view Side view XPL expansion port 52 iX104 Users Handbook Using the battery Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the battery You can recharge, remove, and replace the battery pack. Charging the battery pack If you do not have an external battery charger Follow these steps to charge the battery while it is installed in the computer:
1. Connect a power source, such as an AC adapter or cigarette lighter adapter, to the power connector on the computer. power connector If the battery charge is below 90%, the battery begins charging and the Status LED flashes green. (If the battery charge is higher than 90%, the battery will not charge, preventing battery overcharge.) iX104 Users Handbook 53 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the battery 2. Check the level of charge. (See Checking battery power status on page 59.) The charging process continues until the battery charge reaches 100%. Table 5 shows the approximate time required to charge the battery level to 100%. Table 5 Approximate battery charge time Battery pack capacity Charge time when the computer is not in use Charge time when the computer is in use*
4500 mAh 2.5 hours 9000 mAh 3.5 hours 3.5 hours 5.5 hours
* Varies according to the application(s) in use. If you have an external battery charger 1. Remove the battery pack (see page 55). 2. Use the external battery charger to charge the battery. 3. Install the battery (see page 57). 54 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the battery Removing and installing the battery You can remove the battery and use an (optional) external charger to charge it. Removing the battery 1. To swap with a charged battery:
Use one of the methods described in Suspending operation on page 37 to suspend operation. If a charged battery is not available:
Save your work and close all running programs; then shut down the computer or put the computer in Hibernation mode
(see Suspending operation on page 37). Note: To avoid losing unsaved data, wait until the computer has completed switching to Suspended mode before removing the battery. iX104 Users Handbook 55 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the battery 2. On the computer, slide the battery release latch in the direction indicated. removable battery battery release latch 3. Pull the battery away from the computer and remove it. Note After removing the battery, you must replace the battery or connect the computer to an external power supply within 3 to 5 minutes or the computer completely loses power. 56 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the battery Installing the battery 1. Orient the battery with the slides in the empty battery tray. 2. Slide the battery into the tray and press it firmly until it is seated. The battery release latch returns to its original position and locks the battery in place. Discarding a battery Dispose of a spent battery in accordance with your local government regulations. Under Federal, state, or local law, it may be illegal to put batteries in the trash. Contact your system administrator or your municipal solid waste disposal department or provider for information. iX104 Users Handbook 57 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the battery Using power options This section explains how to use the Power Options Properties window to manage the computers power use. On the Windows taskbar, click the battery icon. The Power Options Properties window opens. Changing the computers power schemes In the Power Options Properties window, select the Power Schemes tab; then select options from the drop-down lists. 58 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the battery Changing battery alarm settings In the Power Options Properties window (page 58), select the Alarms tab; then use the slider bars to change the alarm settings. Checking battery power status In the Power Options Properties window (page 58), select the Power Meter tab. The window shows the amount of power left in the battery. iX104 Users Handbook 59 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the battery Selecting power settings In the Power Options Properties window (page 58), select the Advanced tab; then select the power settings options you want to use. Enabling Hibernation mode In the Power Options Properties window (page 58), select the Hibernate tab; then check the Enable Hibernation check box. 60 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the battery Tips for conserving battery power The following tips help you extend the life of your battery by conserving battery power:
Use an external power source such as the AC or auto adapter whenever available. Suspend operation if you know that you will not be using the system for a while. (See Suspending operation on page 37.) Turn off the computer if you will not be using it for an extended period of time. Adjust power options to automatically conserve power. (See Using power options on page 58.) iX104 Users Handbook 61 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Programming hot keys Programming hot keys Xplore pre-programs the P1, P2, and P3 hot keys and Function mode hot key combinations to perform certain functions by default. However, you can program them to perform different functions, as described in this section. Table 6 Programmable hot keys Key Default function Starts Help. Starts Internet Explorer. Starts your email application. Table 7 Programmable Function mode hot key combinations Key combination Default function Sends video display to a monitor or projection panel. (Not programmable.) Selects the input device. Starts the pen calibration program. 62 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Programming hot keys Programming hot keys to start applications, open documents, or go to a Web site 1. In the Status area of the Windows taskbar, click the iX104 Configuration icon. The Launch Button QuickShow dialog box opens. 2. Click the Configure button. The Panel Control Center window opens. iX104 Users Handbook 63 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Programming hot keys 3. Click the Change button next to the key or key combination you want to program. The following options appear:
4. Click Launch an Application, Document or Web site. The following options appear:
64 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Programming hot keys 5. To start an application:
a Click Launch an Application. b In the File text box, type the name of the application you want the hot key or Function mode hot key combination to start. Note: Type the name of executable file that starts the application. For example: word.exe, notepad.exe, excel.exe. c Click Change. To open a document:
a Click Open a Document. b In the File text box, type the name of the document you want the hot key or Function mode hot key combination to open.
(For example: spreadsheet.xls, airports.doc, wiringdiagram.jpg) c Click Change. iX104 Users Handbook 65 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Programming hot keys To open a multimedia file:
a Click Open a Multimedia file. b In the File text box, type the name of the multimedia file you want the hot key or Function mode hot key combination to open. (For example: 911training.dir, demo.ppt) c Click Change. To open a Web page:
a Click Open a Web page. b In the File text box, type the URL of the Web page you want the hot key or Function mode hot key combination to open.
(For example: http://www.xploretech.com) c Click Change. 6. Program more hot keys, or click Finish to close the Panel Control Center window. 66 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Programming hot keys Programming hot keys to perform pre-defined functions 1. In the Status area of the Windows taskbar, click the iX104 Configuration icon. The Launch Button QuickShow dialog box opens. 2. Click the Configure button. The Panel Control Center window opens. 3. Next to the key or key combination you want to program, click the Change button. iX104 Users Handbook 67 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Programming hot keys The following options appear:
4. Click Start a pre-defined function. 5. In the Function selection drop-down list, select an option. 6. Program more hot keys, or click Finish to close the Panel Control Center window. 68 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Programming hot keys Programming hot keys to perform other key functions 1. In the Status area of the Windows taskbar, click the iX104 Configuration icon. The Launch Button QuickShow dialog box opens. 2. Click the Configure button. The Panel Control Center window opens. 3. Next to the key or key combination you want to program, click the Change button. iX104 Users Handbook 69 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Programming hot keys The following options appear:
4. Click Press a key or key combination. The following options appear:
70 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Programming hot keys 5. If you want the hot key or hot key combination to perform the function of a single key:
a If the Ctrl, Alt, or Shift boxes are checked, uncheck them. b Click the key you want the hot key or hot key combination to perform. (For example: F6, G, or Caps Lock) If you want the hot key or hot key combination to perform the function of a key combination:
a Check the Ctrl, Alt, or Shift box. b From the drop-down list, select the additional key, or click the key on the keyboard. Examples To cause the hot key to perform the print screen function
(Alt-Print Scrn): Check the Alt check box; then select PrtScr from the drop-down list. To cause the hot key to perform the paste function (Ctrl-V):
Check the Ctrl check box; then click the V key. 6. Program more hot keys, or click Finish to close the Panel Control Center window. iX104 Users Handbook 71 72 iX104 Users Handbook 3 Maintaining the iX104 This chapter provides instructions for maintaining your computer. Caring for the computer This section provides information about how to keep your computer in top working condition. Checking power cords and connectors Check AC and DC power cords and power connectors periodically for damage. Replace the power cord immediately if you find any damage. Protecting the computer from damage Your computer is designed to sustain a multiple-axis drop to a non-yielding surface. Do not intentionally drop the computer, because the cumulative effects of multiple drops may damage the computer. Do not place heavy objects on the computer. Do not disassemble the computer. Keep the computer at least 5 inches (13 centimeters) away from any electrical appliance that generates a strong magnetic field, such as a motor, magnet, TV, refrigerator, or large audio speakers. iX104 Users Handbook 73 Chapter 3. Maintaining the iX104 Caring for the computer Preventing the computer from overheating The computer monitors its internal temperature. As the internal temperature approaches the tolerable limits of heat-sensitive components, system functions are automatically limited or turned off to prevent damage. To prevent the computer from overheating, do not obstruct the computers air vents. air vents air vents 74 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 3. Maintaining the iX104 Caring for the computer Storing the computer You can store the computer in the Off state for about 30 days with a fully charged battery installed. After this period, recharge the battery or replace it with a charged battery. If you intend to store the computer for more than 30 days, remove the battery pack and keep it in a cool place. Caring for the display screen To clean the display screen, dampen a soft cotton cloth with water or isopropyl alcohol and gently wipe the screen surface. Protecting the display screen The screen protector is a durable, replaceable writing surface that protects the display screen from abrasion. To obtain additional screen protectors, check with your reseller, or go to the Xplore Web site at www.xploretech.com for ordering information. Additional information about installation is included with the screen protectors. iX104 Users Handbook 75 Chapter 3. Maintaining the iX104 Caring for the computer Removing the screen protector Slide your fingernail under the edge of the screen protector and pull the protector away from the screen. edge Installing a new screen protector Follow the instructions included with your screen protector replacement kit. Note If a screen protector is already installed on the display screen, remove it before installing the new screen protector. 76 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 3. Maintaining the iX104 Calibrating the pen Calibrating the pen Calibrating the pen adjusts the cursor position on the screen relative to the position of the pen tip. Calibrate the pen to adjust the distance error between where the pen is actually touching the screen and where the computer is registering the pen touch. You may need to calibrate the pen in the following situations:
You are using the pen for the first time. The previous user of the computer writes with the opposite hand or at a different pen angle. The computer has not been used for some time. The computer has been serviced. iX104 Users Handbook 77 Chapter 3. Maintaining the iX104 Calibrating the pen Calibrating the pen for an iX104 touch screen 1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel. The Control Panel opens. Pointer Devices icon 2. Click the Pointer Devices icon. The Pointer Device Properties window opens. 78 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 3. Maintaining the iX104 Calibrating the pen 3. Click Calibrate. The Calibration program starts. 4. Follow the instructions that appear on the screen. 5. When you finish, click OK. Calibrating the pen for an iX104-TPC active screen 1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel. The Control Panel opens. Tablet and Pen Settings icon 2. Click the Tablet and Pen Settings icon. iX104 Users Handbook 79 Chapter 3. Maintaining the iX104 When to replace the pen The Tablet and Pen Settings window opens. 3. In the Calibration area drop-down list, select the mode for which you want to calibrate the pen: Landscape or Portrait; then click Calibrate. The Calibration program starts. 4. Follow the instructions that appear on the screen. 5. When you finish, click OK. When to replace the pen With use, the pen tip may become worn and can scratch the screen. If your pen exhibits one of the following problems, replace the pen:
The pen does not move freely across the screen. The pen does not perform as expected. 80 iX104 Users Handbook A Troubleshooting Table 8 contains solutions to some problems. If you cannot solve the problem by taking the actions described, contact your local help desk or your reseller for further assistance. Table 8 Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause and solution Computer will not start. The computer will not resume operation after being suspended. The battery may be defective or discharged to a critically low level. Connect an external power supply (such as the AC adapter) or install a charged battery. See Using the battery on page 53. Internal components may be above or below the acceptable operating range (below -20 C or above 60 C). After the temperature returns to safe operating range the computer will start. The battery may be defective or discharged to a critically low level. When the battery reaches a critically low level, the computer is forced into Suspend- to-RAM mode to avoid a total system power failure. Connect an external power supply
(such as the AC adapter) or install a charged battery. See Using the pen on page 39 and Using the battery on page 53. The computer may be at the critical thermal limit. To avoid damage to heat-sensitive components, the computer enters Suspend-to-RAM mode when the computer operates above 60 C. Operation automatically resumes when the computer cools to below 60 C. Move the computer to a cooler location. iX104 Users Handbook 81 Appendix A. Troubleshooting Table 8 Troubleshooting (continued) Problem Possible cause and solution Display screen is blank or difficult to read. Confirm that the computer is on (the Power icon is displayed continuously in the Status area). The brightness may be set too low, causing the screen to appear too dark. To change system brightness, press the Fn and Start keys to open the Xplore menu and adjust the brightness. (See page 30.) An external monitor may be selected. Press the Fn and P1 keys to select the computer display screen. (See page 30.) The video time-out may have expired. Tap the display screen to reactivate the display. Note: This is a normal, power-saving feature. If the Status light is blinking red, the computer is in Suspend-
to-RAM mode because the temperature is below -20 C or above 60 C. When the temperature returns to a safe operating range, the display screen automatically comes back on. If possible, move the computer to a warmer or cooler location. If the Status light is continually yellow, the computer is in Suspend or Hibernate mode. Press the Power On/Off key to resume. Cursor is not tracking the pen. Calibrate the pen. See Calibrating the pen on page 77. Computer is not responding to the pen. Connect an external USB keyboard to the computer. If the computer does not respond to the external keyboard, the application or operating system may have been corrupted. Press the Reset key. (See page 35.) If the system responds to a keyboard but not to the pen, contact your local help desk or reseller for further assistance. 82 iX104 Users Handbook Appendix A. Troubleshooting Table 8 Troubleshooting (continued) Problem Possible cause and solution Headphone or speaker volume is too low. The volume may be in Mute mode or set too low. Follow the instructions in Adjusting headphone or speaker volume on page 50. Make sure the volume control in your audio software is set to an audible level. An external device is not working with the computer. The device may need to be enabled in the computers configuration program (BIOS Setup). Contact your local help desk or reseller. The Status LED is red, continuous. The Status LED is red, blinking. The computer is on, running under battery power, and the charge level in the battery has reached a critical level. Plug the computer into an AC/DC power source or install a charged battery. The system has encountered a fault and is preventing normal operation. Contact your local help desk. The computer is powered on, running under battery power, and the charge level in the battery is at a minimum warning level. Plug the computer into an AC/DC power source or install a charged battery. iX104 Users Handbook 83 84 iX104 Users Handbook B Using BIOS and AOS Functions This appendix explains how to use the application and navigation buttons with the Basic Input-Output System (BIOS) program and the Advanced Operating System (AOS) Options menu. Note These functions are typically for use only by your system administrator or by authorized service technicians. Table 9 Using BIOS and AOS functions Use this button... To perform this function To start the BIOS program: When the computer is booting, press the P2 button and follow the instructions that appear on the screen. Navigate. (You can also use the joystick to navigate, as described below.) Push the joystick control up, down, left or right to move a highlighted item accordingly
(the same as pressing the arrow keys on a keyboard). Press the Enter button to perform the same functions as pressing Enter on a keyboard. iX104 Users Handbook 85 Appendix B. Using BIOS and AOS Functions Table 9 Using BIOS and AOS functions (continued) Use this button... To perform this function When the system is displaying a BIOS error
(such as an invalid checksum), press the P1 button to bypass the error message and attempt a normal boot sequence (the same as the F1 key on a keyboard). When the system is displaying the iX104 logo, press the P2 button to run the BIOS setup utility (the same as the F2 key on a keyboard). When the system is displaying the operating system boot screen, press the P3 button to open the Advanced Operation System Options menu (the same as the F8 key on a keyboard). 86 iX104 Users Handbook Appendix B. Using BIOS and AOS Functions Enabling manual LCD backlight control Enabling manual LCD backlight control When the LCD backlight control is in manual mode, the ambient light sensor is disabled and the computer no longer automatically controls the screen brightness. Follow these steps to disable the sensor and enable manual LCD backlight control:
1. When the computer is booting, press the Function and P2 buttons to start the BIOS Setup Utility. The utility starts, displaying the Information Viewer tab. iX104 Users Handbook 87 Appendix B. Using BIOS and AOS Functions Enabling manual LCD backlight control 2. Select the LCD tab. In the LCD Backlight Control drop-down list, select Manual. 3. 4. Click OK. 88 iX104 Users Handbook C Glossary Adapter. A device that provides an interface between two dissimilar electronic devices. For example, the AC adapter modifies the power from a wall outlet for use by the computer. Advanced Power Management (APM). A facility consisting of one or more layers of software that support power management. The APM software interface enables applications, operating systems, device drivers, and the APM BIOS to work together to reduce power consumption. Alternating Current (AC). Electric current that reverses its direction of flow at regular intervals. Analog signal. A signal with characteristics such as amplitude and frequency that vary in proportion to (are an analog of) the value to be transmitted. Voice communications are analog signals. Application. A program that performs specific tasks on your computer, such as word processing or creating spreadsheets. BIOS. Programs that contain such basic hardware operations as an interaction with diskette drives, hard disk drives, and the memory. Board. A circuit board. An internal card containing electronic components called chips, which perform a specific function or increase the capabilities of the system. Boot. To load a program or operating system into system memory. Bits Per Second (BPS). In serial transmission, the instantaneous bit speed with which a device or channel transmits a character. Card. Synonym for board; see board. iX104 Users Handbook 89 Appendix C. Glossary Compact Disk-Read Only Memory (CD-ROM). Stores data on metal-plated plastic discs. Compatibility. 1.The ability of one computer to accept and process data in the same method as another computer without modifying the data or the media upon which it is being transferred. 2.The ability of one device to connect or communicate with another system or component. Configuration. The specific combination of hardware components of the computer, and their operating status. The configuration of your computer includes pre-defined memory, type and speed of microprocessor, type of and size of hard disk drive, etc. Default. The preset parameter value automatically selected by the computer when you or a program do not provide instructions. Device driver. A program that controls communication between a specific peripheral device and the computer. Disk drive. The physical device that enables the computer to read from, and write to, a disk. Display. An image-producing device used to view computer output. Double-click. To press and release the pen/stylus twice within a time frame you define, without moving the pointer off the choice. Driver. Software that allows an application program to communicate with a particular piece of equipment, such as a printer or the pen/
stylus. Hard disk drive (HDD). A sealed mass storage device used for storage and fast retrieval of programs and data. The factory installs this disk and only a trained engineer can remove it for servicing. Hardware. The physical electronic and mechanical components of a computer system. typically, the computer itself, CPU, memory, etc. Hertz. A unit of wave frequency that equals one cycle per second. 90 iX104 Users Handbook Appendix C. Glossary Interface. 1. Hardware and/or software components used specifically to connect one computer or device to another. 2. To physically connect one system or device to another to exchange information. 3. The point of contact between user, the computer, and the program (for example, the pen/stylus or a menu). Kilobyte (KB). A unit of 1024 bytes measuring storage space, typically in memory or on storage media such as a diskette or hard disk drive. Local area network (LAN). Assembly of separate computers into an integrated network that connects the various computers together and to common devices such as printers and fax machines. Light Emitting Diode (LED). A semiconductor device that emits light when a current is applied. Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). liquid crystal sealed between two sheets of glass coated with transparent conducting material. Applying a voltage between the glass sheets darkens the liquid crystal to provide contrast to lighted portions of the display. Megabyte (MB). A unit of data storage equal to 1024 kilobytes. Megahertz (MHz). a unit of wave frequency that equals 1 million cycles per second. Modem. A device that connects your computer to a telephone line, allowing it to communicate with another computer at another location. PC Card. A plug-in accessory card that conforms to the PCMCIA standard. Pen. See stylus. Peripheral device. An input/output device that is external to the central processor and/or main memory such as a printer or scanner. Pixel. Picture elements (tiny dots) that compose a screen image. iX104 Users Handbook 91 Appendix C. Glossary Port. The electrical connection through which the computer sends and receives data to and from devices or other computers. Program. A set of instructions a computer can execute to tell the system what to do and how to do it. Random Access Memory (RAM). A hardware component of your computer that temporarily stores active program code and data. Reset. The act of reloading the operating system. Resolution. The number of pixels displayed on the screen. A higher resolution provides greater clarity and allows more information to be displayed on the screen at once. Restart. Resetting a computer without turning it off (also called warm boot or soft reset). Resume. The act of returning the computer to an active, operational state. Read Only Memory (ROM). The portion of your computers memory that contains permanent instructions, and which cannot be modified. Status Indicator (LED). a light above the LCD screen which indicates the current status of a particular device or hardware component. Stylus. A writing instrument. For pen computers, the stylus is used to interface with the LCD and digitizer. Suspend mode. A power conservation mode in which electrical current is removed from most components of the computer. Universal Serial Bus. A serial interface that enables communication between devices and the computer. 92 iX104 Users Handbook D Hardware Specifications This appendix provides specifications for the iX104. Physical specifications Dimensions 11.20 x 8.25 x 1.6 (WxHxD) 283.9mm x 209.3mm x 40.8mm Weight 4.45 lbs. (2.02kg)*
Processing specifications CPU Chip set Processor speed Pentium III with SpeedStep technology*
133MHz 866 MHz*
* Varies according to your computers configuration. iX104 Users Handbook 93 Appendix D. Hardware Specifications Memory/storage specifications Main RAM 256MB SDRAM (on-board/PC133) 144-pin SODIMM modules 512MB module available. Special rugged memory modules: conformal coated and custom locking tabs to protect against moisture and vibration L1 Cache (CPU) 32KB on-die L2 Cache BIOS ROM Hard Disk Drive 512KB on-die 8Mbit (FWH) 2.5 HDD shock mounted Minimum 20GB IDE HDD*
Ultra DMA 100 BIOS ROM 8Mbit (FWH)
* Varies according to your computers configuration. 94 iX104 Users Handbook Appendix D. Hardware Specifications Display specifications Display VRAM Color LCD Active Digital Sensor and Pen or Passive Palm Rejection Touch Panel 32-bit True color 10.4 TFT XGA (1024x768), 16M colors Brightness: 16 levels Viewing Angle:
Horizontal: 30 degrees (min.) Vertical: 10 degrees (min.) Contrast Ratio: Typ. 250:1, Min 100:1 Intel 830M chipset with 48 MB shared memory using Unified Memory Architecture (UMA) delivers low-power, high-performance 3D/2D graphics, video, and display capabilities. Dynamic Video Memory Technology (DVMT) dynamically responds to application requirements and efficiently allocates the proper amount of memory (48 MB maximum) for optimal graphics and system performance. iX104 Users Handbook 95 Appendix D. Hardware Specifications Interface specifications Wireless Radio Bays One internal Type 1 or Type II PC Card slot Integrated Interfaces
(PCMCIA Cardbus version 3.0) One Internal mini-PCI slot One internal OEM radio bay for RIM 1902G and 1802G GSM/GPRS radios DC-in USB (1) 2.0 Microphone Jack Headset Jack Firewire (IEEE 1394) LAN (RJ-45) 15-pin D-SUB connector for external VGA monitor KeyPad / User Controls Application buttons with primary and Audio secondary functions Power On/Off/Suspend/Resume button Emergency Shutoff/Reset button Integrated joystick slew control 97 Codec On-board microphone with noise cancellation On-board integrated stereo speakers (1W each) Status Indicators Power, Charge/DC-in, Warning 96 iX104 Users Handbook Appendix D. Hardware Specifications Power specifications Main Battery Optional Spare Battery 2 cell Removable Lithium Ion Polymer 10.8V @ 4500mAh Warm-swappable Recharge Time:
Suspend Life: Min. 5 days Off State: Approximately 30 days 4 cell Removable Lithium Ion Polymer 10.8V @ 9000mAh Warm-swappable Recharge Time:
Suspend Life: Min. 5 days Off State: Approximately 30 days Bridge Battery AC Adapter 6-cell Li ION, 45mAh Life: (with Suspend-to-RAM on bridge battery only): 3 to 5 minutes from full charge Auto-sensing 100-240V, supplying 19 VDC, with a current of 3.75 A iX104 Users Handbook 97 Appendix D. Hardware Specifications Environmental specifications Temperature Operating:
Humidity Shock/Drop Vibration Enclosure Class
-4o to 140o F (-20o to 60o C) Storage:
-40o to 167o F (-40o to 75o C) 0% to 95% non-condensing Three-foot drop to concrete, all surfaces, edges and corners 0.04g^2/Hz, 20 Hz - 1000 Hz
-6dB/octive 1000 Hz - 2000 Hz Blowing rain:
4/hr, 40 mph wind and MIL-STD-810F Method 506.4 Procedure 1 Drip:
7 gal/ft2/hr MIL-STD-810F Method 506.4 Procedure III Sand and dust:
Particle size < 149 m, 10 + 7 g/m3 particle density 1.5 m/s to 8.9 m/s wind speed MIL-STD-810F Method 510.4 Procedure 1 Salt Fog:
5% saline for 48 hr (12 hr wet, 12 hr dry, 2 cycles) MIL-STD-810F Method 509.4 Contamination by fluids:
Detergents, brake fluid, aromatic hydrocarbons MIL-STD-810F Method 504 Solar radiation:
1120 W/m2 (355 Btu/ft2/hr) UVB @ 50 C, 7x24 hr cycles MIL-STD-810F Method 505.4 98 iX104 Users Handbook Appendix D. Hardware Specifications Agency approvals Emissions Immunity Safety EN55022 (CISPR22) Class B FCC 15, Class B DOC Class B CE MARK EN55024 FCC 15, Class B DOC Class B UL and cUL Listed, UL 1950, 3rd Edition TuV T-Mark, EN60950 UL and cUL Listed, UL 1604*
RF exposure OET 65 Radio approvals 47 CFR Part 22, 24 47 CFR Part 15C Operating systems Operating Systems Microsoft Windows XP Tablet PC Edition Microsoft Windows XP Professional Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional iX104 Users Handbook 99 100 iX104 Users Handbook E Agency Notices FCC notices This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Modifications not expressly approved by Xplore Technologies could void this users authority to operate the equipment. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. iX104 Users Handbook 101 Appendix E. Agency Notices RF eposure Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions specified by the FCC with the tablet PC transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the tablet PC while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the tablet PC is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output. Before a tablet PC model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the limit established by the government-adopted requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed in positions and locations (e.g., at the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC for each model.
(Body-worn measurements may differ among tablet PC models, depending upon available accessories and FCC requirements). While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various tablet PCs and at various positions, they all meet the government requirement for safe exposure. This device was evaluated and shown to comply with FCC SAR guidelines. Avoid covering or holding antennas when transmitting. Antenna locations are shown in the following figure. antenna locations 102 iX104 Users Handbook Appendix E. Agency Notices For body worn operation, to maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines, use only Xplore approved accessories. When carrying the tablet PC while it is on, use the specific Xplore-supplied or approved carrying case, holster, or other body-worn accessory. Use of non-Xplore-approved accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines and should be avoided. Health and Safety Information Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals Your wireless tablet PC is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on the safety standards previously set by both U.S. and international standards bodies:
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) IEEE. C95.1-1992 National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement
(NCRP). Report 86. 1986 International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection
(ICNIRP) 1996 Ministry of Health (Canada), Safety Code 6. The standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for wireless mobile tablet PCs employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg . iX104 Users Handbook 103 Appendix E. Agency Notices Note In the U.S. and Canada, the SAR limit for mobile tablet PCs used by the public is 1.6 watts/kg (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in. DOC (Industry Canada Notices) Notice to Users of Radio and Television This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations CET appareil numrique de la class B respecte toutes les exigence du Rglement sur le matrial brouilleur du Canada. Notice to Users of the Canadian Telephone Network Notice This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical Specifications. This is confirmed by the registration number. The abbreviation, IC, before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment. Before connecting this equipment to a telephone line the user should ensure that it is permissible to connect this equipment to the local telecommunication facilities. The user should be aware that compliance with the certification standards does not prevent service degradation in some situations. 104 iX104 Users Handbook Appendix E. Agency Notices Repairs to telecommunication equipment should be made by a Canadian authorized maintenance facility. Any repairs or alterations not expressly approved by Xplore or any equipment failures may give the telecommunication company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment from the telephone line. Notice The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this terminal equipment is 0.0. The REN assigned to each terminal equipment provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed five. Avis Aux Utilisateurs Du Rseau Tlphonique Canadien Industrie Canada a approuv le materiel. utilisateur est averti que mme la conformit aux normes de certification ne peut dans certains cas empcher la dgradation du service. quipement de la ligne tlphonique. excde pas 5. UL Notice This unit requires an AC adapter to operate. Use only UL Listed Class 2 Adapters with an output rating of 19 VDC, with a current of 3.75 A. AC Adapter output polarity:
iX104 Users Handbook 105 Appendix E. Agency Notices For authorized repair technicians only
WARNING For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with the same type and rating fuse.
WARNING Danger of explosion if Lithium (clock) battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instruction. System disposal In the event of system disposal, observe the following information regarding proper procedures in the State of Vermont. The liquid crystal display (LCD) lamps used in this system contain mercury. In the event of system disposal, be sure to follow local guidelines. 106 iX104 Users Handbook Index A air flow vents, location 22 ambient light sensor disabling 45 location 19 antenna covers, location 20 B battery alarm settings, changing 59 battery pack charge time 54 charging 53 checking charge status 59 checking the charge 54 conserving power 61 discarding 57 installing 57 location 20 removing 55 battery release latch, location 20 BIOS Setup Utility, using 85 C CD-ROM drive, connecting 47 convection air flow cover, location 20 D digital camera, connecting 47 digital video camera, connecting 47 docking 46 double-click, performing with pen 40 dragging and dropping, performing with pen 40 DVD drive, connecting 47 E email, starting 29 F Firewire (IEEE 1394) connector, location 23 Firewire devices, connecting 47 H headphone connector, location 23 headphone volume, adjusting 50 headphone, connecting 50 Hibernation mode description 36 enabling 60 hot keys, programming, see keys, programming hot keys I input device, selecting 30 Internet Explorer, starting 29 iX104 accessories 16 maintaining 73 preventing overheating 74 protecting from damage 73 iX104 Users Handbook 107 Index safety procedures 73 storing 75 J joystick using 43 using in landscape mode 32 using in portrait mode 31 K Kensington lock slot, location 22 keys Alt-Tab description 29 location 28 Ctrl-Alt-Del 29 description 29 Ctrl-Alt-Delete location 28 Ctrl-Esc description 29 location 28 descriptions 29 Enter description 29 location 28 Esc, using 30 Function description 29 location 28 Function mode hot key combinations default functions 62 descriptions 30 navigation, using 31 P1 P2 P3 default function 62 description 29 location 28 default function 62 description 29 location 28 default function 62 description 29 location 28 Power On/Off/Suspend/Resume location 22 programming hot keys 62, 63 to perform other key functions 69 to perform pre-defined functions 67 quick-start diagram 28 Screen Rotation description 29 location 28 Secure Attention Sequence (SAS) 28 Windows Start Menu description 29 location 28 Windows Toggle description 29 location 28 L LAN connector, location 23 LCD backlight decreasing brightness 30, 45 disabling automatic control 45 enabling manual control 87 increasing brightness 30, 45 108 iX104 Users Handbook LEDs 26 Brightness LED meanings 27 Status LED meanings 26 left button click, performing with pen 40 local area network (LAN), connecting to 48 logging on 29 M microphone connecting external 49 connector location 23 location 19 volume, adjusting 49 monitor activating 51 connecting 51 sending video display to 30 monitor connector, location 23 N navigating in landscape mode 32 in portrait mode 31 Navigation 32 navigation control key, see joystick 43 O online help, opening 29 P Page Down performing in landscape mode 32 performing in portrait mode 31 Index Page Up performing in landscape mode 32 performing in portrait mode 31 pen calibrating 77 double-click speed, changing 41 dragging and dropping 40 holder, location 20 location 20 performing a double-click 40 performing a right-click 40 performing left button click 40 positioning in holder 42 replacing 80 tether, using 42 using 39, 40 pen calibration program opening 30 using 77 location 22 opening 58 power connector, location 23 Power On/Off/ Suspend/Resume key Power Options Properties window power schemes, changing 58 power settings, changing 60 power use, managing 58 projection panel activating 51 connecting 51 sending video display to 30 iX104 Users Handbook 109 Index Q quick-start guide 28 R Reset switch location 19 using 35 resuming operation 38 right-click, performing with pen 40 S screen landscape mode 29 portrait mode 29 protecting 75 screen orientation changing 44 landscape 44 portrait 44 navigating 32 navigating 31 screen protector installing 76 removing 76 replacing 76 screen, active about 15 using pen with 39 screen, touch about 15 using pen with 39 scrolling performing in landscape mode 32 performing in Portrait mode 31 serial number, location 20 Shift+Tab performing in landscape mode 32 performing in portrait mode 31 speaker volume, adjusting 50 speakers connecting 50 location 19 storing the computer 75 support, contacting 18 Suspend mode description 36 ending 38 starting 37 suspending operation 37 Suspend-to-RAM mode, description 36 T Tab performing in landscape mode 32 performing in portrait mode 31 troubleshooting 81 turning off the computer 34 turning on the computer 33 U USB port, location 23 USB-compatible device, connecting 48 V video output changing from monitor to computer 51 changing to monitor 51 110 iX104 Users Handbook volume adjusting headphone 50 adjusting microphone 49 adjusting speaker 50 Index W Windows Task Manager, launching 29 X XPL expansion module, connecting 52 XPL expansion port, location 22, 24 Xplore Tablet Dock docking connector location 25 using 46 Xplore Technologies, contacting 18 iX104 Users Handbook 111 112 iX104 Users Handbook 95-01016
1 2 | users manual | Users Manual | 1.31 MiB |
ix104 U S E R S H A N D B O O K iX104 USER'S HANDBOOK Xplore Technologies has made every effort to ensure the accuracy and completeness of this document; however, because ongoing development efforts are made to continually improve the capabilities of our products, we cannot guarantee the accuracy of the contents of this document. We disclaim liability for errors, omissions, or future changes herein. Xplore and the Xplore logo are registered trademarks of Xplore Technologies Corp.; iX104 is a trademark of Xplore Technologies Corp. Kensington and MicroSaver are registered trademarks of the Kensington Technology Group. Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Professional, and Windows XP Tablet PC Edition are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. PCMCIA and CardBus are registered trademarks of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association. Intel, Pentium, and SpeedStep are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. Wi-Fi is a trademark of the Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance
(WECA). FireWire is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. ISODAMP is a registered trademark of Aearo Company. All other brands, product names, company names, trademarks and service marks used herein are property of their respective companies. Copyright 2003 Xplore Technologies Corp. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be copied, reproduced, or translated, without the prior written consent of Xplore Technologies. No part of this publication may be stored or transmitted in any electronic form without the prior consent of Xplore Technologies. Any unauthorized use is a violation of copyright laws. PN: 95-01016 Edition: First, April 2003 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to FCC Part 15 Responsible Party Name: Xplore Technologies Corp. Address: 11675 Jollyville Rd. Suite 150, Austin, Texas 78759 Telephone: 512.336.7797 Declares that product: Model Series: iX104 Complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules 4 iX104 Users Handbook This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and, (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance may void the users authority to operate this equipment. For more information about FCC rules and their applicability to the iX104, see Appendix E, Agency Notices. Warranty Information The iX104 and iX104-TPC are backed by a standard 12-month International Limited Warranty. An extended International Limited Warranty is available. Check the service kit included with your computer for warranty terms and conditions. iX104 Users Handbook 5 Important safety information Before you use the iX104 or the iX104 dock, read these safety instructions and the operation instructions in this handbook. Failure to observe all these instructions voids the Limited Warranty and may lead to suspension or denial of services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Follow any special regulations governing the use of the computer and, if radio-enabled, always switch it off in areas where radio devices are forbidden or when the radio device can cause interference or danger. Always follow any safety laws and regulations pertaining to the use of cell phones and two-way radios, because these laws and regulations typically apply to the use of the wireless-enabled iX104. Observe all restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas), chemical plants, and wherever blasting operations are in progress or in any area in which restrictions on radio transmissions are imposed. Switch off the iX104 when in an aircraft. The iX104 is not FAA-approved for use on aircraft. The effect of the use of the iX104 in aircraft is unknown. Using the iX104 in an aircraft may affect aircraft instrumentation, communication, and performance; may disrupt the network; and may be illegal. Operating the wireless-enabled iX104 may interfere with the functioning of inadequately protected medical devices such as pacemakers. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device if you have any questions. Radio signals from your iX104 will not affect the operation of most modern equipment, but certain electronic equipment, including automotive systems, may not be shielded against radio signals from your iX104. Check with the manufacturer of your motor vehicle or the manufacturers representative to determine whether using the iX104 will present any safety issues. Avoid using the iX104 in any environment that requires your full attention, such as when driving a vehicle. If you need to use your iX104 while driving, have a passenger use it for you or find a safe location to halt your vehicle. 6 iX104 Users Handbook
WARNING Use only battery types specified in this handbook. Using any other type of battery can be dangerous and can disable the iX104. WARNING Do not use any dock or any other accessory or attachment that is not manufactured or supplied by Xplore or an authorized Xplore accessories supplier. Use of any accessory or attachment that is not supplied or approved for use with the iX104 by Xplore is not permitted because it may cause hazards. Operate the iX104 only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. (See page 53 for more information about the battery and power supply.) Route power supply cords so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them. Pay particular attention to cords at plugs and convenience receptacles, and at the point where cords exit from the computer or its dock. Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles because this can cause fire or electric shock. Unplug the iX104 and refer the iX104 and dock for service to qualified service personnel if any of the following conditions occur:
The power supply cord or plug is damaged. The iX104 or dock does not operate normally when you follow the instructions in this book. The iX104 or dock exhibits a distinct change in performance. Adjust only controls for which there are instructions in this book. An improper adjustment of other controls can result in damage and may require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the iX104 or dock to normal operation. CAUTION Avoid prolonged physical contact with the exposed metal surfaces on the front and back of the computer. While the computer may not feel hot to the touch, if you maintain physical contact with the computer for a long time (for example, if you rest the computer on your lap for a long time), your skin may suffer low-
heat injury. In addition, be careful when you remove a PC card that has been used for a long time, because the card may be hot. iX104 Users Handbook 7 8 iX104 Users Handbook Contents Welcome 13 Who this handbook is for . 14 About your computer . 15 Package contents . 16 Optional accessories. 16 Contacting Xplore . 18 1 Getting Started 19 Getting to know your iX104 . 19 Features and controls . 19 Front view . 19 Back view . 20 Top view . 22 Bottom view . 23 Right side view . 24 Left side view . 25 LED indicators . 26 Quick-start guide . 28 Application, Windows, and hot keys . 28 Navigation keys . 31 Navigation controls with the tablet in portrait mode . 31 Navigation controls with the tablet in landscape mode . 32 iX104 Users Handbook 9 Contents 2 Using the iX104 33 Turning on the computer . 33 Turning off the computer . 34 Using the Reset switch. 35 Suspending and resuming operation . 36 Suspending operation. 37 Resuming operation . 38 Using the pen. 39 Using the pen to perform mouse functions . 40 Changing the pen double-click speed . 41 Positioning the pen and pen tether . 42 Using the joystick (the navigation control key) . 43 Changing the screen orientation . 44 Adjusting the screen brightness. 45 Disabling automatic backlight control . 45 Docking the iX104 . 46 Connecting devices . 47 Connecting FireWire devices. 47 Connecting to a local area network . 48 Connecting USB-compatible devices . 48 Connecting an external microphone . 49 Adjusting microphone volume . 49 Connecting a headphone or speakers . 50 Adjusting headphone or speaker volume . 50 Connecting a monitor or projection panel . 51 Activating the monitor or projection panel. 51 Connecting an XPL snap-on expansion module . 52 10 iX104 Users Handbook Contents Using the battery . 53 Charging the battery pack . 53 If you do not have an external battery charger . 53 If you have an external battery charger . 54 Removing and installing the battery . 55 Removing the battery . 55 Installing the battery . 57 Discarding a battery . 57 Using power options . 58 Changing the computers power schemes . 58 Changing battery alarm settings . 59 Checking battery power status . 59 Selecting power settings . 60 Enabling Hibernation mode . 60 Tips for conserving battery power . 61 Programming hot keys . 62 Programming hot keys to start applications, open documents, or go to a Web site . 63 Programming hot keys to perform pre-defined functions . 67 Programming hot keys to perform other key functions . 69 3 Maintaining the iX104 73 Caring for the computer . 73 Checking power cords and connectors. 73 Protecting the computer from damage . 73 Preventing the computer from overheating . 74 Storing the computer . 75 Caring for the display screen . 76 Protecting the display screen . 76 iX104 Users Handbook 11 Contents Calibrating the pen . 79 Calibrating the pen for an iX104 touch screen . 79 Calibrating the pen for an iX104-TPC active screen . 81 When to replace the pen . 82 A B Troubleshooting Using BIOS and AOS Functions 83 87 Enabling manual LCD backlight control . 89 C Glossary D E Hardware Specifications Agency Notices Index 91 95 103 109 12 iX104 Users Handbook Welcome Welcome to the Xplore Technologies iX104, the rugged pen tablet designed, tested, and manufactured to meet the environmental and physical real-world challenges faced by todays mobile workers. The iX104 not only works the way you do, but can also take the abuses of everyday wear and tear. The iX104 design is based on years of experience in rugged mobile applications. Advanced technology, innovative design, and a rugged case are just a few highlights of your iX104 system. Equally important is Xplores commitment to ensuring that you are treated with the same respect and honesty you offer to your customers and peers every day. iX104 Users Handbook 13 Welcome Who this handbook is for This handbook provides instructions for using the Xplore Technologies iX104 Pen Tablet (iX104) and iX104 Pen Tablet PC
(iX104-TPC). This handbook assumes that you have basic experience using computers and Microsoft Windows. 14 iX104 Users Handbook Welcome About your computer The iX104 and the iX104-TPC are high-performance, pen-based computers that support Microsoft Windows XP Professional Tablet PC Edition, Windows XP Professional, and Windows 2000 Professional operating systems. The iX104 has a touch screen that you control by using your finger, the pen included with the iX104, or any suitable pointing device. The iX104-TPC has an active screen that you control by using the special, enhanced pen included with the iX104-TPC. Note In this handbook, all information applies to both the iX104 and iX104-TPC unless otherwise noted. The iX104 and iX104-TPC have been engineered and tested to meet Military Standards for Environmental Extremes (MIL STD 810F). Your computer includes the following features that make it exceptionally rugged and durable:
Durable, long-lasting, dense magnesium enclosure Interior and exterior multi-layer magnesium frames and cavities ISODAMP shock absorbing materials in patented bumpering system and gasket protection mechanisms Shock-isolated hard disk Integrated, protected wireless LAN and WAN antennas for dual mode operation Locked in place memory, cables, and connectors Proprietary thermal management system iX104 Users Handbook 15 Welcome Package contents Check to make sure your iX104 package includes the following items:
Battery pack Power cord AC adapter Screen protectors (2) Pen Pen tether iX104 pen tablet or iX104-TPC pen tablet PC Warranty information kit This handbook Optional accessories Your package also includes any optional accessories you ordered. Optional accessories Docking options iX104 office dock iX104 vehicle dock Carrying cases Ballistic nylon hands-free carry case Ballistic nylon portfolio case 16 iX104 Users Handbook Welcome Optional accessories (continued) Storage options External USB floppy disk drive External USB CD-ROM drive Memory 512 MB SODIMM, 133 MHz 40 GB 2.5-inch rugged hard disk Power options AC adapter with U.S. cord Main battery pack (4500 mAh) Extended life battery pack (9000 mAh) Auto adapter (cigarette lighter adapter) Additional accessories USB non-rugged mini keyboard (83-key) USB rugged, backlit mini keyboard (83-key) Screen protectors (12-pack) Passive stylus (for use with the iX104) Active stylus (for use with the iX104-TPC) Pen tether Hand straps iX104 Users Handbook 17 Welcome Contacting Xplore If you purchased your iX104 from an authorized Xplore dealer, contact the dealer for service and support. If you purchased your iX104 directly from Xplore, use any of the following methods to contact Xplore for service and support:
Toll free Fax E-mail Web site 1-866-296-8541, extension 222 1-512-336-7791 support@xploretech.com http://www.xploretech.com Before you contact Xplore, have the following information ready so that the customer support representative can quickly provide a solution:
The serial number is on the back of the computer. See page 20. Product name: iX104 Product serial number Purchase date Conditions under which the problem occurred Any error messages that were displayed Type of device connected, if any 18 iX104 Users Handbook 1 Getting Started This chapter gives you an overview of your iX104 and includes a quick-start guide to iX104 keys. Getting to know your iX104 For more information about each component, see Chapter 2. This section shows the locations of some of your computers important components. Features and controls Front view built-in microphone Reset switch speaker ambient light sensor speaker iX104 Users Handbook 19 Chapter 1. Getting Started Getting to know your iX104 Built-in microphone Enables you to input mono audio. Includes noise cancellation. Reset switch Enables you to turn off the computer when using the Power On/Off key is not effective. (See page 35.) Speakers Enable you to listen to stereo audio files. Sealed to provide protection from the environment. Ambient light sensor Automatically controls the amount of backlight sent to the screen. Provides optimum brightness for the lighting conditions in which you are working. Back view convection air flow cover antenna covers compliance and serial number label removable battery pack battery release latch pen pen holder Convection air flow cover Magnesium cover over the thermal transfer bay that manages heat movement out of the computer. 20 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 1. Getting Started Getting to know your iX104 Antenna covers For optional wireless LAN and WAN models, protect and secure the radio antennas (accessible by authorized service personnel only). Pen The main device you use to enter data and control applications
(instead of a mouse or a keyboard). Also called the stylus. See Using the pen on page 39. Pen holder Provides a place to secure the pen when you are not using it. Battery release latch Provides access to the battery. Removable battery pack Battery that runs the computer when battery power is required. Compliance and serial number label Includes regulatory compliance numbers and the computers unique serial number. iX104 Users Handbook 21 Chapter 1. Getting Started Getting to know your iX104 Top view Power On/Off/
Suspend/Resume key Kensington lock slot air flow vents XPL expansion port Power On/Off/Suspend/Resume key Press the key to turn the computer on or off, or to suspend or resume operation. Air flow vents Helps prevent the computer from overheating by forcing heat away from the computer. (Do not block the vents.) XPL expansion port A USB port (compliant with USB Standard Revision 1.1) that enables you to connect an XPL snap-on expansion module for devices such as cameras, radios, and fingerprint scanners. Kensington lock slot Connector for the optional Kensington MicroSaver-compatible security cable. Contact your reseller for information about the XPL expansion module and the Kensington security cable. 22 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 1. Getting Started Getting to know your iX104 Bottom view USB port microphone connector LAN connector power connector headphone connector FireWire
(IEEE 1394) connector external monitor connector The optional Office and Vehicle Docks include additional USB ports. See Optional accessories on page 16. The connectors on the bottom of the computer are located behind the outer doors. Power connector For the optional AC adapter or auto adapter. (See Optional accessories on page 16.) USB 2.0 port For Universal Serial Bus devices (compliant with USB Standard Revision 2.0). Headphone connector For stereo headphones or speakers. Microphone connector For an external microphone. Firewire connector For FireWire (IEEE 1394) devices such as digital video cameras. LAN connector For connecting a standard RJ-45 connector to the computers internal local area network (LAN) card. External monitor connector For an external monitor or projection panel. iX104 Users Handbook 23 Chapter 1. Getting Started Getting to know your iX104 Right side view XPL expansion port bumpers Contact your reseller for information about the XPL expansion module and the Kensington security cable. Bumpers Fabricated from rugged material. Raised to help protect the computer from damage. XPL expansion port A USB port (compliant with USB Standard Revision 1.1) that enables you to connect an XPL snap-on expansion module for devices such as cameras, radios, and fingerprint scanners. 24 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 1. Getting Started Getting to know your iX104 Left side view docking connector for the optional Xplore Tablet Dock guide pin receptacles See Optional accessories on page 16. Docking connector Enables you to connect the optional Xplore Tablet Dock. Guide pin receptacles Help assure secure connection of the optional Xplore Tablet Dock. iX104 Users Handbook 25 Chapter 1. Getting Started Getting to know your iX104 LED indicators The LED indicator lights show the status of system functions such as power and battery levels. Status LED Brightness LED The following table defines the various LED states. Table 1 Status LED indicator Mode/State LED State Meaning On state green, continuous The computer is on, ready for use, and functioning normally. The battery is fully charged. Charging green, blinking The AC adapter is plugged in and the battery is charging. Off state off (no light) The computer is off. Suspend mode yellow, continuous The computer is on and is in Suspend or Hibernation mode. Thermal control yellow, blinking The computer is on and is in Warm-up mode, with the LCD and backlight off. After the system has warmed to a safe level, the LCD and backlight turn on. 26 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 1. Getting Started Getting to know your iX104 Table 1 Status LED indicator (continued) Mode/State LED State Meaning On state red, blinking On state red, continuous The computer is powered on, running under battery power, and the charge level in the battery is at a minimum warning level. Plug the computer into an AC/DC power source or install a charged battery. The computer is on, running under battery power, and the charge level in the battery has reached a critical level. Plug the computer into an AC/DC power source or install a charged battery. The computer has encountered a fault and is preventing normal operation. (Contact your help desk.) Table 2 Brightness LED indicator Mode/State LED State Meaning Auto state yellow, continuous Automatic backlight control is active. Manual off Manual backlight control is enabled. The backlight is under your manual control. iX104 Users Handbook 27 Chapter 1. Getting Started Quick-start guide Quick-start guide This section is a quick guide to using the main features of your computer. (See Chapter 2 for detailed information.) Application, Windows, and hot keys Ctrl-Alt-Delete
(Secure Attention Sequence) key Screen Rotation key Function key Windows Toggle
(Alt-Tab) key Hot key 1 Hot key 2 Hot key 3 Windows Start Menu
(Ctrl-Esc) and Windows toggle key Enter key 28 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 1. Getting Started Quick-start guide Table 3 Main keys Press this key... To perform this function Log on after resuming operation from power management, powering on, or locking. After logging on, launch Windows Task Manager. Rotate screen orientation between portrait
(vertical) and landscape (horizontal). Use in combination with another key to perform various functions. (See page 30.) Toggle between programs and/or windows
(the same as pressing Alt-Tab on a keyboard). Perform the same functions as the Enter key on a keyboard. Open the Windows Start menu. Open Help, or perform a different function that you program this key to perform. Open Internet Explorer, or perform a different function that you program this key to perform. Open your email application, or perform a different function that you program this key to perform. iX104 Users Handbook 29 Chapter 1. Getting Started Quick-start guide Table 4 Function mode keys Press these keys... To perform this function Dim the brightness of the LCD backlight. Increase the brightness of the LCD backlight. Send video display to a monitor or projection panel connected to the computer (and back to the computer again). (This key combination is not programmable.) Default function: Select the input device. You can program this key combination to perform a different function. Default function: Open the pen calibration program. You can program this key combination to perform a different function. Perform the same functions as the Esc key on a keyboard. 30 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 1. Getting Started Quick-start guide Navigation keys The following illustrations and tables provide a quick reference for using the navigation keys. Navigation controls with the tablet in portrait mode scroll up joystick scroll left scroll right scroll down Press the Function key... and move the joystick in this direction... to perform this function Page Up Page Down Shift+Tab Tab iX104 Users Handbook 31 Chapter 1. Getting Started Quick-start guide Navigation controls with the tablet in landscape mode scroll up joystick scroll left scroll right scroll down Press the Function key... and move the joystick in this direction... to perform this function Page Up Page Down Shift+Tab Tab 32 iX104 Users Handbook 2 Using the iX104 This chapter contains detailed instructions for using your computer. Turning on the computer 1. Make sure the computer is off. When the computer is off, the Status LED is off. 2. Make sure the battery is charged or that the computer is plugged in to an external power source. 3. Press the Power On/Off/Suspend/Resume button. Power On/Off/
Suspend/Resume button iX104 Users Handbook 33 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Turning off the computer Turning off the computer When the computer is in Suspend mode, the Status LED is continuously yellow. 1. If the computer is in Suspend mode, press the Power On/Off/
Suspend/Resume button to resume operation. (See page 37 for information about Suspend mode.) Power On/Off/
Suspend/Resume button 2. Make sure the battery is charged or that the computer is plugged in to an external power source. 3. Save your work and close all programs. 4. From the Windows Start menu, click Turn Off Computer. 5. The Turn off computer dialog box opens. 6. Click Turn Off. 34 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Turning off the computer Using the Reset switch If the computer does not seem to be accepting input and you cannot turn it off by using the method described in Turning off the computer, press the Reset switch. (Use a ball point pen or similar instrument to press the switch). Reset switch Note Use the Reset switch only if you cannot turn off the computer by any other means, because you may lose unsaved data. iX104 Users Handbook 35 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Suspending and resuming operation Suspending and resuming operation To conserve battery power when you do not want to turn off the computer or when you need to install a charged battery pack, put the computer into Suspend mode. (You can suspend operation without closing any programs or Windows.) When you suspend operation:
Programs that are running stop (but do not close). Active data is saved. The system enters one of the following low-power modes:
Suspend-to-RAM mode The Status LED light is continuously yellow. Active data is saved in RAM and most other components are turned off. Although the computer uses very little power when in Suspend-to-RAM mode, eventually the batterys power does run out. If you will not be using the computer for an extended period of time, turn the computer off instead of using Suspend-to-RAM mode.
Hibernation mode Active data is saved on the hard disk and power usage is reduced to the same level as when the computer is turned off. In Hibernation mode, there is no danger of losing data if battery power is lost. Note For more information, see Using power options on page 58. 36 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Suspending and resuming operation Notes If you have set your computer to turn power off (in the Power Options utility in Windows Control Panel), you cannot suspend operation. To change power settings, see Using power options on page 58. If the Suspend action of the Power On/Off/Suspend/Resume button has been disabled to prevent accidental interruption, pressing the button does not suspend the computer. You must use a software application to suspend the computer. For more information, contact your help desk or your iX104 dealer. If your computer is connected to a network, the network may automatically log you off after a period of inactivity while system operation is suspended. Contact your help desk or system administrator to learn your log-off time limit. Suspending operation Use one of the following methods to suspend operation:
Method 1 Press the Power On/Off/Suspend/Resume button. Power On/Off/
Suspend/Resume button Method 2 1. From the Windows Start menu, press Turn Off Computer. 2. The Turn off computer dialog box opens. iX104 Users Handbook 37 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Suspending and resuming operation 3. Press Stand By. When operation is suspended, the Status LED displays a continuous yellow light. Status LED Resuming operation To resume operation when the computer is in Suspend mode, press the Power On/Off/Suspend/Resume button. Note Press the button only once. Power On/Off/
Suspend/Resume button 38 iX104 Users Handbook Using the pen Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the pen After a minute or two, the computer resumes normal operation. When the Status LED displays a continuous green light, you can begin using the computer. Note Resuming operation from Hibernation mode takes a little longer than from Suspend-to-RAM mode. You can use the pen to select items and to navigate through programs. If your computer is an iX104-TPC (active screen):
Use the special multi-function pen provided with the computer. If your computer is an iX104 (touch screen):
Use the pen provided with the computer, another similar pointing device, or your finger.
WARNING Do not use items such as a ball point pen or a screwdriver that can damage the computer. Damage caused by using an item not provided with the computer is not covered by the iX104 warranty. Note Before you use the pen the first time, or if the action you are trying to perform does not occur when you use the pen, calibrate the pen as described in Calibrating the pen on page 79. iX104 Users Handbook 39 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the pen Using the pen to perform mouse functions To perform this function... Do this Select an object
(left button click). Perform a double-click. Perform a right-click. right-click icon right-click button Move or drag an object. Tap the pen tip once on the object. Quickly tap the pen tip twice on the object. If your computer is an iX104
(touch screen):
In the Windows taskbar, press the right-click icon; then click the object. If your computer is an iX104-TPC
(active screen):
Hold the pen directly on the object until the right-click icon appears. or Press the right-click button on the pen while you click the object. Place the pen tip on the object; then continue to hold the pen tip against the screen as you move the pen. 40 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the pen Changing the pen double-click speed The pen double-click speed is in sync with the mouse double-click speed. To change the speed:
1. Click the Windows Start button. 2. Click the Settings option. 3. Click the Control Panel option. 4. In the Control Panel window:
If your computer is an iX104 (touch screen):
Click the Pointer Devices icon. If your computer is an iX104-TPC (active screen):
Click the Tablet and Pen Settings icon. 5. Click the Windows tab. 6. Follow the instructions that appear in the Windows tab. iX104 Users Handbook 41 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the pen Positioning the pen and pen tether The pen tether helps prevent the loss of your pen. The following illustration shows how to position the pen and pen tether. pen pen tether 42 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the joystick (the navigation control key) Using the joystick (the navigation control key) joystick
(navigation control key) Press the joystick to perform the same functions as pressing Enter on a keyboard. Push the joystick up, down, left or right to move a highlighted item accordingly (the same as pressing the arrow keys on a keyboard). Use the Fn key in combination with the joystick to perform other functions, such as Page Up and Tab. Note See page 31 and page 32 for diagrams of how to use the joystick and other navigation control buttons. iX104 Users Handbook 43 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Changing the screen orientation Changing the screen orientation To rotate the screen orientation from portrait (vertical) to landscape
(horizontal) mode or from landscape to portrait mode, press the screen rotation key. 44 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Adjusting the screen brightness Adjusting the screen brightness To dim the brightness of the LCD backlight:
Press the Function key and the Windows toggle key. To increase the brightness of the LCD backlight:
Press the Function key and the Windows Start key. Disabling automatic backlight control When the ambient light sensor is enabled, the computer automatically controls the amount of backlight sent to the screen to provide optimum brightness for the lighting conditions in which you are working. When the ambient light sensor is enabled, the Brightness LED glows continuously yellow. When the ambient light sensor is disabled and the backlight is under manual control, the Brightness LED is off. Brightness LED To disable automatic backlight control, see Enabling manual LCD backlight control on page 89. iX104 Users Handbook 45 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Docking the iX104 Docking the iX104 If you have the optional Xplore Tablet Dock (see Optional accessories on page 16), connect it to the iX104 at the docking port. docking port guide pin receptacles 46 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Connecting devices Connecting devices Refer to the following subsections for information about connecting external devices to your computer. Note If the device you want to use does not appear to be working with your computer, the device may need to be enabled in the computers configuration program. Contact your local help desk or Xplore reseller. Connecting FireWire devices Connect a FireWire device (such as a digital camera, a digital video camera, or a CD-ROM or DVD drive) to the Firewire (IEEE 1394) connector on the computer. FireWire
(IEEE 1394) connector iX104 Users Handbook 47 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Connecting devices Connecting to a local area network Connect a local area network (LAN) cables RJ-45 connector to the internal LAN interface card. (See your network system administrator for more information.) LAN connector Connecting USB-compatible devices Connect any USB-compatible device to the computers USB port. Devices must be in compliance with USB Standard Revision 2.0. USB port 48 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Connecting devices Connecting an external microphone microphone connector Adjusting microphone volume If necessary, adjust the volume of the microphone as follows:
1. Press the Windows Start key. 2. Click the Control Panel option. 3. In the Control Panel window, double-click the Sounds and Audio Properties icon. In the Sounds and Audio Properties window, click the Audio tab. In the Sound recording area, click the Volume button. 4. 5. 6. Adjust the volume. 7. Click OK. iX104 Users Handbook 49 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Connecting devices Connecting a headphone or speakers headphone/speakers connector Adjusting headphone or speaker volume 1. Click the audio icon in the Status area of the Windows taskbar. The volume control area opens. If the Mute check box is checked, uncheck it. 2. 3. Move the slider bar up or down to increase or decrease the volume. 50 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Connecting devices Connecting a monitor or projection panel Monitor/projection panel connector Activating the monitor or projection panel To change the video output to the monitor or projection panel:
Press the Fn-P1 key combination. To change the video output back to the computer screen:
Press the Fn-P1 key combination again. iX104 Users Handbook 51 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Connecting devices Connecting an XPL snap-on expansion module Top view Side view XPL expansion port 52 iX104 Users Handbook Using the battery Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the battery You can recharge, remove, and replace the battery pack. Charging the battery pack If you do not have an external battery charger Follow these steps to charge the battery while it is installed in the computer:
1. Connect a power source, such as an AC adapter or cigarette lighter adapter, to the power connector on the computer. power connector If the battery charge is below 90%, the battery begins charging and the Status LED flashes green. (If the battery charge is higher than 90%, the battery will not charge, preventing battery overcharge.) iX104 Users Handbook 53 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the battery 2. Check the level of charge. (See Checking battery power status on page 59.) The charging process continues until the battery charge reaches 100%. Table 5 shows the approximate time required to charge the battery level to 100%. Table 5 Approximate battery charge time Battery pack capacity Charge time when the computer is not in use Charge time when the computer is in use*
4500 mAh 2.5 hours 9000 mAh 3.5 hours 3.5 hours 5.5 hours
* Varies according to the application(s) in use. If you have an external battery charger 1. Remove the battery pack (see page 55). 2. Use the external battery charger to charge the battery. 3. Install the battery (see page 57). 54 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the battery Removing and installing the battery You can remove the battery and use an (optional) external charger to charge it. Removing the battery 1. To swap with a charged battery:
Use one of the methods described in Suspending operation on page 37 to suspend operation. If a charged battery is not available:
Save your work and close all running programs; then shut down the computer or put the computer in Hibernation mode
(see Suspending operation on page 37). Note: To avoid losing unsaved data, wait until the computer has completed switching to Suspended mode before removing the battery. iX104 Users Handbook 55 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the battery 2. On the computer, slide the battery release latch in the direction indicated. removable battery battery release latch 3. Pull the battery away from the computer and remove it. Note After removing the battery, you must replace the battery or connect the computer to an external power supply within 3 to 5 minutes or the computer completely loses power. 56 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the battery Installing the battery 1. Orient the battery with the slides in the empty battery tray. 2. Slide the battery into the tray and press it firmly until it is seated. The battery release latch returns to its original position and locks the battery in place. Discarding a battery Dispose of a spent battery in accordance with your local government regulations. Under Federal, state, or local law, it may be illegal to put batteries in the trash. Contact your system administrator or your municipal solid waste disposal department or provider for information. iX104 Users Handbook 57 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the battery Using power options This section explains how to use the Power Options Properties window to manage the computers power use. On the Windows taskbar, click the battery icon. The Power Options Properties window opens. Changing the computers power schemes In the Power Options Properties window, select the Power Schemes tab; then select options from the drop-down lists. 58 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the battery Changing battery alarm settings In the Power Options Properties window (page 58), select the Alarms tab; then use the slider bars to change the alarm settings. Checking battery power status In the Power Options Properties window (page 58), select the Power Meter tab. The window shows the amount of power left in the battery. iX104 Users Handbook 59 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the battery Selecting power settings In the Power Options Properties window (page 58), select the Advanced tab; then select the power settings options you want to use. Enabling Hibernation mode In the Power Options Properties window (page 58), select the Hibernate tab; then check the Enable Hibernation check box. 60 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Using the battery Tips for conserving battery power The following tips help you extend the life of your battery by conserving battery power:
Use an external power source such as the AC or auto adapter whenever available. Suspend operation if you know that you will not be using the system for a while. (See Suspending operation on page 37.) Turn off the computer if you will not be using it for an extended period of time. Adjust power options to automatically conserve power. (See Using power options on page 58.) iX104 Users Handbook 61 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Programming hot keys Programming hot keys Xplore pre-programs the P1, P2, and P3 hot keys and Function mode hot key combinations to perform certain functions by default. However, you can program them to perform different functions, as described in this section. Table 6 Programmable hot keys Key Default function Starts Help. Starts Internet Explorer. Starts your email application. Table 7 Programmable Function mode hot key combinations Key combination Default function Sends video display to a monitor or projection panel. (Not programmable.) Selects the input device. Starts the pen calibration program. 62 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Programming hot keys Programming hot keys to start applications, open documents, or go to a Web site 1. In the Status area of the Windows taskbar, click the iX104 Configuration icon. The Launch Button QuickShow dialog box opens. 2. Click the Configure button. The Panel Control Center window opens. iX104 Users Handbook 63 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Programming hot keys 3. Click the Change button next to the key or key combination you want to program. The following options appear:
4. Click Launch an Application, Document or Web site. The following options appear:
64 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Programming hot keys 5. To start an application:
a Click Launch an Application. b In the File text box, type the name of the application you want the hot key or Function mode hot key combination to start. Note: Type the name of executable file that starts the application. For example: word.exe, notepad.exe, excel.exe. c Click Change. To open a document:
a Click Open a Document. b In the File text box, type the name of the document you want the hot key or Function mode hot key combination to open.
(For example: spreadsheet.xls, airports.doc, wiringdiagram.jpg) c Click Change. iX104 Users Handbook 65 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Programming hot keys To open a multimedia file:
a Click Open a Multimedia file. b In the File text box, type the name of the multimedia file you want the hot key or Function mode hot key combination to open. (For example: 911training.dir, demo.ppt) c Click Change. To open a Web page:
a Click Open a Web page. b In the File text box, type the URL of the Web page you want the hot key or Function mode hot key combination to open.
(For example: http://www.xploretech.com) c Click Change. 6. Program more hot keys, or click Finish to close the Panel Control Center window. 66 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Programming hot keys Programming hot keys to perform pre-defined functions 1. In the Status area of the Windows taskbar, click the iX104 Configuration icon. The Launch Button QuickShow dialog box opens. 2. Click the Configure button. The Panel Control Center window opens. 3. Next to the key or key combination you want to program, click the Change button. iX104 Users Handbook 67 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Programming hot keys The following options appear:
4. Click Start a pre-defined function. 5. In the Function selection drop-down list, select an option. 6. Program more hot keys, or click Finish to close the Panel Control Center window. 68 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Programming hot keys Programming hot keys to perform other key functions 1. In the Status area of the Windows taskbar, click the iX104 Configuration icon. The Launch Button QuickShow dialog box opens. 2. Click the Configure button. The Panel Control Center window opens. 3. Next to the key or key combination you want to program, click the Change button. iX104 Users Handbook 69 Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Programming hot keys The following options appear:
4. Click Press a key or key combination. The following options appear:
70 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 2. Using the iX104 Programming hot keys 5. If you want the hot key or hot key combination to perform the function of a single key:
a If the Ctrl, Alt, or Shift boxes are checked, uncheck them. b Click the key you want the hot key or hot key combination to perform. (For example: F6, G, or Caps Lock) If you want the hot key or hot key combination to perform the function of a key combination:
a Check the Ctrl, Alt, or Shift box. b From the drop-down list, select the additional key, or click the key on the keyboard. Examples To cause the hot key to perform the print screen function
(Alt-Print Scrn): Check the Alt check box; then select PrtScr from the drop-down list. To cause the hot key to perform the paste function (Ctrl-V):
Check the Ctrl check box; then click the V key. 6. Program more hot keys, or click Finish to close the Panel Control Center window. iX104 Users Handbook 71 72 iX104 Users Handbook 3 Maintaining the iX104 This chapter provides instructions for maintaining your computer. Caring for the computer This section provides information about how to keep your computer in top working condition. Checking power cords and connectors Check AC and DC power cords and power connectors periodically for damage. Replace the power cord immediately if you find any damage. Protecting the computer from damage Your computer is designed to sustain a multiple-axis drop to a non-yielding surface. Do not intentionally drop the computer, because the cumulative effects of multiple drops may damage the computer. Do not place heavy objects on the computer. Do not disassemble the computer. Keep the computer at least 5 inches (13 centimeters) away from any electrical appliance that generates a strong magnetic field, such as a motor, magnet, TV, refrigerator, or large audio speakers. iX104 Users Handbook 73 Chapter 3. Maintaining the iX104 Caring for the computer Preventing the computer from overheating The computer monitors its internal temperature. As the internal temperature approaches the tolerable limits of heat-sensitive components, system functions are automatically limited or turned off to prevent damage. To prevent the computer from overheating, do not obstruct the computers air vents. air vents air vents 74 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 3. Maintaining the iX104 Caring for the computer Storing the computer You can store the computer in the Off state for about 30 days with a fully charged battery installed. After this period, recharge the battery or replace it with a charged battery. If you intend to store the computer for more than 30 days, remove the battery pack and keep it in a cool place. iX104 Users Handbook 75 Chapter 3. Maintaining the iX104 Caring for the computer Caring for the display screen To clean the display screen, dampen a soft cotton cloth with water or isopropyl alcohol and gently wipe the screen surface. Protecting the display screen The screen protector is a durable, replaceable writing surface that protects the display screen from abrasion. To obtain additional screen protectors, check with your reseller, or go to the Xplore Web site at www.xploretech.com for ordering information. Additional information about installation is included with the screen protectors. Removing the screen protector Slide your fingernail under the screen protector at the notch and pull the protector away from the screen. notch 76 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 3. Maintaining the iX104 Caring for the computer Installing a new screen protector 1. If a screen protector is already installed on the display screen, remove it before installing the new screen protector. 2. Using a soft cotton cloth dampened with isopropyl alcohol, gently clean the screen. Make sure that you have removed all residue from the screen before you apply the new screen protector. 3. Remove the protective coating from the back (the shiny side) of the screen protector. 4. Orient the screen protector with the shiny side of the protector facing the display screen and the notched corner oriented as shown in the following illustration. notch iX104 Users Handbook 77 Chapter 3. Maintaining the iX104 Caring for the computer 5. Place the screen protector on the screen surface. Use your fingers to apply pressure to the protector, using a continuous wiping motion along the edges. To ensure a good seal between the screen protector and the display, do not lift the screen protector from the display after you have applied it. 6. Remove the protective plastic cover from the face of the screen protector. 7. Wipe the screen protector gently with a soft cotton cloth dampened with isopropyl alcohol to clean any residue left behind by the protective coating. 78 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 3. Maintaining the iX104 Calibrating the pen Calibrating the pen Calibrating the pen adjusts the cursor position on the screen relative to the position of the pen tip. Calibrate the pen to adjust the distance error between where the pen is actually touching the screen and where the computer is registering the pen touch. You may need to calibrate the pen in the following situations:
You are using the pen for the first time. The previous user of the computer writes with the opposite hand or at a different pen angle. The computer has not been used for some time. The computer has been serviced. Calibrating the pen for an iX104 touch screen 1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel. The Control Panel opens. Pointer Devices icon iX104 Users Handbook 79 Chapter 3. Maintaining the iX104 Calibrating the pen 2. Click the Pointer Devices icon. The Pointer Device Properties window opens. 3. Click Calibrate. The Calibration program starts. 4. Follow the instructions that appear on the screen. 5. When you finish, click OK. 80 iX104 Users Handbook Chapter 3. Maintaining the iX104 Calibrating the pen Calibrating the pen for an iX104-TPC active screen 1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel. The Control Panel opens. Tablet and Pen Settings icon 2. Click the Tablet and Pen Settings icon. iX104 Users Handbook 81 Chapter 3. Maintaining the iX104 When to replace the pen The Tablet and Pen Settings window opens. 3. In the Calibration area drop-down list, select the mode for which you want to calibrate the pen: Landscape or Portrait; then click Calibrate. The Calibration program starts. 4. Follow the instructions that appear on the screen. 5. When you finish, click OK. When to replace the pen With use, the pen tip may become worn and can scratch the screen. If your pen exhibits one of the following problems, replace the pen:
The pen does not move freely across the screen. The pen does not perform as expected. 82 iX104 Users Handbook A Troubleshooting Table 8 contains solutions to some problems. If you cannot solve the problem by taking the actions described, contact your local help desk or your reseller for further assistance. Table 8 Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause and solution Computer will not start. The computer will not resume operation after being suspended. The battery may be defective or discharged to a critically low level. Connect an external power supply (such as the AC adapter) or install a charged battery. See Using the battery on page 53. Internal components may be above or below the acceptable operating range (below -20 C or above 60 C). After the temperature returns to safe operating range the computer will start. The battery may be defective or discharged to a critically low level. When the battery reaches a critically low level, the computer is forced into Suspend- to-RAM mode to avoid a total system power failure. Connect an external power supply
(such as the AC adapter) or install a charged battery. See Using the pen on page 39 and Using the battery on page 53. The computer may be at the critical thermal limit. To avoid damage to heat-sensitive components, the computer enters Suspend-to-RAM mode when the computer operates above 60 C. Operation automatically resumes when the computer cools to below 60 C. Move the computer to a cooler location. iX104 Users Handbook 83 Appendix A. Troubleshooting Table 8 Troubleshooting (continued) Problem Possible cause and solution Display screen is blank or difficult to read. Confirm that the computer is on (the Power icon is displayed continuously in the Status area). The brightness may be set too low, causing the screen to appear too dark. To change system brightness, press the Fn and Start keys to open the Xplore menu and adjust the brightness. (See page 30.) An external monitor may be selected. Press the Fn and P1 keys to select the computer display screen. (See page 30.) The video time-out may have expired. Tap the display screen to reactivate the display. Note: This is a normal, power-saving feature. If the Status light is blinking red, the computer is in Suspend-
to-RAM mode because the temperature is below -20 C or above 60 C. When the temperature returns to a safe operating range, the display screen automatically comes back on. If possible, move the computer to a warmer or cooler location. If the Status light is continually yellow, the computer is in Suspend or Hibernate mode. Press the Power On/Off key to resume. Cursor is not tracking the pen. Calibrate the pen. See Calibrating the pen on page 79. Computer is not responding to the pen. Connect an external USB keyboard to the computer. If the computer does not respond to the external keyboard, the application or operating system may have been corrupted. Press the Reset key. (See page 35.) If the system responds to a keyboard but not to the pen, contact your local help desk or reseller for further assistance. 84 iX104 Users Handbook Appendix A. Troubleshooting Table 8 Troubleshooting (continued) Problem Possible cause and solution Headphone or speaker volume is too low. The volume may be in Mute mode or set too low. Follow the instructions in Adjusting headphone or speaker volume on page 50. Make sure the volume control in your audio software is set to an audible level. An external device is not working with the computer. The device may need to be enabled in the computers configuration program (BIOS Setup). Contact your local help desk or reseller. The Status LED is red, continuous. The Status LED is red, blinking. The computer is on, running under battery power, and the charge level in the battery has reached a critical level. Plug the computer into an AC/DC power source or install a charged battery. The system has encountered a fault and is preventing normal operation. Contact your local help desk. The computer is powered on, running under battery power, and the charge level in the battery is at a minimum warning level. Plug the computer into an AC/DC power source or install a charged battery. iX104 Users Handbook 85 86 iX104 Users Handbook B Using BIOS and AOS Functions This appendix explains how to use the application and navigation buttons with the Basic Input-Output System (BIOS) program and the Advanced Operating System (AOS) Options menu. Note These functions are typically for use only by your system administrator or by authorized service technicians. Table 9 Using BIOS and AOS functions Use this button... To perform this function To start the BIOS program: When the computer is booting, press the P2 button and follow the instructions that appear on the screen. Navigate. (You can also use the joystick to navigate, as described below.) Push the joystick control up, down, left or right to move a highlighted item accordingly
(the same as pressing the arrow keys on a keyboard). Press the Enter button to perform the same functions as pressing Enter on a keyboard. iX104 Users Handbook 87 Appendix B. Using BIOS and AOS Functions Table 9 Using BIOS and AOS functions (continued) Use this button... To perform this function When the system is displaying a BIOS error
(such as an invalid checksum), press the P1 button to bypass the error message and attempt a normal boot sequence (the same as the F1 key on a keyboard). When the system is displaying the iX104 logo, press the P2 button to run the BIOS setup utility (the same as the F2 key on a keyboard). When the system is displaying the operating system boot screen, press the P3 button to open the Advanced Operation System Options menu (the same as the F8 key on a keyboard). 88 iX104 Users Handbook Appendix B. Using BIOS and AOS Functions Enabling manual LCD backlight control Enabling manual LCD backlight control When the LCD backlight control is in manual mode, the ambient light sensor is disabled and the computer no longer automatically controls the screen brightness. Follow these steps to disable the sensor and enable manual LCD backlight control:
1. When the computer is booting, press the Function and P2 buttons to start the BIOS Setup Utility. The utility starts, displaying the Information Viewer tab. iX104 Users Handbook 89 Appendix B. Using BIOS and AOS Functions Enabling manual LCD backlight control 2. Select the LCD tab. In the LCD Backlight Control drop-down list, select Manual. 3. 4. Click OK. 90 iX104 Users Handbook C Glossary Adapter. A device that provides an interface between two dissimilar electronic devices. For example, the AC adapter modifies the power from a wall outlet for use by the computer. Advanced Power Management (APM). A facility consisting of one or more layers of software that support power management. The APM software interface enables applications, operating systems, device drivers, and the APM BIOS to work together to reduce power consumption. Alternating Current (AC). Electric current that reverses its direction of flow at regular intervals. Analog signal. A signal with characteristics such as amplitude and frequency that vary in proportion to (are an analog of) the value to be transmitted. Voice communications are analog signals. Application. A program that performs specific tasks on your computer, such as word processing or creating spreadsheets. BIOS. Programs that contain such basic hardware operations as an interaction with diskette drives, hard disk drives, and the memory. Board. A circuit board. An internal card containing electronic components called chips, which perform a specific function or increase the capabilities of the system. Boot. To load a program or operating system into system memory. Bits Per Second (BPS). In serial transmission, the instantaneous bit speed with which a device or channel transmits a character. Card. Synonym for board; see board. iX104 Users Handbook 91 Appendix C. Glossary Compact Disk-Read Only Memory (CD-ROM). Stores data on metal-plated plastic discs. Compatibility. 1.The ability of one computer to accept and process data in the same method as another computer without modifying the data or the media upon which it is being transferred. 2.The ability of one device to connect or communicate with another system or component. Configuration. The specific combination of hardware components of the computer, and their operating status. The configuration of your computer includes pre-defined memory, type and speed of microprocessor, type of and size of hard disk drive, etc. Default. The preset parameter value automatically selected by the computer when you or a program do not provide instructions. Device driver. A program that controls communication between a specific peripheral device and the computer. Disk drive. The physical device that enables the computer to read from, and write to, a disk. Display. An image-producing device used to view computer output. Double-click. To press and release the pen/stylus twice within a time frame you define, without moving the pointer off the choice. Driver. Software that allows an application program to communicate with a particular piece of equipment, such as a printer or the pen/
stylus. Hard disk drive (HDD). A sealed mass storage device used for storage and fast retrieval of programs and data. The factory installs this disk and only a trained engineer can remove it for servicing. Hardware. The physical electronic and mechanical components of a computer system. typically, the computer itself, CPU, memory, etc. Hertz. A unit of wave frequency that equals one cycle per second. 92 iX104 Users Handbook Appendix C. Glossary Interface. 1. Hardware and/or software components used specifically to connect one computer or device to another. 2. To physically connect one system or device to another to exchange information. 3. The point of contact between user, the computer, and the program (for example, the pen/stylus or a menu). Kilobyte (KB). A unit of 1024 bytes measuring storage space, typically in memory or on storage media such as a diskette or hard disk drive. Local area network (LAN). Assembly of separate computers into an integrated network that connects the various computers together and to common devices such as printers and fax machines. Light Emitting Diode (LED). A semiconductor device that emits light when a current is applied. Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). liquid crystal sealed between two sheets of glass coated with transparent conducting material. Applying a voltage between the glass sheets darkens the liquid crystal to provide contrast to lighted portions of the display. Megabyte (MB). A unit of data storage equal to 1024 kilobytes. Megahertz (MHz). a unit of wave frequency that equals 1 million cycles per second. Modem. A device that connects your computer to a telephone line, allowing it to communicate with another computer at another location. PC Card. A plug-in accessory card that conforms to the PCMCIA standard. Pen. See stylus. Peripheral device. An input/output device that is external to the central processor and/or main memory such as a printer or scanner. Pixel. Picture elements (tiny dots) that compose a screen image. iX104 Users Handbook 93 Appendix C. Glossary Port. The electrical connection through which the computer sends and receives data to and from devices or other computers. Program. A set of instructions a computer can execute to tell the system what to do and how to do it. Random Access Memory (RAM). A hardware component of your computer that temporarily stores active program code and data. Reset. The act of reloading the operating system. Resolution. The number of pixels displayed on the screen. A higher resolution provides greater clarity and allows more information to be displayed on the screen at once. Restart. Resetting a computer without turning it off (also called warm boot or soft reset). Resume. The act of returning the computer to an active, operational state. Read Only Memory (ROM). The portion of your computers memory that contains permanent instructions, and which cannot be modified. Status Indicator (LED). a light above the LCD screen which indicates the current status of a particular device or hardware component. Stylus. A writing instrument. For pen computers, the stylus is used to interface with the LCD and digitizer. Suspend mode. A power conservation mode in which electrical current is removed from most components of the computer. Universal Serial Bus. A serial interface that enables communication between devices and the computer. 94 iX104 Users Handbook D Hardware Specifications This appendix provides specifications for the iX104. Physical specifications Dimensions 11.20 x 8.25 x 1.6 (WxHxD) 283.9mm x 209.3mm x 40.8mm Weight 4.45 lbs. (2.02kg)*
Processing specifications CPU Chip set Processor speed Pentium III with SpeedStep technology*
133MHz 866 MHz*
* Varies according to your computers configuration. iX104 Users Handbook 95 Appendix D. Hardware Specifications Memory/storage specifications Main RAM 256MB SDRAM (on-board/PC133) 144-pin SODIMM modules 512MB module available. Special rugged memory modules: conformal coated and custom locking tabs to protect against moisture and vibration L1 Cache (CPU) 32KB on-die L2 Cache BIOS ROM Hard Disk Drive 512KB on-die 8Mbit (FWH) 2.5 HDD shock mounted Minimum 20GB IDE HDD*
Ultra DMA 100 BIOS ROM 8Mbit (FWH)
* Varies according to your computers configuration. 96 iX104 Users Handbook Appendix D. Hardware Specifications Display specifications Display VRAM Color LCD Active Digital Sensor and Pen or Passive Palm Rejection Touch Panel 32-bit True color 10.4 TFT XGA (1024x768), 16M colors Brightness: 16 levels Viewing Angle:
Horizontal: 30 degrees (min.) Vertical: 10 degrees (min.) Contrast Ratio: Typ. 250:1, Min 100:1 Intel 830M chipset with 48 MB shared memory using Unified Memory Architecture (UMA) delivers low-power, high-performance 3D/2D graphics, video, and display capabilities. Dynamic Video Memory Technology (DVMT) dynamically responds to application requirements and efficiently allocates the proper amount of memory (48 MB maximum) for optimal graphics and system performance. iX104 Users Handbook 97 Appendix D. Hardware Specifications Interface specifications Wireless Radio Bays One internal Type 1 or Type II PC Card slot Integrated Interfaces
(PCMCIA Cardbus version 3.0) One Internal mini-PCI slot One internal OEM radio bay for RIM 1902G and 1802G GSM/GPRS radios DC-in USB (1) 2.0 Microphone Jack Headset Jack Firewire (IEEE 1394) LAN (RJ-45) 15-pin D-SUB connector for external VGA monitor KeyPad / User Controls Application buttons with primary and Audio secondary functions Power On/Off/Suspend/Resume button Emergency Shutoff/Reset button Integrated joystick slew control 97 Codec On-board microphone with noise cancellation On-board integrated stereo speakers (1W each) Status Indicators Power, Charge/DC-in, Warning 98 iX104 Users Handbook Appendix D. Hardware Specifications Power specifications Main Battery Optional Spare Battery 2 cell Removable Lithium Ion Polymer 10.8V @ 4500mAh Warm-swappable Recharge Time:
Suspend Life: Min. 5 days Off State: Approximately 30 days 4 cell Removable Lithium Ion Polymer 10.8V @ 9000mAh Warm-swappable Recharge Time:
Suspend Life: Min. 5 days Off State: Approximately 30 days Bridge Battery AC Adapter 6-cell Li ION, 45mAh Life: (with Suspend-to-RAM on bridge battery only): 3 to 5 minutes from full charge Auto-sensing 100-240V, supplying 19 VDC, with a current of 3.75 A iX104 Users Handbook 99 Appendix D. Hardware Specifications Environmental specifications Temperature Operating:
Humidity Shock/Drop Vibration Enclosure Class
-4o to 140o F (-20o to 60o C) Storage:
-40o to 167o F (-40o to 75o C) 0% to 95% non-condensing Three-foot drop to concrete, all surfaces, edges and corners 0.04g^2/Hz, 20 Hz - 1000 Hz
-6dB/octive 1000 Hz - 2000 Hz Blowing rain:
4/hr, 40 mph wind and MIL-STD-810F Method 506.4 Procedure 1 Drip:
7 gal/ft2/hr MIL-STD-810F Method 506.4 Procedure III Sand and dust:
Particle size < 149 m, 10 + 7 g/m3 particle density 1.5 m/s to 8.9 m/s wind speed MIL-STD-810F Method 510.4 Procedure 1 Salt Fog:
5% saline for 48 hr (12 hr wet, 12 hr dry, 2 cycles) MIL-STD-810F Method 509.4 Contamination by fluids:
Detergents, brake fluid, aromatic hydrocarbons MIL-STD-810F Method 504 Solar radiation:
1120 W/m2 (355 Btu/ft2/hr) UVB @ 50 C, 7x24 hr cycles MIL-STD-810F Method 505.4 100 iX104 Users Handbook Appendix D. Hardware Specifications Agency approvals Emissions Immunity Safety EN55022 (CISPR22) Class B FCC 15, Class B DOC Class B CE MARK EN55024 FCC 15, Class B DOC Class B UL and cUL Listed, UL 1950, 3rd Edition TuV T-Mark, EN60950 UL and cUL Listed, UL 1604*
RF exposure OET 65 Radio approvals 47 CFR Part 22, 24 47 CFR Part 15C Operating systems Operating Systems Microsoft Windows XP Tablet PC Edition Microsoft Windows XP Professional Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional iX104 Users Handbook 101 102 iX104 Users Handbook E Agency Notices FCC notices This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Modifications not expressly approved by Xplore Technologies could void this users authority to operate the equipment. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
-- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
-- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
-- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. iX104 Users Handbook 103 Appendix E. Agency Notices RF eposure Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions specified by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operation can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the limit established by the government-adopted requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed in positions and locations (e.g., at the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC for each model.
(Body-worn measurements may differ among phone models, depending upon available accessories and FCC requirements). While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet the government requirement for safe exposure. For body worn operation, to maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines, use only Xplore approved accessories. When carrying the phone while it is on, use the specific Xplore-supplied or approved carrying case, holster, or other body-worn accessory. Use of non-Xplore-approved accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines and should be avoided. 104 iX104 Users Handbook Appendix E. Agency Notices Health and Safety Information Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on the safety standards previously set by both U.S. and international standards bodies:
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) IEEE. C95.1-1992 National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement
(NCRP). Report 86. 1986 International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection
(ICNIRP) 1996 Ministry of Health (Canada), Safety Code 6. The standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg . Note In the U.S. and Canada, the SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 1.6 watts/kg (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in. iX104 Users Handbook 105 Appendix E. Agency Notices DOC (Industry Canada Notices) Notice to Users of Radio and Television This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations CET appareil numrique de la class B respecte toutes les exigence du Rglement sur le matrial brouilleur du Canada. Notice to Users of the Canadian Telephone Network Notice This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical Specifications. This is confirmed by the registration number. The abbreviation, IC, before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment. Before connecting this equipment to a telephone line the user should ensure that it is permissible to connect this equipment to the local telecommunication facilities. The user should be aware that compliance with the certification standards does not prevent service degradation in some situations. Repairs to telecommunication equipment should be made by a Canadian authorized maintenance facility. Any repairs or alterations not expressly approved by Xplore or any equipment failures may give the telecommunication company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment from the telephone line. 106 iX104 Users Handbook Appendix E. Agency Notices Notice The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this terminal equipment is 0.0. The REN assigned to each terminal equipment provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed five. Avis Aux Utilisateurs Du Rseau Tlphonique Canadien Industrie Canada a approuv le materiel. utilisateur est averti que mme la conformit aux normes de certification ne peut dans certains cas empcher la dgradation du service. quipement de la ligne tlphonique. excde pas 5. UL Notice This unit requires and AC adapter to operate. Use only UL Listed Class 2 Adapters with an output rating of 19 VDC, with a current of 3.75 A. AC Adapter output polarity:
iX104 Users Handbook 107 Appendix E. Agency Notices For authorized repair technicians only
WARNING For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with the same type and rating fuse.
WARNING Danger of explosion if Lithium (clock) battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instruction. System disposal In the event of system disposal, observe the following information regarding proper procedures in the State of Vermont. The liquid crystal display (LCD) lamps used in this system contain mercury. In the event of system disposal, be sure to follow local guidelines. 108 iX104 Users Handbook Index A air flow vents, location 22 ambient light sensor disabling 45 location 19 antenna covers, location 20 B battery alarm settings, changing 59 battery pack charge time 54 charging 53 checking charge status 59 checking the charge 54 conserving power 61 discarding 57 installing 57 location 20 removing 55 battery release latch, location 20 BIOS Setup Utility, using 87 C CD-ROM drive, connecting 47 convection air flow cover, location 20 D digital camera, connecting 47 digital video camera, connecting 47 docking 46 double-click, performing with pen 40 dragging and dropping, performing with pen 40 DVD drive, connecting 47 E email, starting 29 F Firewire (IEEE 1394) connector, location 23 Firewire devices, connecting 47 H headphone connector, location 23 headphone volume, adjusting 50 headphone, connecting 50 Hibernation mode description 36 enabling 60 hot keys, programming, see keys, programming hot keys I input device, selecting 30 Internet Explorer, starting 29 iX104 accessories 16 maintaining 73 preventing overheating 74 protecting from damage 73 iX104 Users Handbook 109 Index iX104 (continued) safety procedures 73 storing 75 J joystick using 43 using in landscape mode 32 using in portrait mode 31 K Kensington lock slot, location 22 keys Alt-Tab description 29 location 28 Ctrl-Alt-Del 29 description 29 location 28 Ctrl-Esc description 29 location 28 descriptions 29 Enter description 29 location 28 Esc, using 30 Function description 29 location 28 keys (continued) P1 P2 P3 default function 62 description 29 location 28 default function 62 description 29 location 28 default function 62 description 29 location 28 Power On/Off/Suspend/Resume location 22 programming hot keys 62, 63 to perform other key functions 69 to perform pre-defined functions 67 quick-start diagram 28 Screen Rotation description 29 location 28 Secure Attention Sequence (SAS) 28 Windows Start Menu description 29 location 28 Windows Toggle description 29 location 28 Function mode hot key combinations default functions 62 descriptions 30 navigation, using 31 110 iX104 Users Handbook L LAN connector, location 23 LCD backlight decreasing brightness 30, 45 disabling automatic control 45 enabling manual control 89 increasing brightness 30, 45 LEDs 26 Brightness LED meanings 27 Status LED meanings 26 left button click, performing with pen 40 local area network (LAN), connecting to 48 logging on 29 M microphone connecting external 49 connector location 23 location 19 volume, adjusting 49 monitor activating 51 connecting 51 sending video display to 30 monitor connector, location 23 N navigating in landscape mode 32 in portrait mode 31 Navigation 32 navigation control key, see joystick Index O online help, opening 29 P Page Down performing in landscape mode 32 performing in portrait mode 31 Page Up performing in landscape mode 32 performing in portrait mode 31 pen calibrating 79 double-click speed, changing 41 dragging and dropping 40 holder, location 20 location 20 performing a double-click 40 performing a right-click 40 performing left button click 40 positioning in holder 42 replacing 82 tether, using 42 using 39, 40 pen calibration program opening 30 using 79 location 22 opening 58 power connector, location 23 Power On/Off/ Suspend/Resume key Power Options Properties window power schemes, changing 58 power settings, changing 60 iX104 Users Handbook 111 Index power use, managing 58 projection panel activating 51 connecting 51 sending video display to 30 Q quick-start guide 28 R Reset switch location 19 using 35 resuming operation 38 right-click, performing with pen 40 S screen landscape mode 29 portrait mode 29 protecting 76 screen orientation changing 44 landscape 44 portrait 44 navigating 32 navigating 31 screen protector installing 77 removing 76 replacing 77 screen, active about 15 using pen with 39 screen, touch about 15 using pen with 39 scrolling performing in landscape mode 32 performing in Portrait mode 31 serial number, location 20 Shift+Tab performing in landscape mode 32 performing in portrait mode 31 speaker volume, adjusting 50 speakers connecting 50 location 19 storing the computer 75 support, contacting 18 Suspend mode description 36 ending 38 starting 37 suspending operation 37 Suspend-to-RAM mode, description 36 T Tab performing in landscape mode 32 performing in portrait mode 31 troubleshooting 83 turning off the computer 34 turning on the computer 33 112 iX104 Users Handbook Index U USB port, location 23 USB-compatible device, connecting 48 V video output changing from monitor to computer 51 changing to monitor 51 volume adjusting headphone 50 adjusting microphone 49 adjusting speaker 50 W Windows Task Manager, launching 29 X XPL expansion module, connecting 52 XPL expansion port, location 22, 24 Xplore Tablet Dock docking connector location 25 using 46 Xplore Technologies, contacting 18 iX104 Users Handbook 113 Index 114 iX104 Users Handbook 95-01016
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2003-07-31 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | Original Equipment |
2 | 1850.2 ~ 1909.8 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 | Effective |
2003-07-31
|
||||
1 2 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Xplore Technologies Corp.
|
||||
1 2 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0009692500
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
8601 Ranch Rd. 2222
|
||||
1 2 |
Austin, Texas 78730
|
|||||
1 2 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 | Grantee Code |
Q2G
|
||||
1 2 | Equipment Product Code |
IX104-111
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 | Name |
D**** J****** B********
|
||||
1 2 | Title |
Senior Regulatory and Compliance Engineer
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
512-4********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
512-3********
|
||||
1 2 |
d******@xploretech.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
Cetecom Inc.
|
||||
1 2 |
CETECOM Inc.
|
|||||
1 2 | Name |
L******** S******
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
411 Dixon Landing Rd.
|
||||
1 2 |
411 Dixon Landing Road
|
|||||
1 2 |
Milpitas, California 95035
|
|||||
1 2 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
408-5********
|
||||
1 2 |
408 5********
|
|||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
408-5********
|
||||
1 2 |
408 5********
|
|||||
1 2 |
l******@cetecomusa.com
|
|||||
1 2 |
L******@cetecomusa.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
Cetecom Inc.
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
L******** S****
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
411 Dixon Landing Rd.
|
||||
1 2 |
Milpitas, California 95035
|
|||||
1 2 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
408-5********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
408-5********
|
||||
1 2 |
l******@cetecomusa.com
|
|||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Equipment Class | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||||
1 2 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | |||||
1 2 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Tablet computer with wireless radios | ||||
1 2 | Tablet PC with GSM and WLAN radios | |||||
1 2 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 2 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Yes | |||||
1 2 | Grant Comments | Output power is conducted. SAR compliance for specific colocated transmitter conditions in this tablet computer was evaluated for held-on-lap, and near-body configurations with 1 cm spacing, as shown in this composite filing; other colocated configurations require separate evaluation. Users must be provided with antenna and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The maximum reported SAR value is: body Part 15 0.11 W/kg, Part 22 0.32 W/kg, Part 24 0.35 W/kg. | ||||
1 2 | Output power is EIRP for Part 24 and ERP for Part 22. SAR compliance for specific colocated transmitter conditions in this tablet computer was evaluated for held-on-lap, and near-body configurations with 1 cm spacing, as shown in this composite filing; other colocated configurations require separate evaluation. Users must be provided with antenna and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The maximum reported SAR values are: body Part 15 0.11 W/kg, Part 22 0.32 W/kg, Part 24 0.35 W/kg. | |||||
1 2 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
Cetecom Inc.
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
L******** S******
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
408-5********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
510-2********
|
||||
1 2 |
l******@cetecomusa.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | CE | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.1120000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 0.887 | 0.0016 ppm | 245KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 22.901(d) | 824.2 | 848.8 | 0.138 | 0.0032 ppm | 247KGXW |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC